An Italian Grammar With Exercises 1000023084

V

AN

GRAMMAR

ITALIAN

EXERCISES

WITH

BY

YOUNG

VANCE

MARY

"i

Languages, Mount

Professor of Romance

Holyoke College

UNIVERSITY

NEW

HENRY

HOLT

YORK

AND 1904

COMPANY

1

1

"

" "

"

.

.

"

"

"

"

"

",

"

*

"

Copyright,

1904,

BY

HENRY

ROBERT

HOLT

DRUMMOND,

AND

COMPANY

PRINTER,

NEW

YORK

PREFACE.

book

This

Practical

of

lack

of

chapter

and

In

taken

the

up

the

reason

(the

chapter

are

Numerals

and

with

reading that

Although out,

be

rather

oral

quite

no

is

way

mentioned

book

claims

to

be

which

Regole material

and

the

book.

in

connection

for

work in

ed

the

to

well

as

reference.

independently

been a

fixes pre-

nouns,

chapter,

has

the

;

of

than

largely

consulted Moise's

from

This

the

auxiliaries

of

learned

intended

before

on

dictionary be

same

lesson)

end

the

widely

means

that

at

the

of the

grammars

Italiana,

follow

to

first

by

are

the

principal

the

exercises.

part

it in

the

nouns

conveniently

may or

of not

of

treated

every

Among

Lingua

does

prepositions,

on

from

modification

belong

grammar

pupil

forms

given

are

of

inflection

for

and

the

verbs

on

rather

is

a

chapter,

those

verbs

conjugations tenses

first

irregular

regular,

for

verbal

regular

for

rules

after

before

the

on

the

to

suffixes

numerals

that

harmony taken

the

in

irregular

present

the

on

and

should

that

familiar

being

placed

on

regular

auxiliaries

worked

chapter

from

separated

is

learned

thoroughly

be

given

order

be

general

being

adjectives

on

pronouns.

may

as

adjectives

than

might

the

instance,

reference.

and

use

more

what

explain

For

plan.

inflection the

will

This

class

considered

been

has

utility

of. design.

for

intended

is

its

of

tion. investiga-

preparation della

Osservazioni for

the

lists iii

of

PREFACE.

iv

has

prepositions,etc., and

for

Benelli-Marucelli's

dictionaries

of

Josselyn'sEtude the Italian

on

schen

author

for

book

in

read

the

manuscript;

chapter to Mr.

whose

by the

Mr. the

and

Grandgent a

device

certain

whose

by

Fraser

Messrs.

the

The

borrowed

material

various

sources.

history

no

few

oral

for

the

In

exercises

are

make

D. C. Heath

"

representingto

the

eye

that

adopted;

was

the

French

and

taken

been

from facts

Italian

the

the

from

school

assumed.

is

from

sitions. prepo-

gathered

an

furnished, since own

on

to

nished fur-

Grammar

chapter

on

words

English

Spanish Grammar;

has

to

paragraphs

and

in the

ployed em-

Only

teacher

will

vocabulary

in

useful

to

exercises.

The

author

her Romanic

kindly point

hopes fellow out

that

this

Grammar

workers, and

that

Holyoke

may

they

be

in return

its defects. Mary

Mount

Co.,

Grammar

seq.

the

gestions; sug-

to

exercises

his

valuable

verbs, similar

his

that

of

most

made

Italian

190

furnished

who

read

Messrs.

responsibility for

usually prefer to

and

Squair, whose

for No.

model

der Romani-

Josselyn, Jr.,who

permission

from

and

the section

and ,

Comba,

and

for

correspondences between been

T.

Freeman

Grandgent's

Ramsey,

have

the

Mr.

phonetics

on

irregularitiesof Mr.

to Mr.

exercises

to

permission

in

a

several

Edgren,

helpful.

thanks

returns

material

the

been

of

Grundriss

in Grober's

language

hints.

given

and

phouetiqueitalienne

Philologiehave

The

also

have

Rigutini-Fanfani la

sur

mar; Gram-

Mariotti's

and

drawn,

parts Meyer-Liibke's, Grandgent's,

certain

Sauer's, and The

been

College,

September,

1903.

Vance

Young.

will

TABLE

OF

CONTENTS. PAGE

Orthography,

Pronunciation,

Graphic

and

Signs

i

CHAPTERS

I. II.

Articles

Principles.

First Articles

27

Syntax

Prepositions.

with

Nouns

and

ticle Ar-

the

of

29

III.

Nouns,

IV.

Regular

V. VI.

Gender

their

Number

and

37

Verbs

48

Verbs

Auxiliary

56

Pronouns.

Personal

Personal

Disjunctive

nouns Pro-

65 VII. VIII. IX. X.

Personal

Conjunctive Adjectives

Pronouns.

Reflexive

Verbs

72

Participles

and

82

Possessives

98 Relatives.

Demonstratives.

Interrogatives.

definites In-

102

XT.

XII.

Prefixes

Suffixes

and

Verbs.

Irregular

111

Impersonal

Verbs.

Defective

Verbs XIII. XIV. XV.

116

Dependent

Prepositions.

Infinites

Moods

Conjunctions. Numerals

Adverbs.

and

and

123

Tenses

Numerical

142

Values.

terjections In-

156 Irregular Alphabetical

Verbs

by

Table

Conjugations of

Irregular

171

Verbs

198

Exercises

207

Italian-English

Vocabulary

English-Italian

Vocabulary

244

258

Index

269 v

UNIVE

,

.

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

GRAPHIC

AND

ORTHOGRAPHY,

PRONUNCIATION

SIGNS.

i.

The

followingtables in

used

all the

contain

narily ordi-

sounds

Italian, classified according

spoken

to

of their production. localityand to the manner (a) Vowels are distinguishedwith reference to their Consonants (/?) localityonly, as frontand back vowels. classified (a) according to locality,as: (i) biare dentals, labials,formed by the upper and lower lips; (2) labioformed by the lower lip and the upper teeth; teeth; (3) linguo-dentals, by the tongue and upper the

against the front part of the hard palate; (5) back-palatals, by the ridge of the tongue against the back part of the hard palate; (6) gutturals, by the ridge of the against the soft palate; (b) according to tongue the

by (4) front-palatals,

tip

the

of

tongue

production, as: (1) stops, to form which is stoppedby the actual touching or closing the breath in p\ (2) continuants, in which the of the organs, as is only squeezed, not breath stopped, as in /; (3) of

manner

liquids,which they partake These into

cords

classes

differ from more

vibrate.

the

of consonants

voiceless,in the do

of

continuants

other

of

character also

must

production

of

vowels,

be

vibrate, and

voiced, in which

For

instance, p

is

stop, i.e.,in forming it the

breath

voiceless is

/.

as

subdivided

which

not

the

in that

the

vocal

they

do

bi-labial

stopped by

the

i'italiangrammar.

\ ," : : .; '

,

"

t

"

i

lip, the vocal

the upper 'againstthe lower //touching'of; ' '

b is the

and vibrating,'

cOfds not

with

same

vibration of

key-word is given for each in question sound, the letter representingthe sound being printedin heavy type. The approximate English correspondent in each case is given below (5,12 sq.2). An

cords.1

the vocal

Italian

VOWELS. Front 1

Back

Vowels.

Vowels.

(inni) i

u

(inni) e

u 0

(fremere) " (fremere) a

(rumore)

popolo) (popolo) '9(popolo)

(fremere) e

(una)

o

(ama) (ama)

a

CONSONANTS,

(a) Simple

*

1

the 2

Any

This

simple

sound

work

can

on

as

Consonants.

yet be only tentatively classified.

phonetics

may

serve

tables.

Heavy-face figuresrefer

to

paragraphs.

to

further

elucidate

CONSONANTS.

(b)

Compound

Consonants.

These

are thirty-sixsounds graphically represented k, w, x, and y not occurring by twenty-two letters, in the Italian alphabet. Otherwise it is the same the English. letters of the alphabet and their Italian 3. The 2.

as

are

names

(a) K,

y,

x,

(b) The

w,

iccase

called cappa,

letters

the

are

in the

same

singular:i bi, the b's; glia, the a's. gender of the letters of the alphabet

(c) The variable,but ending in with

"nne

occurring only in foreign words, ics,ipsilon, doppio vu. or

of the

names

in the

as

follows:

as

and

a

e

in are

general feminine

elision of the

i,0, i.e.,

u, and

the

a

"

and

a

e

and

the

(lazeta, "the

"the

while

n"),

ending

consonants

are

plural

is

what some-

consonant

z" ; l,"nne la =

the

in

other

i,0,

or

n,

ters, letare

masculine. 4. The

of that 1

and

These 12

number

of

sounds

of the letters used names

sq. before

being

Italian

attempting

to

to

being

so

much

in

excess

represent them, it is evi-

words,

the

pronounce

pupil should them.

refer to

5

ITALIAN

4

dent

that

one

more

than

one

character sound.

is much

student

to

represent

Italian

howorthography, ever, lish nearly phonetic than is the Engwith

instruction

and

care

every

acquire a really good pronunciation language. The rules given below (5 sq.) will

found

bear

used

should

of the be

more

be

must

The

French, and

or

GRAMMAR.

in

useful, although mind

the

pupil should always the comparisons therein made with

that

to him are alreadyknown only approximate, no Italian sound the English sound as beingquitethe same most sound should be nearly resembling it. The learned by imitation. The teacher is therefore advised to pronounce the Italian key-word slowly,the pupil noting carefullyhis pronunciation.

sounds

VALUE

OF

THE

LETTERS Value

(a) has

5. I

OF

of the

approximately

the

THE

ALPHABET.

Vowels.

of

sounds

English

eel

in "meet". has

I

approximately

pin", or, in hurry

when

11

' '

"

in

called

sound 1

of

a

word

English

i in

(as in poi),of y

the is

approximately

the

sound

mate".3

"open

English e

English vowels, are

"

e", has

the

is, of

That

of

of

2

English a E,

end

sounds

.

E, called "close of

the

at

the

in

"

e", has

approximately

the

met".

firstpart of the ee in "meet". really a diphthong, while the

This, Italian

as

all

vowels

pure. 2

the

The

pupil may

will in the 3

i's will

two

That

learn

meantime

is,of

the

not

be

them

graphically distinguished by ear and by imitation.

all purposes. firstpart of the sound.

in this The

book; first i

answer

Cf.

above, foot-note

1.

VALUE

A

has

A

is

LETTERS

approximately a

pupil may between the

THE

OF

the

neutral

more

these

in

a

difficult to

a

himself

apportunity of hearing

father".

"

The

distinguish

to

his ear,

Italians

5

describe.

not

Later

sounds.

two

ALPHABET.

of

sound

first content

at

THE

OF

if he

speak, will

has

detect

the difference.

o", has

9, called "open is

a

sound

the

between

in

a

English equivalent.

no "

"

paw

the

and

o

in

"

It 1 "

pop t "

nearlythat given in parts of Maine to the 0 in road The "coat". sound, although difficult of explanation, be readilylearned by imitation. may 0, called "close 0", has approximately the sound of o in pope". U has approximately the sound of 00 in "too". of 00 in 'toot". U has approximately the sound "

"

Between

the

close o, there is

subtle

shades

6. Attention

intermediate

an

detect

may

the close e, the open

and

open

ear

and

of sounds

not

by

is called

sounds, produced alone

to

and

which

sound

and

the

the

dent stu-

learn

by imitation, such tion. being capable of defini-

the

fact

that

in the order

the

given in

vowel graph para-

beginning with i and going down the left side of the triangle, then up the right,recede continually and Therefore the i-e-a regularly in the mouth. series is called the front,the a-o-u the back series. From the lipsare also regularlymore a to u and more 1

,

rounded.1

1

Mr.

Josselyn (Etude calls

reason

the

name

our

back

the

a-o-u

of anterior.

series.

phonetique italienne, p. 13) for this the i-e-a series series the labial, giving to His anterior therefore =our his labial jro)it, sur

la

6

ITALIAN

7. All

vowels

as

in

GRAMMAR.

well

all consonantal

as

sounds

in quicker,more energeticmanner Italian than in English (althoughthe former are somewhat less energeticthan the French vowels). One must reallywork harder in pronouncing them. vowels do The tend to become never neutral, nor

produced

are

the consonants is the

as

This

take

ever

in

case

is what

after

them

English. gives to spoken

neutral

a

Italian

its

vowel,

peculiarly

effect.

staccato

8. The

is the

a

only

real

distinction

In words

offered difficulty

of open

and

close

e

the

by and

vowels

o.

of

popular development, i.e.,such as always been a part of the spoken language, the 1 is represented generallyin Italian e or by an Latin e or ae by an ", 6 or u by 0, 6 or au by 9. It follows and

uo

are

that

accented

and

o

in the

Latin e, the

groups

1

ie

open:

Pi"de, foot ("pedem); But:

e

have

godere,

(" capillum) ;

buQno, good

("b6num).

capello, hair enjoy ("gaudere); loro, their ("illorum); volto, face ("vulto

tum). MORE

SPECIAL

9. E

RULES

THE

FOR

QUALITY

OF

THE

is close: In

syllables.2 (2) In monosyllables,3whether standing composition with other words: (1)

in 1

The

VOWELS.

unaccented

first element

in these

alone

or

not being a consonant, they cantable also of conso28, Rem. diphthongs. (1), nants, where the i is registeredas j, the u as w. 2 This e is really medium close,but for practical purposes may be regarded as close. 3 which not Words are normally monosyllabic but which have

be

called

groups

See

Me,

with

meco,

me;

LETTERS

THE

OF

VALUE

prepositioncon);

e,

THE

OF

ALPHABET.

of

(a compound

me

i tre

and;

the

re,

7 and

me

the

kings; che,

three

that, which.

",*is; "h! (exclamation); ch", nonsense!;

Exceptions:

(musical note); be, (imitation of the of foreignorigin;as, il t",tea. Also words is

in

ending by the

(3) In oxytones regularlymarked

Perche, why, because;

sheep).

vowel,2 which

a

vowel

(see 32 a) :

accent

grave

feared.

he

teme,

of

bah

re,

Moses;

Mos", as, Exceptions: (a) Proper names; Giosu",Joshua. of foreign origin3; as, caff",coffee; (b) Nouns

canap",

sofa.

interjectionsahime, is,that is to say".

imm", ohim";

(c) The "that

In the

accented

indicative

and

(4)

indicative In

(5)

of the

Mostreremo,

(6) In

of '-ere verbs.

endings

adverbial

the

ending

temerete,

ending

-mento

(See 67 (2).)

of verbs

-rete

-remo,

shall show;

we

0

become Ex.: 1

so

But

3

These

4

Notice

5

In

not

cases

fear.

the

stantive sub-

:

contraction

by that

for

this

naturally

sfi, has

in

"

thou

the

conj. Or, more exactly, to distinguishit from the 2

and

jugations: con-

going, gait.5

is close:

s"' (notse'), Notice

of all

shall

you

-mente

Felicemente, happily; andamento, 10.

cio",4

ending of the infinitive,imperfect subjunctive,and of the preterite

and

-ere

also

never

the not

to

compounding covered

accent

by

form

of

under

come

to

conjunction

verbal

pi|, contraction conform

not

the

rule.

distinguish it from

does

not

pi"de.

e,

rules

take

the

(32 (b) (1)). Cf.

note

rule. with

this

".

art

grave

the

do

"is". the

e

is open.

to

9

(2).

grave

e

8

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

(i) In unaccented

syllables.1 monosyllablesending with

(2) In

Con, with; But

11.

not.

non,

accented

vowel, i.e.,where

a

is open

2

ending

in oxytones

monosyllablesand

in

consonant2:

a

ends

o

that

word,

a

in o

:

S9, I know;

hg, I have;

mostrerg,

Lo, definite

Exceptions:

article

I shall show. and

also

pronoun;

contractions.

[BUT3In all cases

(1) and

9

e's and

paragraph

P, b, f,v,

12.

in

as

m,

the

in the mouth. T and

into

1,and

n

and

cated quality indiindicatingthe close, their

pronounced approximately stops being, however, more 1 being made farther forward q3 are

"

d

are

so

different

a

n,

graph (para-

Consonants.

of the

Value

English,the

and explosive,4

13.

have

signs,e and 0 pronunciation.

(b)

first rule

(1)),i.e.,all accented

10

diacritic

9 the open

the

by

o's, will in this book

by " and

covered

not

farther

much

forward

They

sound-category.

as

to

come

not,

are

as

in

the tip of linguo-dentals, back of the teeth in producing

English, post-dentals,but the tongue

touching the

them. Cf. 9 (1). Not heart". cupre, 1

where

the

o

is

contraction

a

of

uo

in

cQr, for

"

not

q

2

Notice

3

Q is

the not

to

difference be

found

between in

the

e

and

table

o.

of consonants

but equals k followed by simple consonant always represents this sound, like English q a

never

represents k.

"Cf. 7-

it is

because w.

in

The

Italian

"quick".

It

VALUR

and

C

14.

THE

OF

Before

LETTERS

voiceless, somewhat

back-palatal stops, c the English 'cat", 'kid", g English got : ' '

I

Canto,

But

(a)

C

the

as

in

as

in

that

of

voiced, somewhat

' '

in

sing (c as

gola, throat 15.

9

quite different sounds. vowels, a, o, u, they represent the

back

the

MET.

ALPHA

two

represent

g

THE

OF

(g

in

as

English "can"); English "go").

before the front

represents

sound

a

English ch, i.e.,it

vowels,

i:

like

somewhat

into

passes

and

e

the

category of

pound com-

consonants:

like ch

Cielo, sky (c pronounced to look

for

(b)

G

(the first c pronounced ch,

also becomes

corresponding

'chain'*); cercare, second

the

compound

voiceless

and

c

Gentile, nice (g almost almost

as

in the

as

in

k). consonant,

represents

English 'gentle",but

in

legislatura(g

voiced

a

the

to

like that

sound

in

a

ble: forci-

more

cognate "gentle");

corresponding English

the

word). Remark. as

Cc,

simple

the

saggio, wise (gg Where

stop stands inserted

Chiave,

to

a

(cc

or

g

before

one

indicate

key

like tch

like g in c

e

and

i have

the

sound

same

only prolonged:

consonant,

Caccio, I hunt

16.

before

gg

the

in

"sage",

'catch", but but

prolonged).

representing the of the

front

voiceless

(the initial

sound

prolonged);

back-palatal

vowels,

an

h

is

pronunciation: in the as English

word). Ghirlanda, garland (the initial sound word). Ch 17.

never

has

the

sound

Ng is like the

given

English

to

as

it in

sound

in

English

the

English

"

chin".

in, for instance,

ITALIAN

io

GRAMMAR.

"coming", with a distinct hard sound however, forming but one I

Vengo,

:

vcnggo); lingua, tongue

(pronounced

come

it, the two,

after

g

(litiggua). This

same

the stop

before

or

c

sound

ng

is

given

to

alone

n

an

before

:

q

again (angkora); dunque, therefore (dungkwe). followed Consonantal unaccented u by a u, i.e.,

Ancora, 8.

1

vowel, x has almost

the sound like

(u almost

Ucjmo, man

w

of

Englishw

in

"woman");

:

guanto, glove (gwanto). U

which 19.

might

be written

S has

two

the

s

it in

given to

English "museum",

"mew".

(1) it is voiceless

in Italian:

sounds

the

in "maze".

z

like

(2) it is voiced

'hearse";

English "see", in "hears", or

in

as

sound

has the

never

general

The

rule is: S initial followed consonants

by

f, p, q, t;

c,

also

voiceless consonant,

Santo, saint;

vowel

a

s

by

less of the voice-

one

followed

medial

voiceless

are

ss,

spiare,to

stone;

sasso,

or

as

in

by "

a

see":

fresco, fresh;

spy;

asfalto,asphalt. S medial

voiced

the

vowels,2

between

Sgridare,to scold; But

intervocalic

(a) After (where the 1

Accented ''two"

due, 2

the

This s

is

is

(u

as

rule does

are

voiced

as

museum.

is voiceless:

by

in the

a

pre,

pro,

re,

ri, tra

vowel

retains

its vowel

sound.

Ex.:

English "duel").

apply

not =

s

1, r,

: reallyinitial)

really initial, the

n,

prefixes de, di,

followed

u

museo, s

the s

m,

initial before

or

/.

-^-^

:

use

b, d, g,

consonants

""

""

in

medial

s

to

si dice.

is also initial.

cases

In

like dicesi,

compounds

"they say", like

where

flower", girasole,"sun-

Mu

Pisa

parastto '

'

Mussulm.-nnv

MM

pi

susmo

befoi

Sc

i

" "

S*ic'.'::i

"\\

"

'

"""'"'

s"

"

ic4toU

ik

'

"

"

"

""..-..""

\n

Kch

cl

'

"

i '

" "

""

"

tes this sound

4

r ;

J

;

CHI-

tS

a"ut, "

'":" ..'

to. .

"4"fctt*

-

"

-

24.

what " "

i.in

THB

OF

VALtJB (ii

indicates

1i1"i

that oi

v

LETTERS

THE

OF

xi.i'ii \iu.

1, a usuallythe Liquid in in "brilliant", or oi

sound in

ii

[3

i

some

Brazil

'

1

'

:

and In-idle; Brij"lia, ^li (article

pronoun), "to neglect",and its derivativi (./) But in tieglfgere, the k' ,:; sounded as English,also in Angli,Anglicano, in

and " few other rare word geroglffico, glicerlna, These words are not thoroughly [talianized. winch bears ili"."5- Gte represents liquidn, a sound relation i"" "" as does liquid1 to l. Ii. somewhal same resembles the sound ""i nl in "union", 'onion", 01

that

1 "i

French

nj; in

'

montagne

lamb. VergQgna,shame; agngllo, ;iikI zz usuallyrepresent 8 ti very energeti 26. z the corresponding callyenunciated, but sometimes

voiced sound In

dz.

generala

z

derived

the voiceless (is) sound,

from

Latin t, ct, from

one

Latin

pt has

or

"i or

(deck

{ the voiced (dz) : Grdzia, tidneui);

no/.zc,

But;

gratiam); azione,action

f.-ivor (

ju-.k-c,

w"-"

rozzo,

l"Inn; (

rude

(

QUpti"f) all Willi rudum); zona,

Is

"

iOUnd. with

/one

ai

dz

sound.

The

rule:; may following

The

s"

1

Thia

licelessi

comparison,as Inadequate.

the middle and

makes

tion

near

'*

helpful.

it is initialor

when

it

is medial

consonant:

a

very

1.

v"

Generallywhen

(a)

after

lund is

also be

1 he

as

sounds

Tin-

oi the tongue

the

See note

well

given below

.in-

1

ww/"/r

foi the In

liquido,

forming them

flat against the hard palate In withdrawing the tip from Its po 1

lies almost

ordinary a,

bacl" 1 ii 1 he uppei to 24.

thai

teeth.

ITALIAN

14 i

Zio, uncle;

GRAMMAR.

"

remainder.

avanzo,

it is followed

(6) When

by

i

plus a

vowel

:

Prezioso, precious; gzio,leisure; avarizia, avarice. It is voiced: In

(a) -izzare

:

X of

verbs ^

than

more

four

syllablesending

in

",

Armonizzare,

Attizzare,

have

compounds,

utilizzare,to utilize.

harmonize;

to

Exceptions: stizzare

5

dirizzare, guizzare, rizzare,

Their contrary the voiceless z. in dirizzare,keep this voiceless sound.

the

on

such

as

(b) In z"lo,"zeal",

compounds; in azzurro, 'azure"; bazar, "bazaar"; dozzina, 'dozen"; m"zzo, 'middle", and its compounds; orizzonte, "horizon"; 'dinner"; ribrezzo, "shivering"; zeffiro, pranzo, words.1 rare 'zephyr"; zona, "zone", and some initial only It is found as 27. H is silent in Italian. in the

verbal

forms

its

and

hg,

"I

hai, "thou

have";

hast";

"they have", and in a few exclamations such hura as (reallynot Italian). It tain serves graphicallyto indicate the pronunciationof cersometimes combinations (see 16 and 21), and show to that two vowels coming together preserve 'he

ha,

each

one

has";

hanno,

its separate value,

Vowel

in ahi.

as

Groups.

triphthongsexist apparently in in realityfew in Italian,but there are great number of the diphthongs and no triphthongs at all,many vowels value, and thongs diphhaving consonantal many in appearance being reallydissyllables. 28.

1

For

under

Diphthongs

which

(b) either

sec

and

Moise.

have

the

"

It will be Latin

d

noticed

("z)

or

are

that

of

the

words

given

foreign extraction.

VALUE

THE

OF

OF

LETTERS

THE

ALPHABET.

for instance, the bugno, figliuglo,

In

consonant

(=w),

(cf. 24).

In

bugi the

In

other

3, i is

foot-note

u

mere

a

the

and

is

a

i after

gl is

combinations

before

u a

15

is

o

a

part of the 1

given under

22,

sign. and

consonant

the

final i forms

a

syllable. A real diphthong is two vowels produced by one and of which the same receives the breath-impulse,one A diphthong in which the second element accent.1 is called a rising diphthong,one is the accented in which the first bears the accent a falling diphthong: (c7)Rising diphthongs:

Ex.:

paese,

country;

paura2,

fear.

(b) Falling diphthongs: ass"i, very; l"i,she, to her; stoico,stoic. Remarks, which

(i)

In

first member

the

all

dura, breeze, air;

(apparent) rising diphthongs

is i

or

u, that

first member

is

in

sonantal: con-

Piede, foot; butjno, good. In

(2) from

the

i.e.,the

compounds where diphthong, that two

vowels

form

principalaccent is removed diphthong becomes dissyllabic, each a separate syllable,thus the

dissolvingthe diphthong: Paese (ae diphthong) paesano ,

(ae dissyllabic);paura,

pauroso.

Syllabication. With

the

few

exceptions of the diphthongs and vocalic have as dissyllables(see 28), Italian words divided are as vowels, and the syllables syllables many 29.

1 2

Cf.

Hempl,

Care

is not

aw

German

Orthography and Phonology- 146 in the pronunciation of au. The be taken must but or ah-oo, pronounced rapidly. ow, very ,

sound

1

6

ITALIAN

in such

a

that

way

GRAMMAR.

each

begins with

In

consonant.

a

division

the

(i) A

between

consonant

vowels

two

with

the

divided

into

goes

second1: I

A-mo,

love;

zo-na;

Exceptions:

mal

(2) Double

consonants

two

with

doz-zi-na.

in medial with

goes

divided:

are

mez-zo;

(3) Usually or

Ex.:

parts.

year;

one

are

Mal-a-ge-vo-le,"difficult", agevole; ab-u-sare, "to abuse" (ab+usare).

and

An-no,

words, which

Compound

their component from

119-mo.

of two or groups the preceding, the

more

sonants con-

other

one

following:

the

Al-to, high; al-tro,other.

(i) In

Exceptions2: continuant 1

or

plus

n) both

Ma-dre,

groups

of liquid (i.e.,

a

members

go

composed

of

a

stop

p, b, t, d, c, g, f, v,

a

plus

with the followingsyllable :

a-cri-mo-ni-a, acrimony;

mother;

or

theatre; a-pri-re,to open;

te-a-tro,

se-gre-to,secret.

is difference of usage: of c-\-q there (2) In the case a-cquistareand ac-quistare. consonant Groups of 5 followed by one more (5 impura) are usually said also to make exception; but while the question is scarcely decided, it is probable that they are divided

1

The

resist

a

in the usual

be sharply divided, and syllables must between tendency to attach a consonant

first.

the

cine, the to

more

the

same 2

:

way

d

He

has

been

accustomed

belonging decidedly

the word

second thus:

than

to

to

the

to

the

say,

the

He

must

vowels

two

to

for instance, mcd-i-

first syllable,the

third.

pupil

must

c

(5 sound)

in Italian

divide

me-di-ci-na.

the following liquid n and / being simple sounds go with Ex.: syllableaccording to the general rule. i-gnu-do,"naked";

The

bri-glia,"bridle".

VALUE

OF

THE

LETTERS

"dark"

os-cu-ro,

OF

THE

(not o-scu-ro)

ALPHABET.

17

riKjs-tro,"I

;

show"

(not 1119-stro).

Accentuation.

largemajority of Italian words are stronglythe penult (that is, the syllablebefore on

The

30.

accented the last): mano,

hand

There

are,

accent a

;

however,

the

on

castigo,punishment.

antepenult or even number bearing it

considerable

Mostr^,1he

showed;

siderano, they

words

many

are

bearing farther

they

mostrarono,

tonic

back; last

the

on

the

also

syllable:

showed;

con-

considering; virtu, virtue; propriety,

property.

Accents.

Graphic

graphic accents, the grave, the acute, and The grave is much used in Italian. the circumflex, are more frequent than the others. is placed: accent grave 32. The (a) On a final vowel stressed in pronunciation: 31.

Three

la

Mostrera

He

bonta.

sua

monosyllables by

(b) On

ending in a vowel: Gia, already; piu, more;

his goodness.

will show nature

or

by

contraction

|, is; si, yes; pi" (contracted

foot. pie,de),

from

(i) A

Exceptions:

words

the

different 1

in

Receives

same

in appearance

meaning), the

grave

of

number

such accent.

and

(that is, in sound, but

homonyms often

as:

See

following paragraph.

1

8

ITALIAN

and,

e,

to

GRAMMAR.

distinguishit from

if,

se,

la

di, day; " "

it,

neither;

ne,

la,there

(dcf.art.), "

li

self;

si,yes;

di,of, of

is;

se, n

si,self,one,

ne,

e,

li,there

da, from, (2) Certain

; ;

da, he gives, verbal

forms ,

as

fa, he does, makes;

:

va, he *

sta, he stands

goes;

(c) Also

(1) them

often

as

Shortened from

; sa, he a

forms

knows;

of the

can).

infinitive:

(for mostrarono),1 they showed;

mostrar

he

on: distinguishingmark of the preteriteto distinguish

forms

shortened

(but PU9,

(for

mostrar

mostrare), to show. (fortemerono), they feared;

temer

(for temere),

temer

fear.

to

partir (for partirono),they departed; partir (for

par-

tire),to depart. (2) Other

verbal

forms

which

have

homonyms2:

dai, thou

givest; dai (prep,plus art.). danno, they give; danno, damage, harm. VQi (for vugi),thou wishest; voi, you. abitino, let them

(3) The two

1

accented

This

and

the are

3

of

polysyllablesending

in

This

is

usage

accent

Accented

of the following (corresponding) forms the antepenult: accented, in speaking, on

other trarono, mos-

partirono.

temerono,

acute

penult

vowels:

conjugations 2

dwell; abitino,3little dress.

optional

in

these

on

the

and

arbitrary.

Some

writers

cases.

penult according

to

the

general

rule.

use

the

ITALIAN

20

(b) Sometimes

the

on

ending

GRAMMAR.

i, plural of the

jective ad-

and

noun

-io1:

Studi, studies; necessari,necessary. latitude

and

(b), and

some

this

In

151^

usage.

lack

that

there

is

of

unanimity of the graphic accents. use exceptions,and 34 (a) cover

the

to

as

observed

It will be

35.

book

the

acute

good

a

of

deal

Italians

among

Sections the

(a), ordinary 32

will be

accent

employed only to show the stressingin pronunciation of a syllableother than the penultimate or than the ultimate This indication, bearing the grave accent.2 together with the marking of the closed and open e under and The (see note 11), is peculiar to it. o and marking are in pronunciaaccent to be observed tion, but not to be employed in writingthe exercises. Elision,Contraction,Truncation, etc. 36. Besides

lo, la, gli, le,

(pronominal),the preposition che5 are conjunctions se and regularly

le, mi, ti,ci,4 vi, the

and

di

elided

before

1

vowel.

a

-10.

of words A

vowel

The

whether 3

For

4

Which

acute

the

which

vowel

follows,6or should

in

No

ending

-io, -ia. be

will also be i be see

becomes

lose its proper

stressed 41

of

words

Special attention

good dictionary should 2

All

unaccented

an

if another

'-io not

si

ne,

syllableending in vowel

(article3), lo, la, gli,

una

be rule

one

may

elide that

truncate

it before

paid

to

be

can

the

ation accentu-

given for

it.

the

guide. placed on all words

or

than

more

ending

in -ia, -io,

unstressed.

.

c

only before

Preferably only before

8

Elision is much

more

and

i, since

it would

Cf. 14.

sound.

5

e

e

and

i.

frequent

in

poetry

than

in prose.

wise other-

VALUE

THE

OF

LETTERS

initial consonant

any

but

consonant;

except

which

elide their accented

a'

(for ai), p9* (pqco)are

as

conjunctions

(a) The often

ed, od, ad,

(b) a

A

before

d

add

the the

vowel,

word

Capitalsare

(a) The

conjunction che, only oxytones

('on tractions

such

common.

and

e

and

preposition a preposition su adds r:

0

the

of

the

Capitals.

employed

'I", is

io,

pronoun

in

as

English save

libro

]"ccoun

He

(c) The

is

is

Here

italiano.

written

not

capitalunless it begins a sentence, "you", are often capitalized. (b) Adjectives of nationalityare words used as a capital. The same : capitalized an

whereas

that: with

Lei, Ella,

written

not nouns

a

are

Italian

with

usually |)

book.

Italian.

an

of months

names

usuallywritten signor, Mr".1

are

by another

preceded by beginning with s impure, when in school. school; in iscugla, prefixesi: scugla, Use

Italiano.

21

sur.

consonant

37.

ALPHABET.

followed

s

are

vowel;

a

THE

of

compounds

giacche, benche,

dacche,

as

OF

with

a

days of the week small letter,also titles such and

of

"

as

(Exercise I.)

Correspondence 38. There

are

between

Italian

in

a

corresponding so nearly both that they the English ones 1

Greater

Italian

than

individual in

freedom

English.

Italian and

in

English.

large number in form

may the

be use

of words

and

meaning to easilyrecognized of

capitals exists

in

ITALIAN

22

terminations

following lists of corresponding in this recognition.

The

pupil.

by the

GRAMMAR.

will aid

Nouns. (The letter / or

at

m

f ade becomes

the

ata

m.

age becomes

m.

al becomes

the

gender.)

brigata,cascata.

:

.

beginning of the line indicates

aggio: paggio, personaggio.1 ale: animale, canale {or alio: corallo,

metallo). cristallo, m.

alt adds

m.

an

m.

ant

m.

arian becomes

m.

ate

m.

ator

adds

asfalto,cobalto.2

o:

veterano. cristiano,

o:

adds

diamante, instante.

e :

becomes adds

ario ato

:

centenario, unitario.

carbonato, stato.

:

creatore, oratore.

e:

(zio,zzo) : comme^rcio or commerzio, precipizio.3 palazzo (sometimes palaccio), cle becomes m. *culo,4colo,or chio: circolo (or cirm.

becomes

ce

(more commonly) cerchio, ostaculp.

culo) or m.

cio

becomes

ct

tto

f. cy becomes ent

m.

zia:

adds

intelle,tto.5 contatto, eff"tto,

:

aristocrazia, pot"nzia.

age,nte,ori"nte;or accid"nte,

e:

adds

o:

contento, conv"nto, tal"nto. m.

ge becomes

m.

gen

1

are

adds

Also

Rem.

nitrogeno.6

correspondence is not so, perfect viaggio, "voyage", "journey"; coragoltraggio,"outrage", etc.

3

4

Terminations

Also

For

etc.

the

f in

asfalto

see

p.

26,

(b).

Also

ending

the

assalto, "assault",

3

5

o:

Many others in which yet easilyidentified,as:

gio, ''courage"; 2

vestigio. *gio: privil"gio,

solazzo, "solace", spazio, "space", marked

with

an

asterisk

etc.

indicate

that

antepenultimate syllable. prodotto, "product".

arc

accented

on

the

6Idrogeno, "hydrogen",

ossigeno,

"oxygen",

etc.

words

so

VALUE

THE

OF

LETTERS

graph becomes

m.

f. ic adds

*a:

izia

f. ine becomes

medicina. disciplina,

confusione,religione.

e:

isan becomes

m.

isk becomes

m.

ism

m.

ist adds

m.

ite becomes

m.

wewJaddso:

m.

meter

adds

igiano: artigiano, partigiano.2 isco

asterisco,basilisco.

:

despotismo, pessimismo.

0 :

artista,dentista.

a:

ito

appetito, granito,sito.

:

fragmento (orframmento),monumento.

becomes

*metro

becomes

monia

becomes

on

m.

or

adds adds

f. ose

barone.

adds

despota,patri"ta(patri"tta).

a:

m.

phone becomes

m.

ry becomes

m.

scope becomes

ter

m.

or

tre

splendore,vapore.4

glucosa,rQsa.

osa:

*fono

*rio

f. sis becomes

sermone.

errore,

becomes

ot

m.

e:

ceremonia,parsimonia.

danza, intellig"nza, sci"nza.3

nza:

e :

anemometro, gasometro.

:

:

.

m.

23

avarizia,malizia.

:

ina:

m.

f. nee

ALPHABET.

grafo: autografo, fonografo.1

.

f mony

THE

aritmetica,musica, lggica.

f ice becomes

f. ion adds

OF

gramdfono, telefono.

:

consistgrio, mist"rio.

:

scopio : microscopio,telescopic

si: crisi

becomes

(or crise), sinopsi.5

tro

f. tion becomes

zione:

f tude becomes

*tudine

c"ntro, ministro,registro.

:

condizione, nazione.

.

:

amplitudine,multitudine, soli-

tudine. 1

This

(6),p. 2

Also

3

Also

etc.

In

ph regularly becomes

Also

filosofo, etc.

:

Cf.

Remark

(3)

26.

cortigiano, "courtesan", eccellfnza, "excellence", other

4Alsoautore, 5

f

cases

nee

circonferenza,

etc.

onpre,

"circumference",

provincia, "province", "honor", etc.

gives ncia;

"author",

tesi, "thesis,"

etc.

as,

etc.

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

24

f ty becomes

ta

.

*ulo:

ule becomes

m.

f

becomes

lire

etemita,

:

ura

m.

um

m.

us

becomes

(not otherwise

f. y

"

genio.

ce,nso,

o :

premio.

museo,

o :

becomes

capsulo (or capsolo), gl"bulo. natura. figura,

:

.

societa.1

provided

for

above)

becomes

anatomia, energia,geografia,zoologia.

ia:

Adjectives.2 acious becomes al adds adds

an

e :

adds

ar

dominante,

e : e :

ario ario ato

ble becomes

*bile :

becomes

est

tto

becomes adds adds

or

id adds

*o:

He remains

de,nso,imm"nso.

:

manifesto,on"sto. *eo

calcareo, erroneo,

:

*fero

ical becomes

ique becomies

nubile,notabile,solubile.

intatto, perf^tto.

:

ferousbecomes ic

prec"rio,vicario.

:

evid"nte,prud"nte (oro: cont"nto).

e: o :

vacante.

duplicato,ornato.

:

enso

becomes

eous

ico

ico :

satirico.3 misantr"pico,

:

antico.

valido. rapido, s^lido,

unchanged

:

fragile. fertile, facile,

Also

cittk, "city",

2

Only

3

Also

singular of pubblico, "public", etc.

under

al.

i^eo.

aurifero,carbonifero.

:

1

the

verace.

contrario,ordinario.

:

ate becomes

ent

sagace,

solare. circolare,

ary becomes

ense

capace,

americano, pagano.

arious becomes

ct

:

centrale,immortale.

o :

adds

ant

ace

masculine

etc.

the But

adjectives is given. musicale as given above

Italian

THE

OF

VALUE

ine becomes zte

diurno, et^rno.

no:

ocious becomes

oce

atroce, feroce,precoce.

:

preparatories2 meritQrio,

orio:

becomes

ous

or

25

viol"nto.

o :

nal becomes

ose

ALPHABET.

decisivo,definitive1

ivo:

cry becomes

THE

erudito,infinito.

ito:

ive becomes

OF

aquilino,divino.

ino:

becomes

lent adds

LETTERS

verboso, famoso, furioso,

oso:

luminoso.3

tial becomes und

ziale

becomes

ondo

becomes

ure

uro

potenziale.

: :

moribondo,

rubicondo.

futuro,puro.

:

Verbs.

becomes

ate

fy

are

calcolare,investigare.

:

becomes

ficare:

ize becomes

izzare

often

becomes

e

fortificare, magnificare. :

are

civilizzare,organizzare.

cominciare, continuare,

:

curare,

etc.4

end

in

a

fact

(t) The

Remarks,

that

most

Italian

words

is evident.

vowel

(2) It will further

be

observed

that

(a) English x

=ks) is replaced simple consonant, by c or s: eccellfnza, 'excellence"; ossigeno, oxy.gen". (6) Ou or u are often replaced by o: corraggio, "courage"; cortigiano, 'courtesan"; circolare, (which is

not

a

'

"circular",

(c) In combinations

1

Also

2

Preparativo is, however,

3

Also

4

of the

of two

stops assim-

attivo, "active", etc. more

used.

giocoso, "jocose", lussurioso, "luxurious",

etc.

French from English e verbs are mostly derived the first conjugation, i.e., er verbs. The comparison three languages with the Latin is interesting. These

verbs here

of

26

ITALIAN

ilation '

'perfect";

perf"tto,

occurs:

manufacturer".

(d)

'theatre";

teatro,

GRAMMAR.

H

manifattore, "

is omitted:

honor";

onore,

'rheumatism"

reumatismo,

(cf.

27).

(3) In words (a)

becomes

Y

grafico

(b)

becomes

Ph ' '

pn,

'pneumatic"; (4) It is

consonant

of the words

"

lead

to

out

the

;

to

be

may

as

understood

and

two

to

English

but

help

it is to

of the

circulo.

beginning with theless English, which never-

the

words:

sviluppare,

dismount".

The

clear

made sviare

way", etc. corresponding in

Where one

forms

two

or

ments develop-

words

many

'to

ment develop-

ation by the consider-

and

the

older

the

two

languages, or

or

hoped

impress

will not

one,

the

that

the

the

be

word

spaced

by

disviare,

the

word

table

will

upon

the

of

vocabularies.

terminations

Italian

help

in the exercises

in the

appear

Italian

more

formed

and

foregoing directions, will

in this book

find two

to

emy". "Ptol-

Tolomeo,

of the

be

may

Psalmist"

neumatico,

p:

palazzo, circolo and

"to

doublets

ISir3 Words which

the

English

to

smontare,

such

pt drop

in Italian

strange

correspond

develop";

"

in Italian

are

groups

of

.

termination,

same

orto-

'

palacio and

There

.

filosofo, "philosopher";

unusual

of the

(5)

'

tipo-

'

and

ps,

"sympathy";

simpatia, '

salmista,

not

word:

origin:

f:

orthography

(c) Initial

same

i:

typographical

,

grafia,

of Greek

correspond will

even

memory.

be

in these

given, cases

28

ITALIAN

scolare,the scholar; gliscolari,the scholars.

NLo v

GRAMMAR.

L' 1191110, the man; gliugmini,the men. the Italian;gP Italiani, \!L* Italiano, the Italians.

Feminine

:

Singularla,pluralle. becomes

La

before ^La

e

before

V

the

1' "rre, the R's.

R;

1' economie,

1/ economia,

the economy; J L' epistola, the epistle;V

The

forms

Masculine

of the indefinite article

accordinglyused The except impure s and z. il and

consonant

before all vowels.2

is used

(b) Uno,3 correspondingto lo, and and

impure s 4

z

libro,a book;

Un

are:

:

any

form

economies.

the

the epistles. epistole,

(a) Un, correspondingto same

1'

le mani, the,hands.

hand;

v-L* "rre, the letter

before

become

le may

only1:

mano,

41.

vowel,

any

4

like it before

used

:

scholar;

scolare,a

uno

un

a

ugmo,

man.

Feminine

v

:

una,

contracted

Una

ragazza,

From

42.

the

is abstracted number

1 2

with

the

girl;un'

gra,

y^vel:

a

an^Bur.

foregoingparagraphs and examples followinggeneralrule for gender and

:

is the rule for

This

Strictlyspeaking contraction

by with

a

to un* before

an

ordinary prose.

the

of the

o,

apostrophe

form

when

but

since

it

seems

used the

best

before

contraction to

consider

a

vowel is it

never as

is

uno

cated indi-

identical

un.

3

Compare

4

The

English "a" and "an". indefinite article has no plural. "Some" the

use

of

=alcuni.

*"

ARTICLES

The

sign of

PREPOSITIONS

WITH

the masculine

29

singularis

o

;

of the

culine mas-

plurali. The sign of the feminine nine singularis a; of the femiplural e. This general rule applies to articles,nouns, nouns, proand adjectives. Exceptions will be noted la}er. {Exercises

(Read

II

CHAPTER

ARTICLES

43.

Italian are

nouns

PREPOSITIONS.

indicated

of the

by

the

definite

are

usually contracted

the

article is used

of

use

with

into

Article.

inflected.

not

are

III.)

II.

WITH

Syntax

III.)

write

and

II

and

one

a

Their

tions rela-

prepositions.When prepositionthe two word.

The

tions contrac-

are:

Remarks, the

other

(i)

Per

is less

prepositions.

often

contracted

than

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

30

forms

(2) The

written

though

dei, ai,1etc.

II libro dello scolare

"

on

j

L*

boy's book.

sulla

tavola.

learned

print be

coarse

referred

would

abstract

class of

carita "

L' ugmo

i/GP Italiani Before

una

title followed

re

"

II

signor Bernasconi.

Papa 1

De

il

or

The

should

be

curato

not ma

stralunati 2

But

col

of late,

seen

are

vocative.

maestro2:

pronounced whether

often

decides

contracted.

Ex.:

Domand^

con

1' orrecchio

ear

cuor

sospeso,

(Manzoni, the

conte, and

re,

a

Papa Innoc^nzio,Pope Innocent.

la, etc., often

della, etc.

Emmanuel.

C.

title is

the

papa,

name:

proper

Victor

Countess

(a) Where before

Often

a

B.

Mr.

Cesaresco.

Exceptions:

by

King

Emanu"le. Vittgrio

music.

Italians love

la musica.

II

(b)

a

is mortal.

Man

amano a

contessa

denoting

nouns

Attention s necessary. " necessaria. virtu. Charity is a virtue,

*

La

and

nouns

mortale.

"

it

where

Italian

in

beings as objects:

L' attenzione

(2)

only the rules given in this point,although others may that

English:

in

be

(1) Before

J La

mirror.

Article.

article is used

definite

not

whole

at

in the

to.

The

44.

image

Definite

of the

is advised

It

Remark.

1

scholar's book

The

sp"cchio.The

nello

immagine

Syntax

v

as

the table.

is

/

almost

:

The

-II libro del ragazzo.

be

pronounced

de', a', etc., are

article

e

I Promessi can

never

as

to

con

as a

though form

un

all' erta.-

cert'

Con

written

should atto

or

tras-

gli occhi

Sposi, Cap. II). be

omitted

before

imperatore,

"

peror". em-

ARTICLES In

(c) sandro "the

v

Duse

Dante,

or

of

women:

is Albina.4

rule is sometimes

given

to

men,

extended

mio

often

ptjveroEnrico!

to

vocative

diminutives:

Speak

to

me,

my

poor

Charlie.

Before

the

notice

But

that

lakes, seas, rivers,but is

magno

that

title,and

countries,provinces,

of continents,

names

mountains,

Carlo,

really a Latin Alessandro,

cities c

not

word, and

adjective,

an

baptismal,

are

:

family

not

(See following rules.)

names.

But

gella

la

Vergine followed

are

French

There

Maria.

by a being

(the words

these

is in

the

Where

"

title

the

borrowed

Cesaresco, Madam

la Contessa

cases

article from

the an

words

that

Countess

used

article is not

where

language)

(Pellico, Le the

given

in

as

Madama

:

C.

"

century

Madami-

between

adjective implied

etc.

Voltaire, Voltaire's

Madama,

comes

rule (6), below. Compare Senza aver by good writers: always observed Without Condillac. having great knowledge

known",

The

in the

names

given

the

to

!

(5)

3

is dead.

il Dante.5

II Carlino.

2

persons3:

actress.

an

and possessive,

the

Parlami, il Henry

is

names

Here

This

preceded by

Machiavelli

Duse

of well-known

names

of well-known

given

|)cco1' Albina. Remark.

the

morto.

the

31

Ales"Charlemagne"; Great"; Maria Vergine,2

magno,

surnames

attrice.

"

(4) Before

a

PREPOSITIONS.

magno,1 'Alexander Virgin Mary".

La

not

Carlo

titles

the

(3) Before the II Machiav"lli "

1

WITH

Mie name

Neither gran of

C.

such is

this

rule

cognizipne di II

sfcolo di

Prigioni Cap and

'well

as

the

XXI). surname

expressed.

are 4

5

6

might supply "our", "our good", etc. is properly speaking not Notice, however, that Dante Here

again

Exceptions:

cella,1' Aia.

one

il

Cairo, la Mirandola,

la

Bastia,

la

Mecca,

a

name. sur-

la

Rot-

ITALIAN

32

V America

j

Abitiamo

^

L' Italia "

v

del Nord.

live in North

We

penisola. Italy is

una

11 Piemonte

GRAMMAR.

"

peninsula.

a

parte dell' Italia.

una

America.

is

Piedmont

a

part

of

Italy. yIlTevere

pr"sso Roma.

flume

un

"

The

Tiber

is

a

river

Rome.

near

But: j

Fire.nze"

11a be,

una

citta.

a

beautiful

city.

article is omitted:

The

Exceptions:

is

Florence

(a) After in, meaning either going

to

dwellingin

or

country:

a v

in Italia.

Vado

|)ccomiin

going to Italy.

am

Here

Francia.

could

I

in France.

am

the

of prepositionand name ality replaced by an adjectiveof nation-

di, where

(b) After country

I

be

:

II

parlamento

d'

imperatore di Germania.

L'

II Piemonte

"

English parliament.

Inghilt"rra.The provinciad'

una

German

The

Italia.

emperor.

Piedmont

is

an

province. (c) Before Candia, Cipro,Corfu, Ischia,Malta.

Italian

article

is

generally used before a noun qualifiedby a possessiveor a possessive-relative of or adjective excepting one by any pronoun, quantity: (6) The "

1

v

I

mi"i libri. My

vLa mother

la di cui

ragazza

Sua

mamma

Your

mano.

"

qui.

The

hand.

girl whose

is here.

I bu"mi

ragazzisono

]Jccola

mia

(7)

La

books.

After

verb

characteristics spiritual 1 2

Compare 134, This example

avere

Good

This

d"stra.

mano

the

studiosi.

boys

are

studious.2

is my

right hand. descriptionsof physical or

in

:

135, would

147

(a).

also

fall under

rule

(1).

ARTICLES

WITH

L' Albina

ha

Je mani

piccole.

Ernestino

ha

il

buono.

(8) Instead

cuore

of the

Io apro

la

Chiudo

i

M9Striil braccio (9) Before

hands.

small

E. has

a

good

where

cases

heart.

is

there

no

hand.

I close my

infinitive

an

33

(1)):

my

sinistro.

has

Little

137

I open

mano.

pugni.

A.

possessivein

danger of ambiguity (see

a

PREPOSITIONS.

fists. Show other

or

left

your

arm.

part of speech used

as

noun:

/L'

andare

/Il bene

il tornare.

ed

il male.

e

Good

The

going

and

evil.

and

returning.

dication in(10) Before numerals indicating the year without of month, etc., also before those indicatingthe

day of the month, J JJranel mille otto

and

1)il 13 s"ttembre.

t

La

It is the

lezione comincia

day:

(or nel 1800).

cento

/

of the

hour

the

alle

of

13th

The

nove.

It

in 1800.

was

September. lesson

begins

at

nine

o'clock. le undid.

Sono

It is eleven

o'clock.

v

: (11) Distributively

(a) In

in

specifying price,etc., where

definite in-

the

English

article is used:

Bu^olire il metro. J

Uo,va

a

Two

liras

soldi la dozzina.

trenta

u+J-

meter.

a

Eggs

at

thirty cents

a

dozen. Una

volta la settimana.

Once

"

(b) Before the names English the plural would of every j

on

H9

week

una

Wednesdays is

month 1

be

days of

used

to

week

the

indicate

a

where certain

il mercoledi and

the

on names

e

il sabato.

I have

a

day

lesson

Saturdays. of the

months

when

a

certain

indicated1: specifically

Notice

in

:

lezione

(12) Before

of the

week.

a

the

indication

of time

in

(10), (11),and

(12).

ITALIAN

34

Nell' ottobre

mille

GRAMMAR.

(of the year)

In October

c"nto.1

otto

v

1800

definite

The

45.

article

in Italian than

begmner

a

in which

before

used

not

those

of countries

the

of

names

Mia

"/

Mio

mio

Good

mio

the

fratellino

than

a

sor"lle.My

brother

article is used

dear

my

quell'uomo.

modifiers

colla

Ho

due

braccia.

Before

mia

carta

(5) Before 1

e

One

also

d' ottobre

mille

otto

Compare

rule

certain

(10).

role here.

has

than

mother,

set

say:

two

He

a

or

possessive:

madre.

My

little

ottobre

It will be

not seen

that

or

man.

books.

arms.

very

and

del mille

that

pens.

(2).

used

Nell

general'sense:

vague,

Cf. 136

numbers

cento, but

demonstrative

a

sells paper

phrases.

In

sisters.

diminutives,

the

cara

several

having

ordinal

might

a

He

penne.

and

with

pointing at

am

I have

nouns

In certain

(a)

My

mother.

I

parecchilibri.

Vende

B.

singular possessive:

amico.

"

Ha

(4)

Mr.

relative in the

(3) Before a noun qualifiedby numeral adjective: Mostro

ings mean-

friend

near

e

has other

noun

is with

brother

morning,

il mio

padre

But

the

a

modifiers

irate.Hoe le mie

where

certain

friend.

Remark.

II

of

name

other

madre,

father, and v

the

without

before

used:

not

giorno,signor Bernardo. amico mio. Listen, my Se,nta,

and

have

we

vocative:

a

Before

tions construc-

cities,or

di with

^Buon

(2)

easier for

be

may

It is, as

occur.

after in and

It is further

(1) Before

not

quent fre-

more

first the substantive

it does

seen,

much

so

English,it

in

recollect

to

being

with otto

ottobre

regard

cento, del for

of

names or

Nel

mille otto

euphony

mese

cento

plays

36

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

48. This

partitiveform is,however, not used or English "some" "any" add nothing

the sense

where the

to

:

"Vuglepane? Do x/Vugledel pane? Remarks,

(some) bread?

want

you

Do

want

you

(i) The

(of the)

some

partitiveis

not

bread

in

used

?

a

ative neg-

sentence:

qualche

Ha

v

yHg have

della carta,

I19lapis.

non

abbiamo

fiori.

We

construction

(2) The French.

Its

haven't

I have

some

for me? I

paper.

is less is seldom

use

Syntax The

indefinite

it would

where

not

the

It is, on would

of the

frequent in Italian obligatory and

in

the

is

than often

individual.

Indefinite

article be

flowers.

any

arbitrary,varying greatlywith

49.

something

you

pencils.

no

vNon

in

Have

cgsa per me?

Articlea

used

never

in

Italian

English.

contrary, omitted

in Italian

where

it

be

expressed in English: (1) Before a predicatenoun, expressingoccupation, without and following rank, or nationality, qualifiers, the verbs essere (to be) and fare (to make, do) : (Also divenire, diventare, pare re, proclamare, sembrare, J

% ^ Si

Italiano.

a

an

dichiarato.)

Italian.

principe. He is also a prince. fara impiegato. He will become an "he will make himself.")

noun

observed is

is

e*ssere

anche

But

Remark. or

He

morire, mostrarsi,

nascere,

a

answering that

he?") takes

in the the

accompanied by

noun

the

question "who

examples

article:

under

official.

an

is he?"

(1) all

answer

erally, (Lit-

adjective, (itwill

be

"what

/

l"un |)un

v

Chi

*"

principe.

bu"m

He

| quell'1191110?" a

doctor

(2) Before

(

a

patrioticItalian.

good prince.

a

me'dico.

Who

is that

man?

apposition:

pr"sso Roma.

flume

y/ II Tevere

is

37

doctor).

a

in

noun

a

is un

is

That

=

NUMBER.

AND

patri^tico.He

Italiano

is

He

GENDER

THEIR

NOUNS,

The

Tiber,

a

river

near

Rome.

Ce"are Bgrgia,ugmo without

man

a

y

miseric^rdia. Caesar.Borgia,

s"mza

pity.

Dante, gran po"ta d' Italia.

Dante,

a

great Italian poet.

(3) After da, meaning ''as", "like"1: I speak as a friend. Parlo da amico. / da pellegrino, da marinaio, da Si travesti quattro vglte, He disguisedhimself four times, as soldato,da acrobata. acrobat. an a soldier,as a sailor, as a pilgrim,as mille sand"2 thou(4) Before the numerals c"nto hundred ' '

' '

,

'

,

'

,

:

V Sono

ce,ntou^mini. They

y Dopo mille anni.

(5) y

A

certain

In

"at

casa,

school"; in

(6)

After

there

thousand

a

adverbial a

"in

the

Italian

and

(cf.39). The

are

as:

"at iijscuola),

see

157.

VII.)

III.

GENDER

nouns

men.

bedroom".

CHAPTER

50. All

{or in

exclamations, for which

THEIR

hundred

years.

scuola

(Exercises VI

NOUNS,

a

are,

expressions,such

home";

camera,

In certain

are,

AND

either

gender and

NUMBER.

masculine

number

or

nine femi-

usually indicated by the ending, singular o, plural i being the endings, singular a, plural typical masculine 1

Cf. French

je parle en

ami.

are

2

Cf.

291

(c).

38

ITALIAN

feminine.

the

e

However,

all masculine

not

nouns

all those

do

in o, neither

end

GRAMMAR.

ending in o take i in the endings always proof that the

plural,nor are these noun exhibitingthem

is masculine. GENDER.

General

(i) Nouns their

keep

Rules

for Gender.

denoting male natural genders:

and

female

beings usually

king; la regina,the queen. Un lavandajo,a fuller;una lavandaja,a II toro, the bull; la mia gallina, hen. my Tuo padre, thy father; ngstra madre, our

y II re, the

Exceptions:

recluta,

'

'

Guardia,

recruit

"guard";

guida, "guide";

'

sentine.Ha, sentinel

;

mother.

' '

;

spia,

' '

' '

spy

,

in

feminine

are

' '

washerwoman.

spite of the fact that they usually beings. Here the grammatical gender the natural (compare following paragraph)

designatemale prevails over .

ending in o are masculine, in a feminine.1 as already noted, the typicalendings of are, genders:

(2) Nouns These the two V L'

abito, the

UI1 naso, v

the

II muro,

coat

1

The

Latin common

camicia, the shirt, blouse. bocca, the mouth.

wall; la stanza, the

(a) Feminine

Exceptions: in

la

nose;

the

la

"/

room.

nouns

which

are

culine mas-

ending:

masculines

and

masculine

feminines accusative

as

a

rule

retain

singular

their

gender.

gives -o, the coming from Latin -um

Nouns singular -am"a. from the neuter usually masculine, those singulars are plurals here decisive. feminine, the endings being Templum "(il) tempio, Masculine in with nouns o a nants folia"(la) f"?glia. plural in a are remdeclension. Cf. 63 and 64. of the Latin neuter feminine

accusative

'

other

few

II

Also

39

'echo", and

"co,

a

words:

rare

of feminine

ending: duca, "duke",ll monarcQ, po"ta, "poet",!l

(b) Masculine v

NUMBER.

AND

hand".

"the

mano,1

La

GENDER

THEIR

NOUNS,

nouns

cholera"/ Alsoycol"ra, "

arch". "mon-

sofa, "sofa", and

a

foreign extraction2; enigma, in "enigma"/ problema, "problem", and other words from the derived Greek, many geographical -ma and qualcosa,"something" (properlya phrase, names, not

of

words

other

few

singleword). (3) Nouns ending

in

la gru, gioventu,3 'youth";17

"la virtu, "virtue"; Ma ""

"

"

crane

y

.

also

"bamboo",

few

A

Exceptions:

such

bau, "dog's bark";

bambu,

as as

as

nouns,

"fennel";

meu,

"Peru".

vPeru,

Of

51.

ending in

nouns

The

feminine.5

some

(a) Masculine Latin

From

for

Special Rules

More

fourth

foreign words,

parts of speech used

other and

vilpiu,4"more";

1

feminine:

are

u

e

and

i

Gender.

of the

meaning

masculine,

are

some

word

cide. de-

may

are:

which, though

manum,

manus,

in

declension, exactly resembles

form

a

the

feminine

masculines

of

the

of the

second. 2

3

Notice

ceptions. exusually make imperfectly Italianized note Cf. following paragraph, exceptions, also 24 (a), foot-

that

words

5, p. 11, etc. these that Notice

nouns

are

of

names

Cf. 51

abstractions.

(b) (1). "Cf. 51 5

(a) (2). Since all reallyItalian includes

"

lead

pencil ",

all but etc.

a

nouns

very

end few

in

a

vowel, the

substantives,

above

such

as

fication classiil

lapis,

ITALIAN

40

V II

generallyof mountains,

of trees, metals,

(i) Names and

months,

GRAMMAR.

days: yIl

limone, lemon-tree.

S.

tore, (mountain of) San

"

rame,

Salva-

II San

copper.

Aprile, April. "II martedi,

L'

Tuesday. This rule is constantly crossed

Remark. in 50

For

(2) (p. 38).

le

instance,

by

Alpe,

or

given Alpi, 'the that

the first form would Alps", probably because suppose end in o, of mountains names singular,Alpa. Most else monte, "mount", "mountain", is understood: L'

or

IJtna,"Etna".

Monte

|)tna,or

a

days of the week "Sunday", and all names All the

except la domenica, except la latta, tin".

masculine

are

of metals

"

parts of speech used as nouns: / L' andare e il venire. Going and coming. vfl mangiare e buorio. The food is good. He would dava del si e del nq. v Mi give me no "he gave me answer. (Literally, yes and no".) (2) Other

(b) Feminine

positive

are:

of abstractions: (1) Names La specie,the species. Ly ambizione,

ambition.

La

quiet,rest. quie,te,

(2) Many a

indicating often the

masculine

v/ II noce,

In

Exceptions:

bears \/

La

walnut-tree.

the

masculine

of fruits,1the

names

word

a

certain

designatesas

tree

noce,

the

used

as

:

walnut, of

number well

word

same

nut.

the

cases

fruit

as

same

the tree

that

it :

II limone, lemon-tree, lemon.2 1

This

rule

is also

by being feminine "an mela, apple". well the as meaning 2

both

Fico tree

and and

crossed

termination: But

there

tree

as

dattero, both fruit.

by

(2), the

50

L' arancia, exists

also

of many

names

the

"the

fruits

orange";

masculine

una

arancio,

its fruit.

masculine

by termination,

also

mean

certain

A

52.

masculine

GENDER

THEIR

NOUNS,

of

number

feminine;

or

pupil is

The

Remark. with

as,

nouns

il

fine, 'end".

advised

Most

53.

learned, whether

of Compound

compound

its

exceptional, concept.

one

Nouns.

retain the

nouns

diately imme-

connect

to

gender be according to ordinary rule or them its appropriatearticle,and to make Gender

41

indifferently

are

la

or

substantive

every

NUMBER.

AND

gender

of their

second

component: flat piece of cloth, table-cover. La mappa, of II mappamondo, II mondo, world. map There

Exceptions:

explainedby ^11

capo,

but

many,

analysisof

an

the word

Salvare, to

v/

Formation

feminine

a

II ragazzo,

* "

Lo ~11

in

boy^

the

padrone, the

master,

Most

beat, thresh

out;

(Cf.51 (a) (2).)

and

o

some

in

e

form

;

girl.

aunt. "

proprietor; la padrona. e

V

take

essa:

arciduchessa, archduchess.

la dottoressa.

la poetessa.

profeta,prophet ;

(3)

to

the

la ragazza,

zio, the uncle; la zia, the

po"ta, poet

capocaccia,

a:

^11 dottore, doctor;

^11

il

Feminine.

in

in (2) Those in a and some L' arciduca, the archduke;

II

usually

il -/la gente, people-/

save

of the

masculines

(1) Many

are

:

^ Battere, life-preserver. "/salva-ge,nte, ^la lana, wool; il battilana,wool-comber.

54.

they

head, chief; vla caccia, hunt;

of the hunt,

master

are

world.

the

of those

la

profetessa.

in -tore

take

emperor;

V

-trice

(dottorebeing

an

exception): y v

L'

imperatore, the

the imperatrice,

the director; la direttrice. II direttore,

empress.

ITALIAN

42

(4) But certain form

masculines

many

relation

to

another

one

feminines

and

bearing

totallydifferent

are

a

in

:

1/ u9mo,

v

GRAMMAR.

la

man;

dcmna,

woman.

NUMBER. General

55.

in

for

Masculines

in

their

form

e

Rules

o

the

Formation

and

a,

of the

masculines

pluralby changing

Plural.

and

these

feminines

terminations

to i: II

libro,i

libri ;

il

po"ta, i poe, ti ; lo zio,gli zii; il padre, i padri; la madre, le madri; uno scolare,gliscolari1;la lezione,the lesson,le lezioni;P ape, un

bee, le api,bees

the

nome,

ragazzi ;

ipocrita,hypocrite,gP ipocriti ; il mio nomi,

(i) Also

Remarks,

(2) In

; P

i nostri

name,

my

tre

ragazzo,

our

names.

la mano,

le mani.

in -io the

nouns

ii,or j. In any

be written plural may only one i is pronounced:

case

i, i,

/Studio, study; plural studi, studi,studii,studj. 56. Feminines

in unaccented

\"2l tavola, the

H

rLa

tua

their

*""elle tavole, some

table.

thy

penna,

form

a

jLe vostre

pen.

pluralin

e

:

tables.

penne,

your

pens.

accented the last on Monosyllables and nouns sonant), syllable(whether the word end in a vowel or conalso nouns ending in i (stressedor unstressed) and ie, do not change in the plural: 57.

y

II

drink j

Un

brindisi,the toasts.

many

barbagianni,

the

1

king These

health,

of

words

an

vUn owl

Italy.^1

toast.

'Fare

molti

di, a day; s"tte di, II ; i barbagianni.

tre

being familiar

-

re, the

to

the

three

brindisi, to

not

d'

re

kings,

pupilare

days.

seven

i

Italia,

Una

translated.

me-

ITALIAN

44

which

have

nature

of

II

i in

an

a

the

g omit

or

c

GRAMMAR.

singularonly to indicate that i in the plural1 :

linguaggio,the language, dialect;

L' arancio

linguaggid' Italia. orange-tree is beautiful; gliaranci

bello,the

"

the

i

belli.

sono

La

caccia,the chase, hunt;

guancia

Una

rosea,

a

le

cacce.

cheek;

rosy

le

guance,2

sue

her

cheeks.

In the

62.

of the

or

c

plural and

of masculines

case

g

sometimes

sometimes

accentuation

in

remains

-go the

the

ity qualin the

same

changes. In most as a guide, nouns

serve

may

and

-co

cases

the

stressed

the

penult taking -chi, -ghi, those stressed on the antepenult -ci, -gi: Un i giugchi dei bambini, children's giucico,a game; on

plays. II castigosevero, Un

Franco,

a

punishment,

severe

i Franchi.

Frank;

II

i

castighi.

fugco,fire;i fugchi.

But: II medico,the

il polso,doctors tastano physician; i m^'dici feel the pulse. II fisiglogo, the physiologist;i fisiglogi. II coll"gio, the college ; i colle.gi. L* equivoco, ambiguous expression,gliequivoci.3 1

See

foot-note.

This

rule

of

does

apply to in which the i is accented, as il leggio,"reading-desk" nouns In pi.leggii; zio, zii; la farmacia, "pharmacy", pi. farmacie. like pcchio, "eye", studio, "study", etc., where nouns the i although accented is sounded, the orthographical usage not varies. now Formerly occhj,studj were occhi, studi are more commoner, usual. 2

But

22,

Occhii, studii

are

provincie, audacie

*The

also

course

not

seen.

retain

the

unnecessary

i.

in the and same adjective equivoco is treated way, adjectives in general follow the rule as given for nouns: pubblico, "public", pi. piibblici, fern, pubbliche; cattplico, "Catholic", cattolici, cattpliche; diplomatico, "diplomatic", diplomatici,diplomatiche.

Cf.

116.

There

Exceptions: rule.

Words

those

in

word

and

GENDER

THEIR

NOUNS,

it

more

is advised

its article in the

amico,

of

friend

a

than

learn

each

plural forms. exceptions: the penult, yet forming

followingare the commonest in -co stressed on (a) Words their pluralin -ci : mio

to

this

singular and

The

Un

45

exceptions to uniformly1

many

student

The

-co.

are

follow

in -go

NUMBER.

AND

i

mine;

ngstri amici,

our

friends.

]"cco

il

nemico,

here

enemies

say

dicono, my

in

(b) Words

is the

stressed

-co

forming their plural in IJccoil suo carico,it is Un

II manico

Lo

stomaco,

della gu"rra

pig;

the

the

on

mi"i

nemici

due

lo

porci.

antepenult, yet

-chi: his charge

;

i carichi.

molti fondachi. large warehouse; the knife-handle; i manichi. del colte.Ho,

fondaco,

gran

II porco,

so.

i

enemy;

the

a

gli

stomach;

of

civile,the historian

stomachi. the

Lo

stgrico

civil war;

gli stcj-

richi.

Iltossico, the poison; dei tossichi forti. i trafnehi.2 ferrovia,railway-traffic;

(i) Gre,co as

Remarks,

adjectivechi: Un Gr"co,a Greek; Un

So

1

vino

also

Yet

gr"co,

a

all those

Gr"ci,the

the

accented

noun

takes

-ci,

sense

wines.

of

takes

'wizard'

antepenult excepting

the

on

an

as

Greeks.

wine; vini grexhi,Greek

Greek in

mago

i

a

della

II traffico

"asparagus", taking -gi in the plural, possess besides in -ghi. Sparago has only sparagi. in -gi parallelones

a

sparago,

the

forms

Catalogo,

"catalogue",has only cataloghi. 2

Other

student nouns.

exceptions is advised

to

are

so

rare

consult

scarcely to belong here. his dictionary for plurals of as

The such

46

ITALIAN

it takes

men"

in the

but

plural maghi,

i tre

magi,

(2) Fisico, "natural ", take either ci

wise

three

'the

expression re

magi.1

philosopher", and

cian "musi-

musico,

chi.

or

number

certain

63. A

GRAMMAR.

plural irregularlyin

of masculines and

a

become

in

o

form

their

feminine.

They

are:

II

centinaio,the hundred

(about of them

delle centinaia,hundreds thousand

thereabouts;

migliaio,a

Un

paio, a. pair; due paia. miglio,a mile; due miglia.3

Un

forms,

in

one

a

in

masculines

other

64. Many

and

II

dito,finger; le dita (iditi).

II

braccio, the

II

I19due le

heel;

calcagno, the cagni).

v"ngono

o

due

have

migliaia.2

plural

two

in i :

one

arm;

ne

coming.

are

Un

or

hundred);

a

braccia

(bracci).4 calcagna (le calcagne, i

le

gingcchio,the knee; Qcchi) II

cal-

(igingin^cchia(gingcchie)

.

II labbro, the

lip; le

labbra

(ilabbri).

form

a

that

Observe

singular only

of greco, the so

only

the

2

Mile, "a

3

Notice

latter

is

preserved by the Biblical after the phrase, i.e.,magi is the Latin plural,maghi being made hard after Naturally a plural is made singular whose g it keeps. 1

this

the

where

plural

noun

latter

was

these

was

is the

often

oftener

used, the

used.

In

adjective

the

less

case

often,

re-formed. takes

thousand", that

latter

are

all

also le mila. nouns

designating number

in

a

rather

seen. Centinaj,migliaj, are sometimes 4 The plural most commonly used is placed first. Braccia, gin^cployed generally em(notice this latter in e) are chia, labbra, orecchie The tion terminatwo to denote etc., of the same body. arms, Compare German a (e) has here a sort of collective sense.

vague

way.

nouns

beginning with

Ge.

II

AND

NUMBER.

le membra

member;

the

membro,

GENDER

THEIR

NOUNS,

47

(membrej, (i mem-

bri). L'

orecchio,the the

L' ugvo,

In

(gligssi). (osse), the

cases

some

meaning

(orecchia),(gli orecchi).

(gliugvi).1

le U9va

egg;

Remark.

in

le gssa

bone;

L' 9SS0, the

le orrecchie

ear;

forms

two

entiated differ-

are

:

II

profits. frutto,fruit; le frutta,fruits; i frutti,

II

legno,wood

ships; le legna,firewood. legni,carriages, walls. wall; i muri, walls; le mura, city-

II muro, II

membro,

Le

braccia

; i

the member.

of the

members

of

The

umano.

arms

commissione

Una

body.

human

committee

A

membri.

del cgrpo

mgmbri

sono

di

are

sette

members.

seven

But: del cgrpo.

membra

Le

of the

The

(allthe members)

members

body.

65. Plurals altogetherirregular. ala, the wing; le ali (leale). Ilbue, ox; ibugi. L'

II

dio,god

;

glid"ior dii (with which

the

article is always

gli)moglie,wife

La

L' ugmo,

man

;

le

mogli gliugmini.

;

PLURAL

OF

NOUNS.

COMPOUND

change their ending in compound nouns is made the regular way, i.e.,the second component plural,the first remaining unchanged: 66.

Most

world;

of the

i

mappamondi.

II

mappamondo,

II

parafugco,fire-screen; i parafugchi.

1

There

are

map

other

many

Observe

that

plural in

a.

extended

to

such In

such

other

are

the

words.

nouns

usually i forms

which Latin arc

ma}-

take

neuters

later.

But

Cf. 50, (2) foot-note.

the two which

the

plurals. their

have

f" imati"

n

has

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

48 Exceptions

are

of which

most

many,

explained by

be

however,

There

:

analysis of

an

may, word

the

(cf.53): II

of the hunt

capocaccia,master

; i

II battilana,wool-comber II

; i

capicaccia.

battilana.

i portalg'ttere. the letter-carrier; portal"ttere,

the

are

explanation must be sought the fact that in some compounds the components stillfelt to be independent words and are inflected

as

such, while

in other

But in

in others

less

one

or

In other

life.

its individual or

cases

both

lost

has

of them

words, the fusion is

more

complete: i sordomuti.

II sordomuto, the deaf-mute;

But:

mezza-luna, crescent;

La

le mezze-lune.

madreperla, mother-of-pearl; le madreperle madriperle. II sottolume,lamp-mat; i sottolumi. II rompicapo, tormentor ; i rompicapo. La

and

{Exercises X

VERBS.1

REGULAR

in

irregular

are

himself

familiarize

prefer to tenses

I and

do

so

of the

II),

Italian knows of such

are

the matters

placed before

first with take

the

present

infinitive

the

auxiliaries

desirable

regular forms. before

this

for the

The

one.

parts, moods,

given.

for

to

granted

that

the

tenses, etc., of verbs,

the

who

present Exercises in

student no

a,

student

Teachers

been

taken

be

because

given (Vocabulary participialforms are also given

being is

the

Chapter V have

isolated It

in

it is considered

and

auxiliaries

and

vocabularies.

may

end

preceding this syllablemay

vowel

regular verbs

The

latter to

The

-re. 1

Italian verbs

XI.)

IV.

CHAPTER

67. All

1"

or

other of

tion explana-

VERBS.

REGULAR

e

(accented

the

throughout

recurs

conjugation.

Verbs

their characteristic

according to

divided

are

into:

vowel

verbs,

(i) -are (2) -ere Mostrare.

first conjugation.

or

conjugation. verbs, or third conjugation: To show, point out. Temere, to fear. P"r'-ere verbs,

and

(3) -ire

Partire,to

dere, to lose.

role

68. The

the

between

The

tables.

vowel

what

and

have

main

the

seen, seen

in the

ence differing follow-

part of the infinitive preceding the is the

characteristic

it the ending of the infinitive.

follows

terminations

the

stem,

parts of the verb

various

various

the

conjugations,is

vowel

characteristic

{alsoto divide). characteristic vowel,

set out

go away,

we

as

second

or

played by

constitutes,

which

The

vowel, which

This

i.

or

characteristic vowel,

the

is called

unaccented),

or

49

the

to

by adding

stem.

VERBS.

OF

TABLE

formed

are

INFINITIVE.

Mostr

are

Tern

P"rd

ere

"ndo2

Present

mostr

ando-

tern

Past

mostr

ato3

tern uto4

1

"to 2

Participle Participle

Sometimes

transitive

=

"to

Part ire1

ere

perd

endo

part endo-'

perd

uto

part

ito

divide", but usually intransitive

=

depart". There

are

also forms

mostr

ante, tern

ente, part ente, which,

really representing participles (the forms in much less frequent, and which are being gerunds), be regarded as verbal Iente for -ente adjectives. Cf. III. may (=endo) appears only in finiente, impediente, leniente, obbediente, the

though

Latin

-ando, -endo

partoriente,sometimes 3

aperiente and

moriente.

The

past participleof a few verbs of the first conjugation is sometimes contracted, especiallyin poetry, showing o for -ato, desto =destato, 4

compound tenses cf. 76. of the three conjugations showNotice that this is the only one ing vowel other than acteristic its chara past participlewith an accented vowel.

etc.

For

ITALIAN

5"

GRAMMAR.

Indicative PRESENT.

I1 show,

mpstr o1

tern

showing,

am

perd o

o

etc.

part

o, I

depart,or

part isco, I divide part i or part isci part

e

part isce

or

part iamo

part ite part

ono

or

part iscono

IMPERFECT.

I

showed,

showing,

was

etc.

mostr

ava4

tern

eva5

mostr

avi

tern

evi

part ivi

mostr

ava

tern

eva

part iva

mostr

avamo

tern

evamo

part ivamo

mostr

avate

tern

evate

part ivate

mostr

avano

tern

evano

part ivano

1

The

perd eva,6etc. part iva5

is omitted.

subject pronoun

Cf. 88.

("you show") cf. 91. in the third plural future of all conThis -o, as also final -no jugations, is often dropped: mpstran, "they show", temeran, "they will fear", etc. 4 0 is very frequently used (indeed almost universally'where 2

For

the

use

of these

forms

8

danger of ambiguity) instead of this -a as the final vowel of the first singular imperfect of all conjugations. 5 third conjugations (never of the of the second Verbs and there

is

first)often drop the

v

of the

imperfect: io

temea,

egli partia, etc.

pfrdereis conjugated precisely be given. like tem6re, the forms of the latter only will henceforth (For the parallelirregular form of pfrdere see alphabetical table, .) The second conjugation comprises the verbs of both the p. second and third Latin conjugations. In other words, the second conjugation in Italian comprises verbs different in the infinitive but alike in all other parts. The third, on the contrary, comprises verbs alike in all parts save the present indicative and tive, subjuncin but different these, i.e.,it consists of: (a) verbs of the fourth Latin The conjugation; (b) Latin inchoatives. latter are 8

now

It

evident being sufficiently

much

the

more

into the inchoative

that

numerous,

conjugation.

i.e.,most

-ire verbs

have

passed

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

52

Remarks

Regular

on

69. (1) Verbs h after the

in order

c

ending

of the First

in

Conjugation.

and

-care

insert

-gare

to mark

the to

endings beginning with e or preservationof the hard sound2:

forget;

dimentichi, do

non

you

paghino loro,let them pay. (2) Verbs in -ciare, -giare,sciare

in which

merely

where

the termination

Cominciare, 1

The

keep

the

vowel, which

sounded

next

to

to

c,

is a,

contains

begin,

an

drop i

2

Cf. 16 and

8

Cf. 22,

third, the

third

59.

foot-note

3" and

61.

with

the

a

the

before

i is

the

this i in parts an

e3:

comincio,

commence;

by subjunctive present is indicated the first vowel, conjugation taking of the

or

anything;

pay

soft

sc

g,

desidero

non

pay;

i

forget;

not

I shall forget. Pagare, to dimenticher", che paghiate ni"nte,I do not desire that

inserted

an

g before

or

Dimenticare,

Verbs

I

am

be-

teristic change of the charac-

that

theretofore

acteristic char-

second, that of the first.

REGULAR

VERBS.

53

ginning; comincerebbe, he would begin. Passeggiare.to take a walk; passe'ggino, let them go to walk ; passeggerg anch' io, I shall also take a walk. Lasciare, to leave, let; lasci stare, let it alone. Bruciare, to burn; brucera, it will burn.

(3) Verbs before

i

an

in -chiare

and

-gliare drop the in the termination, not before an e :

i

only

Picchiare,to knock; but

I shall picchier^,

picchi(notpicchii),thou knockest, knock.1 to counsel; conConsigliare, let him advise. advise; consigli,

he would siglier"bbe, (4) Of other verbs in -iare those retain this i: (a) In which it has in the infinitive a secondary accent, the secondary accent becoming in the indicative present first singular the principal one: Desiare,2to desire; io desio,tu desii. Spiare,to spy, io spio,che spiino. there with another might be confusion (b) In which verb:

Odiare,

to

hate,

tu

gdii,not

90H, which

latter

" =

thou

nearest"

(from udire). strabilisentenziare, (c) Appropriare,contrariare, spaziare, show the ii. Others also commonly are drop the i before an ending beginning with i, retainingit before e: tu anngi,tu annoierai. Annoiare,3to annoy;

lable (5) Certain verbs having an open o in the first syldiphthongize it where it receives the accent (i.e., in the three persons of the singularand third person plural of the present indicative and subjunctiveand in the imperative second : singular) person Giocare,4to play, io giuoco. 1

The

second

2

That

this

i has

is

the

verb

3

This

i is

4

Besides

that

i in

a

picchien) is distinctlyheard. is evident a secondary accent

contracted

form

from

the

fact

of desiderare.

really a semi-consonant. giocare,arrolare, infocare, rotare,

and

sonare

exhibit

ITALIAN

54

Remarks

on

(1) Verbs

70.

keep the

to

Regular

c

or

of the

in

before

latter

Second

and

-cere

g soft before

or

in which

o,

Verbs

ending

not, however, a

GRAMMAR.

the

Conjugation.

the

c

i

an

of the past

u

participle, beginning with

terminations

case

insert

-gere

g becomes

or

hard

:

Pascere,1to feed, pasture, pasco, ch' eglipasca, pasciuto. (2) There are but few regular verbs in this conjugation,2 and double

these

forms

present,

given

in the

for

table

the

part, the

most

for the

preterit. The in -ei, -e, -erono are responding reallythe regularones, corto the -ai of the first conjugation,-ii of the The followingverbs and their compounds take

forms

third.

only the -ei, -e, -erono: lucere, mescere, div"rgere,

battere, comp^tere, conv"rgere,

mi"tere, pascere,

prudere, rip"-

tere, stridere,t"ssere, tondere3; also compiere and when

ere

conjugation (they are according to the third). frequently

change, also

this

and

provare

probably, may

and

This

these

not

said

be 1

of this

Notare,

trovare. to

be

and

mescere

are

Of

the

"to

with

confused

of votare

forms.

rinnovare

and

flected frequentlyin-

tonare, and,

notice", nuotare,

empi-

does,

never

"to

swim".

rarely,

in The

order, same

vuotare.

the

only regular verbs

irregular some

exhibit

them

exhibiting all,as,

all

crescere,

(but pret. crebbi) ; conoscere, conosco, others a as only tacere, taccio, taeiuto; (but pret. conobbi) ; part, See piangere, piango, pret. piansi; past participle pianto, etc.

cresco,

cresciuto

conosciuto

Irregular Verbs. 2 The entirely regular are: battere, cedere, compftere, credere, fendere, gemere, godere, mescere, miftere, pascere, p"ndere, pfrdere, ripftere,splfndere,temere, tondere,vfnricevere,rifl^ttere, premere, of this and also conjugation. See fmpiere when cdmpiere dere, later that the great majority of the irreguIt will be seen Table. lar of this conjugation. '-ere verbs verbs are Table

3

of

Many

of these

verbs

are

defective.

VERBS.

REGULAR

(3)

verbs

Some

present the

55

in

having an open o same phenomenon

the first syllable

remarked

under

(5):

69,

Cu^cere m^vere, to

Remarks

-o,

or

of

Third

the

Conjugation.

conjugationtake in the present and subjunctive the -isco endings,not -i, -e endings at all. The following is of this

verbs

the

Mu^vere

coceva.

irregular.

Regular Verbs

indicative

having

otherwise

are

on

Most

C119C0,

moveva.

muQVO,

move;

verbs

These

71.

cgcere, to cook;

or

for their present tenses.

the model

Capire,

understand.

to

capisco, I understand,

capiamo

capisci

capite

capisce

capiscono

capisca, I may

understand,

capiamo

capisca

capiate

capisca

capiscano

capisci,understand

(thou).1 take

followingregular verbs

(a) The

the

o

forms

only: sleep; fuggire,to fly,flee;partirein the sense sentire, to feel, hear; servire, to depart"; pentire,2

Dormire, of "to

to

sortire,3in

serve;

the

of

"to

the

Latin

sense

go

out"; vestire, to

clothe. 1

forms

These their

to

are

derived

in the

use

from

present only,

"I

inchoatives, hence

understand,

"

am

haps per-

beginning

understand". 2

Pentire

3

Sortire, "to

a

Notice

forms. takes

is

the

reflexive verb. draw that

-isco forms.

lots", in

both

as

Sec

106.

partire,"to cases

divide",

it is the

takes

the

transitive verb

-isco that

56

ITALIAN

followingverbs usually take -isco

(b) The but

Abborrire,

take

may

tion, termina-

either

:

to abhor; bollire,to boil; inghiottire,

to

languire,

low;

GRAMMAR.

languish; mentire,

to

bellow; nutrire,

lie; muggire,

to

nourish; ruggire, to

to

also

sip; tossire,to cough;

verbs

in

swalto

sorbire, to

roar;

avvertire,

-vertire,as

divertire,etc.1

(c) Proseguire,""o prosecute, pursue", has proseguisco. pros^guo, but sometimes The

72.

more

(ifexpressed) or

pronoun Voi

is

verb

interrogativeby placing the other subjectafter it:

show;

mostrate, you

usually

mostrerete

voi?

Shall

your

brother

you

show? Non

partiravgstro frat"llo?Will

not

go

away? The

imperfect tense is used to habitual, or repeated action,

73.

that

express

which

time

which

is

finished

il libro

CHAPTER AUXILIARY

The

the especially A

number

of

soffrire, cucire, and

Cf. 226

time,

was

showing

the

Italian

are

XIII.)

V. VERBS.

and

aver

e, "to

have".

in

Both

are

irregular,

first.

as irregular verbs, such aprire, coprire, offrire, its compounds, also belong to this class. See

Table. 2

and

principal auxiliary verbs

"to be", and "'ssere,

1

certain

a

I

quando entrg.

(Exercises XII

but

preteritto

the

he entered.

when

74.

at

ished, unfin-

quite past2:

Io mostravo book

was

express

228.

AUXILIARY

VERBS.

57

INFINITIVE.

l"ssere

1

Sieno

2

These

3

This

forms

and

These Cf. 174

is also used.

regular.

the first and

forms

and

are

177.

are

second

plural are

regular,averfi being

regular.

contracted

into

avrei,

etc.

5*

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

IMPERATIVE.

abbi abbiate SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present.

Imperfect.1

abbia abbi

75. Each

avessi

(abbia)

abbia

avesse

abbiamo

avessimo

abbiate

aveste

abbiano

avessero

of these

stato

Sono

state

Aveva

qui

le Sue

Use

76.

Following mostrare

is

a

tenses

here.

sore,lle? Have

of

of all transitive

tenses

compound

had

He

sisters been here?

your

had

the money.

AuxiliaryVerbs.

forms past participle

+ the

Avere

been

il denaro.

avuto

its

itself.

I have

qui.

forms

verbs

by compounding with Sono

avessi

synopsis of

the

compound

intransitive

of most

and

the

compound

verbs. of

tenses

:

Infinitive.

mostrato,

avere

to

Past

participle.

ave,ndo mostrato,

Past

indefinite.

ho

Pluperfect. Future

mostrato,

aveva

have shown.

having shown,

/ hare

shown,

mostrato, / had shown

etc. etc. ,

avr" mostrato, I shall have shown,

anterior.

etc.

Conditional

anterior.

/ should

avre,i mostrato, shown,

have

etc.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

indefinite,

Past

Pluperfect. 77.

Essere

tenses 1

Which

+ the

abbia avessi

mostrato,

/ may /

have

and

the

verbs reciprocal

regular throughout.

shown,

etc.

might havi shown,

past participleforms

of all reflexive is

mostrato,

etc.

compound

and

of

some

60

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

SUBJUNCTIVE.

have gone, etc. sia andato, / may fossi andato, / might have gone, etc.

Past indefinite.

Pluperfect. Remarks,

g'ssereis

English "to be", although it used to express the progressivepresent, English showing", etc., which is to be translated simply

is not I

that

observed

the

frequent than

more

"

It will be

(i)

am

mostro.1 A

(2)

passive always If the with with

verb

be

agrees with intransitive

"ssere in the sense the subject. In verbs and

103

it may,

the

by

of "to the

but

the "ssere to form subject of the verb.

nature

(compounding

have")

it also agrees

of reflexive

case

does

not

amata.

always,agree.

reciprocal (Cf.

She

is much

beloved.

partiti. They have departed.

Ci siamo

amati.

We

have

loved

one

another.

Auxiliary with Intransitive 78. All reallytransitive

require a form

or

114.)

|)molto Sono

with

past participleused

their

Verbs.

verbs, i.e.,all verbs

that

object to complete their meaning, compound tenses with avere, and have a

direct

All reflexive -or from passive voice formed "ssere. with reciprocalverbs form their compound tenses verbs, i.e., "'ssere. (Cf. 102.) All really intransitive which which take a direct object and verbs cannot have no passive voice, form their compound tenses with "ssere, with the exception of the verbs: 1

Stare

and

andare, however,

progressive action.

Cf. 81

are

(a) and

sometimes

(J) (1).

used

to

express

the

6l

VKRBS.

AUXILIARY

desinare, to dine.

sbadigliare,to

dormire,

sonnecchiare,

sleep. passeggiare,to walk. to

The

79.

which

andare

to go

,

take

to

sternutare, to

sjumber, doze,

sneeze.

necessarilyintransitive

commonest

always

yawn.

are "'ssere

:

morire

to die .

,

.

to be

born,

arrivare, to arrive.

nascere,

avvenire, to happen.

parere, to appear.

cadere,

pervenire,to arrive.

to fall.

comparire, cdrrere, to

rimanere,

to appear.

uscire,to venire,to

certain

A

intransitive

verbs with

sometimes

and

avere

go out.

come.

of

number with

sometimes the

to remain.

riuscire,to succeed.

run.

divenire,to become.

(a)

generaldistinction being that they take while

is denoted,

action

verbs

"ssere

"ssere,

when

avere

the

denotes

pound com-

state

or

With the verb avere resultingfrom action. to complete has usually an object,often an infinitive, its meaning, with "ssere it has not.

condition

Verbs

80.

to

either

take

to dwell.

fuggire,to flee. giungere,to arrive. invecchiare,to

grow

ritornare, to

gu"rra

"

La

gu"rra

ha

ceased

to

to escape.

scendere,

to descend.

succ^dere, to succeed, happen. tacere, to be silent.

old.

cessata. cessato

devastate

return.

scappare,

to live.

vivere,

La

:

perire,to perish.

degenerare,to degenerate. dimorare,

are "'ssere

to pass.

passare,

cease.

to grow.

crescere,

or

avere

to depart,divide, partire,

to walk.

camminare, cessare,

which

the

The

war

di devastare lands.

ceased.

has i

paesi.

The

war

has

62

ITALIAN

Other

81.

GRAMMAR.

Other

Verbs

verbs

sometimes

Used

Auxiliaries.

as

of "ssere for

instead

used

English "to be" are: (a) Stare, "to stand", which always state, frequentlya state of health. Stava

parlando.

Come

sta ?

How

Sta male.

"to

be

are

how

you,

do you

to do

about

I

just going to

am

(b) Venire, "to come", of the

venne L'ombre.llo

means infinitive)

an

thing".

a

Sto per mostrarlo.

the formation

do?

well.

"ssere per (followedby

or

which

is sometimes of the

simple tenses The

trovato.

it.

show

umbrella

in

used

passive1: found.

was

(c) Rimanere, "to remain", is used less

a

talking.

was

is not

He

Stare per

I

expresses

like venire, but

frequently:

state

I

arrestato.

Rimango

arrested

am

(

=

1

remain

in

a

of arrest).

(d) Andare,2 "to go", is used

(i) A

state

condition:

or

andate

Che

cercando

(Literally, "What

(2) Duty Non

va

or

to express:

What

?

do you

go

are

looking

you

for?

seeking?")

obligation:

detto cosi.

That

must

not

be said, it cannot

be

expressed.

so

Se

aveva

well he

incorragito.If fattob"ne,andava

ought

been

to have

he

had

dene

encouraged.

by the principalverb more than does fssere, and is often preferredto it in elegantstyle. Neither used in the compound venire nor II libro tenses. rimanere are ever 1

"

Venire

venuto 2

the

expresses

the

trovato, for "

Notice

action

stato

indicated

trovato, would

that, like stare, andare

present participle.

when

be barbarous. it expresses

a

state

takes

AUXILIARY

L' amicizia

1/

amore

coltivata

va

63

VERBS.

tutta

con

la

possibiledelicatezza.

superato cgllaforza.

va

with

all

must Frienclsliip must possibledelicacy. Love

tivated cul-

be be

quered con-

by force. 82.

"to

'to

Dovere,

owe",

potere,

wish", fare, 'to do", "to

sapere,

know",

be

"make", classed

be

must

'to

able", volere,

and as

sometimes

modal

iaries, auxil-

they have, when followed by an infinitive, of auxiliary function. sort 'should", a "Ought", "must", etc., are rendered by the appropriate tenses of dovere; "may", 'might", 'can", 'could", by those of potere; 'will", 'would", when they express can ", volition,not simplefuturity, by those of volere ; all These verbs are "could", etc., by those of sapere. but not defective as are the English modal irregular,1 auxiliaries,so that shades of meaning, as well as time of action, may be more exactlyrendered by them than by the English equivalents2: since

'

D"vo partire. I ought to go, must go (in the present). I Dovr"i partire. I ought to go (which does not mean is less preciseas to time than devo partire)3. must go ", and "

Doveva

I had

partire.

Avr"i dovuto

Non

could

See

2

Compare

3

One

non

Table

of the

also

are

have

gone.

I go ? go.

swim.

sapeva

ancora

discorrere.

The

child

Irregular Verbs. German

complete

modal

auxiliaries

kbnnen.

mbgen.

devo

etc.,

in their

conjugations. partire perhaps on rising to go, say going immediately.

would

without

to

yet talk.

not

1

which

ought

I cannot

so, nuotare.

II bambino

I

partire.

Pgssopartire? May Vggliopartire. I will

to go.

dovrei

tire par-

64

ITALIAN

The

Remark.

GRAMMAR.

abilityrendered in the sometimes idiomatically

idea

same

of

examples by sapere is expressed by g'ssere bugno a: il pianofgrte. Sono bugna a sonare

last two

I

play

can

the

piano. let",

auxiliaries in such

are

abito, "I

un

going

am

had

(i) in

molto

bgl tgmpo,

(2) where

in:

"There

da fare.

used

by is

a

84. Avere

avere

in need

need.

of, to to be

"to

avere

paura,

sete, to be thirsty.

avere

avere

caldo, to be

matter

I

was 1

For

paura?

Were

avere

you

to

vergogna,

qualche

be

cold.

be

afraid.

to be ashamed. cosa,

note

afraid?

Ng, aveva

2

4.

to

be

the

with.

hungry. ci, cf. 36,

C'e

bottles.

be":

freddo, to

avere

Avevate

:

sono

do.

to

avere

fame,

warm.

ci c'1^,

followingexpressionswhere

avere

hungry.

undici,

translated

be

three

are

le

sono

g'ssere

of Avere.

Uses

verb be

;

pressions ex-

ago":

But

must

great deal

in the

is used

English uses the to bisogna (di)2,

the

are",

vi e, vi sono,

Idiomatic

time

long

a

idea

in such

be"

o'clock"

bottiglie. There There

the

express

weather".

one

is", "there

tre

sono

molto

fare, "I

fatto

hg

"to

fa, "it is

tempo

"it is beautiful

"cco is not

Vi

V

to

verb

the

"it is " 1' una, "it is eleven o'clock".

is used

it be";

is used

Fare

English by

as

fa

to

it done".

Remarks, rendered

expressionsas: Farg fare have coat a made"; lascia

done", "let

fare, "let it be have

lasciare, "to

and

make",

"to

do",

83. Fare, "to

Cf.

212

(2).

fame.

No,

PERSONAL

ha?

C9s'

Non

65

PRONOUNS.

I19 nie,nte.

What

is wrong

with

you?

Nothing. Also:

(a) In expressionsdenoting Che

ha?

eta

How

age:

is he?

old

s"tte anni.

Ha

He

is

seven.

(6) With "

have

to

=

Hg

da

and

da

infinitive to express

an

to

:

parlare.

I must

speak.

da partire. He

Aveva

had

{Exercises

to

go. and

XIV

CHAPTER

PERSONAL

obligation,

"

XV.)

VI.

PRONOUNS.

PERSONAL

DISJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS.

85. There

are

(1) the The

unstressed. from This them

fact that the

pronouns. verb

the

that

therefore

in Italian tonic

verb,

of

personal pronouns:

stressed; (2) the

or

tonic

kinds

two

be

may or

may

separated in

appear

without

atonic the a

or tence sen-

verb.

joinedto the verb has given of disjunctive, name absolute,or independent The atonic forms are so -dependent on the they always appear joined to it. They are called conjunctiveor dependent personalpronouns. they

are

not

I

Remark. may 1

be Which

The made

nature

clearer

by

of these the

two

classes

of

pronouns1]

following examples: Mgstro,

Latin simply the different forms of one and the same different word, developed under circumstances, me emphasized mi. Cf. the different giving me, unemphatic pronunciation of "me" in "give it to me", and "him" English "give it to him", and "give it to me, not to him". are

66

"

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

I

Io

are

I

"I!

mgstro. are

of

All

Che

showing."

am

C9sa

Mgstro me,1 "I am emphasized in pronouns,

these

Io!

showing?"

showing?'

you

myself." Mi

is

"Who

mostra?

.

"What

are

Chi

showing"

am

mgstra? showing English,

But in disjunctiveforms. showing myself" ; Che co,sa fai?" What Bistro, I am showing myself to doing?' Mi ti m9Stro, "I am you Italian

in

rendered

the

by

"

you",

is

there

in Italian

no

laid upon

stress

conjunctive forms

the

are2:

noi, we,

io, I

therefore

Pronouns.

disjunctivepronouns

The

pronoun,

used.

are

Disjunctive Personal 86.

the

us

me

me,

voi,you

tu, thou te, thee

eglino,6loro,essi,they lui,esso, he egli,3 loro,essi,them lui,esso, him elleno,5loro,esse, they essa,5she (you) ella,4le,i, loro,esse, them essa,5 her (you) le,i, se, himself,herself,themselves 87. These

They

forms

always

are

more

verb.

a

object either emphasized preposition. the

(b) As

1

Or

2

The

emphatic.

used:

are

(a) As the subject of

a

less

or

or

governed by

stesso.

me

personal

are

pronouns

the

only real declension

left

forms

in Italian. 3

Sometimes

shortened

into ei

4

Sometimes

shortened

to

la vi 5

0

sara.

Be

Ella, l"i,are Seldom

used

careful

used

to

for

in modern

gli.

la: Ti raccomando

una

good carriage. you", but essa is

get "

or

a

Italian.

"

bupna s^dia.

If there not.

"

is

one.

Se

68

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

"you", in

for the

plural.

present the following are

At

use:

tu

V9i qSinS-

!V9i JLoro1

Plur

Ella1

[Up 'you") is (generallyto be translated relative, an intimate friend, used in addressing a near or a child; also in elevated or poeticallanguage and or scorn to express anger ; voi as a pluralin addressing these

Of

two

tu

relatives,friends, or

more

or

children, also

less familiar than

singularsomewhat

tu

yet less formal

Ella, Le,i,used, for instance, in addressing

than

Its

is also

use

frequent

a

as

vants. ser-

in the

in poetry, and

frequentlyemployed than Italy it is more in speaking with strangers. Ella even Excepting in the south the ordinary form of address is Ella, plural of the third performs These Loro. were originally son, such antecedent as Signoria, representingsome Highness", Eccell"nza, Altezza, Vossignoria, "Your All such words etc. being feminine, the pronoun was (Cf.89.) naturallyfeminine.2 of

south

Vossignoria vuol Ella " servita.

(a) but use,

Your

cenare?

She

is served

Highness wishes

(i.e., "you

grammatical form

Ella is the proper

form, has

Le,i,reallya dative

in supplantingElla, especially

Loro

are

(Lor signori,Lor

come

to sup

?

served"). in this case,

into

common

conversation.

signore) is

the

corresponding

plural: Loro

You

verranno.

will

come.

ella, lei,loro. initial, 2 An adjective or participlequalifyingElla, Lei takes Thus one of the person represented by that pronoun. in speaking to a man: L"i " troppo bu9no {notbu9na). 1

Also

written

with

a

small

the

gender

would

say

PERSONAL

DISJUNCTIVE This

of the

use

in

originto

extended

more

speaking.

He

should

mio, che figliucilo

tu

of you, mia

learn

the

one

to him

eigner for-

need

t" "

or

recognize all of meaning conveyed by to

practiceconfine

in

It is the

now.

himself

to

what

will

the

forms:

Ella, L"i, Loro E

should

but is much

only

addressed

shades

the

the

and

sponds corre-

person

usage,

really formal

not

of address

and

second

formal

own

to hear

but

them,

for the

is likelyever

forms

the

our

and

ordinary form when

third

69

PRONOUNS.

diventerai? 0

son?

my O

speranza.

my

And

figli mi"i, voi

children, you

che

siete stati la

have

who

come be-

been

my

hope.

L^i,1Signor Bardi,

E

How

state,poverino?

Come

do you sta?

come

do, you

And

man?

poor do

how

do,

you

B.?

Mr.

bene

Stanno

Me, te,

92.

con:

Loro

tutti?

are

often

se

all well?

you

with

compounded

"with

meco,

me",

is

Occasionallycon

etc.

Are

l

seco,

placed also

the

sition prepo-

by himself"2,

before

this

pound3 com-

:

Vi"ni meco (a) Esso

also be used

may

with

Come

(con meco).

me.

redundantly with

(con) noi,voi,lui,lei,loro: noi. Restate con esso Stay with us. lui se n' and" nel giardino. E esso con

meco,

teco,

seco;

1

him

with

away

This

pronoun

others, the

into the

showing "she"

he

went

garden.

is omitted

context

And

under whether

the

circumstances

same

the

verb

is to

be

as

the

translated

subject. I understand, I lui: Ho Seco con inteso, parlerQ seco. may him. shall speak with Corresponding forms of the pluralare the of noi and voi, but not and vpsco (compounds poeticalnosco rare, "you", "he",

with

or

as

2

=

of the 3

Cf.

archaic

nos,

vos.

Spanish conmigo, contigo,consigo.

ITALIAN

70

of

whole

a

Venite

Noi

voialtri.

(or noialtri)Romani

all of you.

me,

siamo

reflexive

The

se

is

The

objectiveonly.

myself", "we ourselves", etc., are by adding the adjectivesstesso or medesimo "I

io medesimo.

Andr"

stessi

Loro

you

mans Ro-

subject rendered the

to

:

pronoun

Ma

We

altieri.

proud.

are

forms

ing speak-

:

with

Come

noi, voi, in

to

class of persons1

meco

altri

93.

frequently added

is

(b) Altri

GRAMMAR.

I shall go

themselves

qui. They

sono

myself.

signore,Loro medesime said so yourselves.

l'hanno

here.

are

detto!

But, ladies!

But: L' ha

fatto da

Sono

partitida

(or: of their

own

being in

(she) did it by himself have

se.

They

free

will).

gone

by

away

(herself). themselves

subject of an impersonal verb, never degree emphatic,is not expressed slightest

"It",

94.

He

se.

the

the

in Italian2:

Pigve,non " vero? 3 95. Although these

It is

1

vosotros,

Cf

Spanish

.

might 2

But

a

also be

somewhat

(86, foot-note

3):

distinct

meaning

now

of

the

simply

e

impersonal "it"

teco

may

be

lesser villano (Orlando Furioso, thee" rude with "it, the (literally,

sense:

neuter

is

In

verita, ella " cosi.

would ser"bbe b"lla. "That 3 This " expression, non used the

in Italian.

hearer, which

by gli

cortesia

of

"It

taineer moun-

rendered

being rude

77).

"we",

Tennessee

courtesy to be with thee, is courtesy"). Ella (la)is also used

27,

case

adduced. less

Gli

it?

have

pronouns

"you'uns"

"we'uns",

The

"you".

nosotros,

raining,isn't

be nice vero,

It is

a

call is rendered

'In

truth

in

a

sort

it is so".

La

"

(sarcastically) literally"is it not true", is

mere

in

.

call for assent

on

the

stantly con-

part of

English by repeatingthe

verb.

PERSONAL

DISJUNCTIVK for

forms

subjective and objective,the objective as subject. It is so used : there verb the e"sere in phrases where

(a) With

might

be

in the

case

uncertainty

some

of

form

verbal

the

almost

the

constant

as

ject sub-

the

where

and

emphasis (redundant

of

also

Observe

construction,

the and

with

sake

the

repeated for

then

to

as

predicate pronouns

really understood

is

71

the

used

is often

PRONOUNS.

struction) con-

of

use

.

Lei,

"you", che

Costui

"

(91 (a)) :

nominative

a

as

altro

un

That

me.

is my

who

one

other

self.

Ma

s"i piu giovane

te, tu

di

and

his brothers

Sta

are

me.

But

I

was

you

you.

are

younger

one

English Sono

io.1

the

Le,i!

studious

lui

come as

he

You non

struction, con-

with

is like the

used made

only :

one! I know

no

one

else

(is).

French in

expressed,

verb

no

person

altri.

conosco

they.

is

unfortunate

(Exercises XVI Contrast

It is

there

third

of the

pronouns

Studiosi

oftenest

expressed

verb

construction

essi.

Sono

It is I.

Sfortunata

oftener

a

the

to

as

one:

(b) Absolutely,i.e.,where with

is

it, the

near

pronoun

he

?

uncertainty

no

there

i.e.,where

only

well

you

is

there

where

Both

cortesi.

molto

sono

polite.

very

Are

b"ne L"i ?

But

lui

che suo,ifrat"lli

i

Tanto

1

thought

I.

than

as

He

ch' io fossi te.

credeva

Esso

c'est

conversation

in the

forms

moi. than for the

and

objective

The in

XVII.)

writing.

third

person.

for The

subjective substitution

Cf. below,

(b).

is is

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

12

VII.

CHAPTER

REFLEXIVE

PRONOUNS.

PERSONAL

CONJUNCTIVE

VERBS.

conjunctivepersonal their name indicates,cannot be separated as pronouns, of which the verb from they are the object,either direct or indirect,without a preposition. The found forms cusative correspond to the unstressed acand dative cases. They are : particlesor

96. Pronominal

mi

=

te

=

me, disjunctive

a

me,

myself,to

me,

me,

to myself

te, a te, thee, thyself,to thee, to

self thy-

'

"

lo1

=

gli

5=3

la

=

lui,esso, him, it

"

a "

essa, l"i,

"

le

lui,to him

a

"=

to le,i,

her her

"

si

se,

"=

to

ci2

=

vi

=

"

voi, a voi, you,

le

"

"

from 2

used

II is sometimes

the Ne

in

poetry.

article

selves our-

loro, to them

a

=

and

us, to

yourself,yourselves, to yourselves to you, to yourself, loro,them, to them (masculine) (feminine) loro,them, to them

=

Italian

to themselves himself,to herself,

noi, a noi,us, ourselves,to

"

1

himself, herself,themselves,

"

gliorli3= loro4

se,

a

(you) (to you)

in

Both

place of forms

especially in older carefullydistinguished

this lo, be

must

il,lo. used

is sometimes

instead

of

this ci,

especially in

older

Italian. 3

Gli is the

instead *

The

of li before

right

object, li the direct, but gli is often used h, or s impure. vowel, a liquidconsonant,

indirect

of

a

this form

to

be

called

conjunctive may

be

dis-

CONJUNCTI these

To

97.

YK

PKRSONAT.

be

must

I'ROXOIXS.

added

the

73

verbs: pronominal adthem, some, any,

ne,1 of it, of him, of her, of

hence, thence; ci,2vi,2'3to it,here, there. Mi

vede. Mi

da

Ti dicono.

He

sees

un

fiore.

parlavi?

Did

give him

talking

to

Vi

us.

to

=

him.4

Ci

washing

am

to

=

I

me)

He

They saw

do. Le

self, him-

sees

parlano.

I seldom

Gli

ink-stand.

Si vede. Si

self. my-

flower.

a

him.

see

the

cercano.

of it.

some

(

me

him)

her?

di rado.

vedeva I have

(orn'hq).

(

another.

I

Lo vedo.

speak to people see

one

lavo.

gives

you

is seen,

he

for

I

He

tell thee.

They

il calamaio.

Mi

me.

They

are

looking

are

Ne

you.

ho

Vi" (orv'", cJ e'). Thereis

(some). N.B.

all must emphasized these pronouns replaced by the corresponding disjunctiveforms, vede me not non sees te, "he me, you"; partir9

be as:

To

be

lui.

con

Remarks

98. (1)

and

5

ne,

sometimes

are

be

Lo

the

on

Conjunctive

less often

and

used

Pronouns.

where

in

other

conjunctives, English they would

pleonastic: (cf. 99V always follow the verb used without a preposition: Gli dico, loro, or (still more emphatic) dico a

It must

puted.

but dico

It is loro

junctive, dis-

(more

phatic) em-

lpro, "I

tell

or

them". 1 =

?

3

French

In

the

All

before

e

Cf. 104

5

This

It may

also when

and

4

in

as

meaning

i.

and

lp is

both

one

represent

forms

forms

=

French

y.

elision,lo,gli,la, le subject =" when the same circumstances you", "to you") under articles; mi, ti,si,vi, ne before any vowel, ci only

monosyllabic

(these last as

("inde).

en

function

to

are

Cf. 36. 105. of the a

whole

very

few

clause:

neuter

forms

Sperava

che

left to

the

verr^bbe

ma

Italian. non

lp

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

74

"

stanco?

Are

libri.1 We

dei

I have

have

the

seen

Lo

tired?

you

Ne

am.

t"Vola

La

books.

some

I

sono,

abbiamo

Pho

vista.

table.

pronominal particlesare often used with the articles in place of possessives (cf.137 (2)): Mi duQlela t"sta. My head aches. Le gettaile braccia al cgllo. I threw my around arms (2)

The

neck.

her

Si ruppe Mi

lost

often

are

would

be

Glielo2

his

broken

friend

leg.

of mine

died, I

has

ci,vi, ne He

Ci vede. He

sees

for it for you. are

pronouns

adverbs3

has

is

reallya dative, English a preposition

in

I will look as

ne

as

which

:

necessary

cercherg.

N' ha.

A

of one particles, used togetherwhere

(4) Ci,vi,and from

has

friend.

a

(3) Two

He

amico.

mcjrtoun

"

have

gamba.

una

by

Ci

us.

va.

Ne

some.

the

to be

distinguished

context:

He

is

going there. vi"ne. He is coming

from

there.

(5) A

verb

pronouns "I

sapeva,

would

you

accompanied by

maybe

only hoped

when

would

you

come).

is

one

a

La, le, and

direct, the other but

come, una

conjunctive

two

did not also

are

know

it" in

neuter

an

in-

that (i.e., idiomatic

phrases where they represent an indefinite object not expressed: delle sue, "he has run Darla away"; Ha fatto una a gamba, "to is like him"; of his ordinary blunders", "that committed one Non

ce

ne

perdonava

feminine neuter 1

The

indeed,

yes

is

"he

treated

us

more we

3

with

The the

ently appar-

Latin

gives emphasis. The Italian phrase may "we have indeed some than the English books, In the second some". have example lp is reallyan "

adverb. 2Cf.

all alike".

explained by comparison

plural. repetitionhere

much

mean

form

una,

101.

the Etymologically

words

arc

identical.

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

76

(b) The

le, for which

glior

except gli (and glie

conjunctivepronouns

when

=

101) double

see

verbal

initial

their

sonant con-

which

they are added is a monosyllable or a polysyllableending in an accented vowel,1 as cominciQllo,"he began it" ; dhxmi (di'from dire, "to say", "to tell"),"tell (thou) me"2: (to) him the newspaper. Mgstragliil giornale. Show Ijxcolo. Here it is. E mostratolo vi"niqua a parlarmi. And when you have shown here

it

the

"and (literally,

talk

to

form

to

Mostrandolo

to

been

having

it

shown")

come

me.

se,istato

In

obbedi"nte.

it you

showing

obedient.

were

Dammi

la

condurti vcjglio

mano,

your hand, I will take Parliamo loro. Let

the infinitive

may sentirlo

Desidero him.

infinitive

transitive

dependent

it follows

me

may

depending either

be

upon

a

united

to

precede the principalverb:

or

that

sentire.

lo desidero

or

intransitive

(Since an

Give

spasso.

talk to them.

conjunctive pronoun

A

Remark.

us

a

walk.

to

you

3

verb

the

where

I desire to hear

take

cannot

a

direct object,

infinitive is intransit

dependent

object always belongs to the principalverb. lated phrases like "I see him coming" must be transthe

Therefore

lo vedo but vie,ne,

venire, or

venendo,

lo vedo

vedo

venirlo.) But there of choice; the followingcases

never

this freedom

lo vedo

or

is not must

che

always

be distinguished

:

When

(a)

always

must 1

This

Da + ci 2

In

dacci,

these as

as

with

go

doubling =

principalverb

the

in

the

impersonal

the

pronoun

infinitive:

composition

is not

confined

to

this

compound.

etc.

in all the

above

usual, the pronoun

3=condurre

is

tje.

compounds

unaccented.

the verbal

form

is

cented ac-

PERSONAL

CONJUNCTIVE sentirlo.

Bisogna

One

PRONOUNS.

him

hear

must

77

lo

(not

bisogna

sentire). (b) the

in Italian

Where

principalverb

and

with

the

must

Andr"

go

farlo.

a

(c) Where

object of

which

(d) In

infinitive has

its

keeps

Gli fa

He

has

and

object attached

l^ggerlo. He

to

verb3

one

Mi

Loro

Me io

him

1

loro.

loro.

He

I.e.,without

vedere

and

out

you

showed

a

also

may

to

to

you

take

Having pointed

you

near

Mostra-

me.

rule

not

are

common. un-

them. out

to

them.

him.

they

their i to

accompany direct:

me.

to

change

infinitive

the

him.

see

you

I drew

fare

it.2

read

showing

was

dependent

usually does:

Mi, ti,si,ci, vi, when

la, li,le, ne,

it,and

Infringements of this last: regularlycomes

gliaccostai. i.

the

object,the object of

I shall let him

He

:

Mostratovi

is fare and

before

lasciare

Having pointed

Vi mostrava

it.

do

me

conjunctive pronouns indirect object precedes the

the

Exception

tive, dependent infini-

two

vi mostrava.

tomivi.

andr" a fare).

it:

makes

lascer9vederlo. Where

of the

direct

placed

this construction, and

ioo.

noun pro-

already a pronominal

seen

(e) Lasciare, sentire,udire, Gli

has

principalverb

indirect

is made

it (not lo

do

to

also that

pronominal

a

the infinitive,

directly1:

it governs

the

between

stand

infinitive:

it takes

own

case

dependent

principalverb

1' ha visto fare.

Me

its

I shall go

the

its

prepositionmust

a

e.

preposition between

followed

are

Gli

and

it and

by lo,

le, 'to him'

the infinitive.

Cf.

ib) above. 2

have

This

is

an

extension direct

only one object of fa. This 3Cf. 98 (5).

of the

principlethat a object,lfggere being in the

construction

is found

transitu exam]

also in French.

v

verb

le the

can

direct

78

ITALIAN

"to

and

her"

glie,and

GRAMMAR.

("to you"), before are

written

one

as

the

forms

same

word

with

come be-

the other

: particle

mgstro; c" lo mostrava; mostrati. ler^1; eglime li aveva Te

lo

Exercises

ve

and

XVIII

ne

parlo; glienepar-

XIX.

Verbs.

Reflexive

Any transitive verb may be made reflexive by giving it throughout the appropriateconjunctivepronouns, the subject. those of the same as i.e., person Followingis a synopsisof a reflexive verb : 102.

to dress one's self vestirsi,

Infinitive.

participle. vest"ndosi vestitosi participle.

Present Past

1 "

The

I shall

context

speak

will in such to him

about

show

cases

it"

"

or

I shall

the

whether

speak

to

her

meaning about

is

it".

REFLEXIVE

VERBS.

79

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present.

mi

ve,sta,etc.

Imperfect.

mi

etc. vestissi,

Tenses.1

Compound INDICATIVE.

Past indefinite.

mi

Pluperfect.

mi2

anterior.

Past

anterior.

Future

Conditional.

vestito,etc.

sono

"ra vestito,etc.

mi

fui

mi

sar" vestito,etc.

mi

sar"ivestito,etc.

vestito,etc.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

indefinite.

Past

mi

sia

mi

fossi

Pluperfect. Remarks

As

the est same

vestito,etc.

Reflexive

on

Verbs.

flexive already observed (77), all reverbs form their compound tenses from "'ssere + past participle.The past participle agrees oftenof the with the direct object (which is of course number and gender as the subject)3:

103.

La

has

vestito,etc.

signora

lady

told

been

mi

disse she

that

me

che

had

Ess"ndosene vergognata little girlhaving been

poor

There

Remark.

reflexive and

another", Le

dcmne

may s'

is

s* "ra

gotten up molto much

amano

added le

at

se,tte. The

o'clock.

la pgvera piccina. The ashamed of it.

but

in order

une

alle

seven

distinction

no

verbs, reciprocal be

alzata

le altre.

of form V

to

V altro,

un

avoid

The

between

women

Cf.

78 and

103.

Or m'

$ra vestito.

s

one

ambiguity: love

another. 1

'

Cf. also 114.

one

80

ITALIAN

third

The

104.

GRAMMAR.

impersonal (neutral)

(b) an

(a) a passivesense;

with

used

is often

reflexive

of the

person

sense.

(a) In

the

transitive

first

the

ease

(since only

one

passive),and the verb its direct object:

is

verb

transitive

a

with

agrees

naturallyalways

its

a

become

may

subject,si being

Questi libri si cdmprano dappertutto. These sold everywhere (literally, sell themselves"). si di"de. The book which II libro che mi was

books

are

"

given

to

me.

(b) In the second

the verb

case

often

be and

may

is

subject expressed,and the si which accompanies it, although it is not its subject, 'one", 'they", conveniently be translated may It has

intransitive.

"we":

"people",

It is

Si dice. Se

said,they

parla. People

ne

say.

are

talking

it.

about

dancing. Se ne va. People are leaving. che Io sperava e-ggi si sare,bbe stati allegriinsie,me. have been would together happy we hoped that Si ballera.

I

no

will be

There

to-day. The

105.

with

there

fact that

the reflexive

and

that

by all has given rise the

Where the verb its

were

latter

the

is often

non

si

a

constructions

not

stood clearlyunder-

certain

made

pcjssonofare.

Or: si

to

are

subjectfollows

done.

Non

they

two

of

amount

and

fusion. con-

precedes though si

the si

singular as

subject:

Queste C9se be

these

are

pu"

fare

queste ce-se.

These

things

cannot

REFLEXIVE

Or

(a)

plural

si " costretti.

die.denuQve

(b) Si tense

singular

the

When

creduto.

with

Tliere

passive

a

bad

was

mark

to

a

news.

of

change

a

not

in

so

verbs

reflexive

are

there

English, and

perceive",

their

abituarsi

meaning,

get accustomed

a, to

rallegrarsidi, to rejoiceover, The

107.

verb

andarsene,

special mention, throughout me

I

ne

andava,

se

ne

andranno,

non

se

go ne

going

am

se

vatene,

it takes

used

never

except

as

:

etc.3 "to

go

away",

conjunctive

two

deserves pronouns

away.

was

going

they

will go

he

away. away.

andatevene, go (thou) away; not vadano, let them go away.

(Exercises XX 1

Literally, "news

2

For

Lingua

flexive essentially re-

to.

ess"ndosene andati, they having

this

are

:

vado,

ne

as

which

repent", accgrgersi, 'to verbs require a preposition

reflexive

Many

etc.

complete

to

credu-

stato

Italian

many are

pentirsi, 'to

as

in

are

which

verbs, i.e.,verbs reflexives,

(="

believed.2

been

Many

106.

Si " creduto

It is believed.

It has

to).

3

by

:

5

as

followed

is constrained.

one

consolanti.1

P9C0 serve

may

be

may

adjective:

or

noun

Quando Si

in

verb

a

81

VERBS.

little

curious

usage

Italiana, "332,

Cf. lists under

211

p.

and

gone

(ye, you)

away,

away.

etc.

XXI.)

consoling". cf. Moise,

298.

(3) and

212

(2).

Regole ed

Osservazioni

delta

82

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

VIII.

CHAPTER AND

ADJECTIVES 1

Adjectives and

08.

agree

their

with

PARTICIPLES.

participlesused in number

nouns

speaking, this agreement

adjectives and gender. Generally is indicated by the as

termination.1

(a)

An

masculine

made the

of

nouns

more

or participlequalifying two and gender is usually different number plural,but it may only with agree

adjective or

nearest

noun

to it :

Signore,signori,do,nnedel pgpolo,operai,ufficiali, no,nne, e i libretti di promomano s"rve, tutti coi ragazzi per una d' entrata zione nell* altra,empivan la stanza e le scale. of the lower classes,workmen, Ladies, gentlemen, women officials, grandmothers, servants, all holding boys by one and the certificates of promotion in the other, filled hand and the stairways. the entrance II padre, i frat"lli e le sore,lie sono partite. The father, brothers, and

sisters have

noun (b) A plural,

gone.

take

may

two

or

more

adjectives

where in point of fact each singularin cases in the adjective should be accompanied by a noun : singular Le lingue francese e ted"scasono lingue mode,rne. The

in the

French 109.

and

languages are

in either

modern

languages.

adjectives(with the exception of those few under 118) end in the masculine singular Those in o have a correspondingform o or e. form their plural both masculine and feminine

All

mentioned

in a, and

German

1

Cf. 42.

84

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

Remarks

The

in.

it has

|)una Le I

of

is

derid"ntiogni cred"nza lo is

There

an

affectionate

girl.

amanti.

sono

ragazze

She

amante.

ragazza

all belief say

at

a

the forms

takes

so

become

Participles.

participlein -ante, -ente, where is always an noun adjectiveand an adjective:

present

not

the

on

dicono.

Those

who

scoff

so.

large class of words made up of these participles substantivized; as, amante, cantante, comandante, nti in the last example above Deride, rappresentante, etc. (a)

is almost

substantive.

a

present participlein -ando,

The

112.

used

adjective,but

an

as

a

Ess"ndo ammalati ill (

since

=

Dic"ndo

cosi

The

113. or

they

noun,

II

two

the end

I done

which which

essa

be

either

adjective

an

(venire,rimanere

"ssere

with

verbs

of the

I have I

have

the

avere

of

may

into

I have

?

such

as

"

cf.

81) it

with

agrees

its

e'ssere:

book

is

(being)

shown.

stati mostrati.

difference

The

consideration at

are

predicateadjective and i.e.,with the subjectof libro vi"ne mostratq. The

(b) Used

these

p^ssono andare a trovarlo. Being ill)they cannot go to see him. mi lasci^. Thus saying she left me.

with

I libri sono

1

force,

non

past participle may

(a) Used a

verbal

verb:

a

is

never

invariable:

is therefore

and

with

always

is

-endo

a

is past participle

a

verb.1

the

used with participlewhen be made clear by turning the phrase under question. Thus, taking the examples given I have

paragraph : shown

shown. shown.

of

function

(which What

is

books

(No

shown

the books.

action)

an

Here

.

are

action

these?

They

here,

"shown"

arc are

What

have

the

books

the books

qualifying

ADJECTIVES remain

it may

such

As

85

PARTICIPLES.

AND

invariable

in (i.e.,

the action

is done

the

line mascu-

singular). it is evident

But

object of

that the

so

avere,

toihc

past participlemay

direct

with

agree

that direct

object. usuallyagrees with

It

often

verb, and

the

personalpronoun with an object other it precedes the verb :

when

pronoun

preceding

a

than

a

sonal per-

i libri.1 H9 mostrato i libri che ho mostrato (or mostrati). ]j)cco Ifccoi libri,li ho mostrati.2

The

114.

active

verb,

it

above,

of

mentioned

those

which "'ssere,

has, however, a

predicate adjective,and as such it may direct object preceding it. As noted a this object is a usually does agree when

a

with

agree

is

reciprocalverbs

past participleis therefore

The

sense.

not

is here

verb

The

above.3

and

either

from

different

somewhat

an

reflexive

of

case

personalpronoun: siamo

Le

dgnne

si

sono

loved

have

The

amate.

another

one

have

women

selves). (or our-

loved

one

(or themselves).

another

the

But direct

reflexive

is

pronoun

frequently not

the

object:

"books",

just questions: He

as

to

answer

any

is

"

the

We

amati.

Ci

"

the

other

"Hehasdone

what?" first is

adjective might.)

noun

a

or

"

Taking

what

?"

adjective,that

the

it is clear

to

the

two

that

second

a

verb. 1

H9

mostrati

2

Li

ho

that with 3

mostrato

the

avere

Cf. 103.

unusual.

i libri is very

would

be

tendency is

invariable.

in

very

unusual.

Italian

to

make

It

is. however, the

dent evi-

past participle

86

ITALIAN

parlati. We

Ci siamo

this

In

GRAMMAR.

is

there

where

case,

spoken

have

to

direct

no

the

and direct with

Ci

receives

the

detti

siamo

(detta,detto) la

of the

not plural, plural: e

have

women

le

brother

and

dgnne

la

sister

the

(a)

Before

sant' ;

able: invari-

have

told

masculine

made

The

singular

man

and

the

Hi be,

Saint

tutt'

e

due.

Both

the

handsome.

are

beginning with a b"llibro. Un gran Carlo.

venuti.

sorgllasono

of

Bgllo,grande, and bugno its final vowel

vowel

We

either

nouns

more

gender,are

sono

115.

San

or

same

Forms

Un

verita.

either

come.

e frat"llo

noun

forms perperson where there is a

the truth.1

or

L* ugmo

say

same

But

action).

of two (a) The qualifiers

II

the

difficult to

objectexpressedthe participle agree may remain that or with the subject, or may

another

one

verbs

these

which, since with

pressed, object exthe subject

with

usuallyagrees participle be indirect object,it would the

(or

another.

one

Adjectives.

ble, drop their final syllabefore a singular masculine

santo

consonant ragazzo.

:

Un

bugn

cane.

Charles.

beginning with a singularmasculine grande, grand'; santo, ; bgll' bgllo becomes bugno, bugn2: a

It is said to one another the truth". have literally, "We of mental confusion, the speaker probable that we have here a case the latitude of the participlequalifies. But not knowing what the Italians in this matter lightensit for the foreigner. 2 there is no that Note Compare apostrophe. Cf. 41, note 2.

throughout the forms

of the

definite

article.

bglP U91110, un

Un

87

PARTICIPLES.

AND

ADJECTIVES

sant'

grand' 1191110,un

bu9n

un

uomo,

amico.

(b) Before forms

impure

b"llosps'cchio.L'

u9mo

pluralforms

(c) The

(1) For D9I,gran,

(2)

predicatedthe regular

used:

are

Un

when

or

s

9

grande.

are:

b"i,grandi, santi, bu9ni. b9ll', grand',sant', btu^n:b"gli,santi, grandi,

For

bu9n

san,

bu9ni. (3) For b9llo, grande,

santo,

:

santi, grandi, bu9no : b^lli,

bu9ni. Remarks,

(i)

It will be than

observed

the

latter

These

b"llois

that

others,being

the

only

regularforms. more irregular irregularalso in

the

are

much one

plural.

the

in the feminine grande also occurs singular, times ending in e1, and someespeciallyas qualifierof a noun takes the place of grandi in the masculine plural: La gran Brettagna. Una gran nazione. Great events. La gran via. The highroad. I gran casi. madre che ci Tutti oltre alia grande patria,alia gran una piccola patria : la racc9gliesotto le sue ali,abbiamo all have We citta od il villaggioche ci ha visti nascere.

(2) Gran

for

besides the great native under

us

which

her

wings,

witnessed

our

a

land, the great little country

"

who

mother the

gathers

city or

village

birth.

Adjectives in -co and -go form their plurals according to rules closelyresembling those given for nouns (cf.62). having these terminations (1) Adjectives in -go may always, and do usually, form their pluralin -ghi: 116.

1

Also

cosa,

"a

in

the

very

expressions una good thing", "bad

gran

b^lla

thing".

C9sa,

una

gran

bruttB

SS

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

I casi

analoghi (or analogi). Analogous cases. Uno stivale largo. A wide boot. Stivali larghi. (2) All feminines, as well in -ca as in -ga, likewise the

preserve Cucina

qualityof Home

casalinga.

cooking, middle-class

Abitudini

homelike

food.

Una

larga camera

guttural:

the

A

casalinghe. wide

(3) Adjectivesin -co having the accent take in the plural -chi; those stressed -ci II

!

habits.

Domestic

Camere

room.

cookery,

larghe. the

on

penult

the

on

penult ante-

:

v"nto " fresco.

wind

The

L' U91110 " caduco.

The

is fresh. is feeble.

man

V"nti freschi. 5CC0 due u^mini

caduchi.

^ of

gusto animalesco.

un

Sente kind

5

qualche sucpo

un

of

a

harmonious

sound

V

armonico

?

Adjectives in

117.

for

of the

nouns

II cavallo

Un

"

"

pezzo

Acque

sono

ragazze 1

Cf. 61 in

A

faded

legno

marcio.

and

-esco

lirici.

also

follow

the

horse

Putrid

given

Dei fioriflosci.

flower. A

Cavalli restii.

a

"

bit of rotten

wood.

waters.

" sazio.

non

rules

is restive. "

marce.

II ragazzo

classici.

"

di

some

termination: This

" restio.

hear

you

Si,s"nto dei sugni armonici. laico. That is the opinion of a

po"mi -io

same

fiore fldscio.

Un

Dei

lirico.

po"ma

Do

?

opinioned' un ugmo layman. Siamo tutti laici qui. Un autore classico. Degli autori Un

taste, the taste

animaleschi.

Gusti

animal.

an

animal

It is an

The

boy

is not

satisfied.

Le

sazie. foot-note. take

In

-eschi,those

accordance in

with

'-ico take

this rule all adjectives '-ici.

So

eccfntrico

i, filantrQpico -ci, magnifico -ci, peripdico-ci, pratico -ci, problematico

pudichi.

-ci, but

antico, antichi.

Pudico

is

an

exception, forming

ADJECTIVES

89

PARTICIPLES.

AND

Quite irregularadjectivesare:

118.

'unequal"; ogni, form "every". Pari and impari have only the one for both genders and numbers. Ogni has naturally no plural;it has also no formal distinction of gender. These three are the only adjectivesin i. (b) Qualche, "some", has no pluralform, and nouns used with it remain ing singulareven though their meanbe plural : 'equal";

(a) Pari,

imparl,

l

Comprer9 qualche fiore. I shall buy some 'several", has (c) Parecchi, "some", Its feminine

(d) verb

singular.2

no

is parecchie.

gia, "formerly" (the first a part of the

and

Fu

flowers.

the "'ssere,

second

of

adverb

an

time),

variabl in-

are

:

La

fu

Signora Bianco

maiden

name

(or gia) Cesarotti.

Un

invariable

adverbial

are

phrases

and

:

dabbe,ne. A well-meaning

ugmo

B., whose

Cesarotti.

was

(e) Dabbe,ne, dapp9co therefore

Mrs.

and

(ExercisesXXII

of

Comparison

a

man,

good

man.

XXIII.)

Adjectives.

quality expressed by an adjectivemay be affirmed as simply existingor as existingin a certain degree. The simple affirmation,i.e.,the simple form of the adjective,implies no comparison, although it has often been called the positivedegree (as compare 119.

1

The

might 2

It

The

implication

qualche

is

"a

few",

whereas

dei

fipri

great many.

mean

a

is in

fact

meaning.

with

There

the

plural

is also

an

of

parecchio, "like", with

adverb

parecchio.

change

1

t

ITALIAN

90

with

GRAMMAR.

the

comparative and superlativedegrees) There five possibledegrees of comparison, expressiveof: are (i) Comparative equality(incomparing two things). (2) superiority (in comparing two things). (3) inferiority (in comparing two things) (4) superlativeness (incomparing more than two things). (5) Absolute superlativeness(in which the quality is affirmed as existingin a superlative degree,and yet without comparison). clear by the followingEnglish examThis may be made ples: .

.

(1)

This

is

rose

more

beautiful

than

that.

than

(4)

beautiful

as

(5) This is indeed

a

(3) This

that.

This

is the

most

that.

as

(2)

This

is

is less beautiful

rose

beautiful

most

rose

of

rose

all.

rose.1

beautiful

All these

pressed degrees may be and usually are exin Italian analytically, i.e.,by the use of adverbs, the form of the adjectiveitself remaining unchanged (cf.122, 125). 120.

Comparison The

121.

cosi

"

come, or

come

"

Equality.

equality is expressed by

of

comparison tanto

of

tanto

come,

"

che,

tanto

"

quanto,2

quanto alone:

|)cosi grande

come

suo

frate.Ho.He

is

as

large

as

his

brother. 1

In

"This

rose

is beautiful"

we

have

the

so-called

"positive

degree". 2

Cosi-quantois rather antiquated, also si-quanto(sibeing simply the abbreviation of cosi) Altrettanto tanto. =

.

ITALIAN

02

GRAMMAR.

grande, large,great, maggiore, minore, il minore piccolo,little,

(a)

All these

il

maggiore minimo.

or

also be

adjectivesmay

alto, phi alto, il piu alto, etc. have

massimo;

or

compared (cf. 122).

larly: reguThe

differentiated

become

by usage, superiore, inferiore,being usuallyemployed to signify superior", inferior"; piu alto, piu basso, to mean "higher", forms

"

"

"lower", in the material do

differ in

not

tivo, but

are

from

meaning

oftener

Migliore and

sense.

piu buo.no and

than

used

peggiore

these

piu

latter

cat-

forms.

dissociated from so Qttimoand p^ssimo have become be regarded as independent that they may the group adjectivesmeaning "very good", "very bad", being thus absolute, not comparative, superlatives.1The and be said of massimo same minimo, 'very may "very high,great",and large", very small", sommo, "

infimo,

"very low, base".

Maggiore and

have

minore

usually

the

of

sense

'older", "younger"; piu grande, piu piccolo meaning 'larger","smaller".2 adjectivesin -"rrimo and -issimo must also 124. The of the regarded as remnants absolutely superlative in

be are

1

of

that

Those

common,

and

superlativeby adding this ending.

is in full

measure

without

comparing any interiore, intimo; estremo; int"rno, esteriore, Estfrno, iiltimo,can scarcely be regarded as still building groups 2

3

As

is natural,

absolute

adverbs

superlative:$

molto

are

ting cut-

The

thought

other.

with

measure

in any

absolute

is,the quality described

That

very

They

system.

meaning.3

in -issimo

-"rrimo are rare, those an adjectivebeing made off its final vowel

Latin

ulteripre, of

parison. com-

the frequently used to form b"llo,assai b"Uo, oltremQdo b$llo;etc. also

ADJECTIVES

PARTICIPLES.

AND

preceding this final vowel quality: jjun poeta celeb^rrimo. He is a or

c

does

g

dei versi dolcissimi.

Scrive

Pochissimi

He cosi

poeti scrivono

93

change

not

celebrated

very

writes very

sweet

its

poet. verses.

b"ne. Very few poets write

well.

so

(a) Adjectives ending

in -dico

superlativewhich

-issimo

maledicentissimo ,

forms

These

might

and seem

-fico

(flee)have

an

irregular:maledico,

benefico, beneficentissimo.

reallyderived

are

beneficente. participle), Adjectivesin -evole have

from

maledice.nte(present

similar forms:

malevole

male,

volentissimo.

comparison

The

125.

that

as

manner

same

of of

is formed inferiority superiority,using

"less",instead of phi: bella delle sorelle. 5 la meno

is the

meno,

least beautiful

sisters.

of the Esse than

She

in the

fgrtiche gliugrnini.They

men

sono

less

are

strong

men.

Manco1

infelice di

Less

me.

Comparison by

unhappy

than

of di and

means

I.

che.

comparisons whether of superiority is rendered of inferiority by di or che. (a) Di is used in comparisons of: strative (1) Nouns accompanied by articles (or demon-

126.2 "Than" or

in

pronouns). (2) Nouns 1

Manco

"not

so

2

This

or

is oftenest

bad",

"not

paragraph,

used so

in

the

means

adverbial

of their

adjectives.

expression manco

male,

badly".

for the

subject of adjectives and

speech.

by

pronouns

sake

includes

of

completeness, comparison also

goes

beyond

of other

parts

the of

ITALIAN

94

(3) Numerals

GRAMMAR.

between (i.e.,

piu

or

and

meno

meral) nu-

a

.

(b) Che is used in comparisons of: (1) Nouns (2) Nouns

articles.

without or

by

pronouns

(3) Adjectives. (See also 127.) (4) Verbs. (5) Adverbs, and in all cases ' '

rather

than

' '

*

the

than

other

II vino

than

than

the

(a, 2). II vino " piu buono

altro.

V

che

This

wine

(b,2).

other

Wine

dell' acqua.

chiaro

meno

"

more

(a, 1).

rather

pleasesme

means

I like this wine

delP altro.

piace piuttostoquesto vino

Mi

"than"

where

:

piacequesto vino piu

Mi

of their verbs.

means

is less

clear

water

Meglio than

dormire

than

P9SS0

hours

seven

che

Lavora

sette

or

b, 5).

It is better

I cannot

ore.

sleep

to

sleep more

(a, 3).

s"ipiu giovane di

Tu

(b,2,

tormentarsi.

(6,4). dormire piu di

to worry

Non

che bello2

piu in

You

me.

che

fretta

are

than

younger He

b"ne.

works

I

(a, 2).

rather

fast

well

(b,5). Better late than never (b,5). 5 meglio tardi che mai. than fortunate |)piu fortunato che felice. He is more happy (b,3, or b, 5 "rather fortunate than happy"). harm Egli ne recav" piu danno che utile. He got more harm than than good out of it (b, 1, or b, 5 "rather good"). than

"

"

1

tore

non

sagace

d' Italia. of the 2

be used

Che may

Or:

V.

is

to avoid

meno

a

wise

past vicissitudes piuttqstobuono

de'

a

repetitionof di, as:

mali

presenti che

investigatornot of Italy. che

bello.

delle

less of the

Villari

passate present

" indagavicende ills than

and

nouns

them

is between done

their

or

and qualities

sufferedby

or

them

che

;

in

the

wherever

pronouns

95

di is used

that

It is evident

Remark. of

PARTICIPLES.

AND

ADJECTIVES

comparison between

not

in

sons comparitions ac-

comparisons of

in themselves,i.e.,considered apart from qualities they are ascribed, between actions beingsto whom whole concepts. and between or suffered,

comparison II

turns

umore

suo

the

on

piu

"

changeable

more

difficult to

it is sometimes

But

than

che

mutabile

the

on

or

noun

decide

the done

whether

the verb

V onda.

the

:

His humoi

is

(is).

wave

che figlio e meno giorno mi comparisti davanti meno One less than che uo,mo. a day you appeared before me son (is)and less than a man (is). I due anni rappresentarono per noi piu che due s"coli di esperi"nza. The two more represented for us years centuries of experience (represented). than two Un

Where

127.

the

verbs

"

comparison

than

"is

takes

place between either by che non

rendered

flected inor

quel che : Spe,ndepiu che non guadagna {or sp"nde piu di quelloche than he earns.1 guadagna). He spends more

di

which

Words

128.

adverbs

sometimes

adjectivesand

sometimes

are

tanto,

molto, po,co, quanto,

are:

trgppo2: lo utjmini

Molti Ne

P"che persone Sono

This

is

2

Cf.

really a crossing of he

156.

"

earns

and

"

He

men

say

unhappy people have

Few

They a

the

so.

very

am

venute.

pQ;ca distanza. p9* piu sicuro. It is

than

more

son

I

andati

|)un 1

Many

infelice.

molto

sono

dicono.

went

a

about

it.

come.

distance.

short

little surer.

two

does not

'He

constructions: earn

as

much

as

he

spends spends ".

96

ITALIAN

Ne Vi

tanti libri.

sono

How

felici.

tanto

sono

Trgppi.

Too

There

happy

so

are are

so

phrases such

them"

I received

Iftrgppo

many.

(a) Adverbial

tale

They

it.

over

Quanti ?

books.

many

?

many

I received

GRAMMAR.

(

:

"in the state

=

them")

as

lontano.

far.

them

just as

"I returned in which

be

rendered

quali li ho

recevuti.

to

are

It is too

they

by

the

were

when

adjectives

quale:

,

Li

hg

renduti

tali

of

Place

Adjectives.

and

Numerals

jectives admost pronominal adjectives, of size and quantity, adjectivesof emotion, also (usually) : bglloand bugno precede the noun grandi. IJccoi migi Hg tre libri. Questi1 libri sono 129.

grandi

Hg

libri.

ancora

molti

Mgstro

i

migi bgi

libri al mio

amico.

caro

130.

used Participles

by an adverb shape, color, and the

5 a

libri.

un

noun

or

of

:

figlioamato.

well-known

fied adjectives, adjectivesmodia suffix,adjectivesof nationality, material low qualitiesgenerally,folas

thing.

"

una

Sono

cgsa

bgn

conosciuta.

libri italiani.

|)uno

It is

spgcchio

rotondo.

"cco

un

abito

L' ugmo

nero.

" cieco.

Un

bgll*uccgllo.

But: Un

uccgllobellino.

Euphony often decides as to the placingof the adjective. In general one of fewer syllablesthan its with bello and noun precedes,as is the case bugno above mentioned two ador more (129). Where 131.

1

-"these".

OF

PLACE

jectives qualify sometimes

jj un

uo,mo

onesto.

]J un

ucjmo

onesto

the

and

precedes

is

He

other

follows:

honest

an

man.

is

He

simpatico.

e

97

usually follow, although

they

noun

one

one

ADJECTIVES.

and

honest

an

genial con-

man.

il

Sente

of the

perfume

the

Vedete

certain

A

132.

erba

verde

!

Only

smell

you

beautiful

the

see

the

after x

usual

that

different When before

be

the

ordinarily

have

they

noun,

a

is usual.

than

whether

place,

take

adjectives

elsewhere

placed

their

of

out

of

number

when

meaning

literal

or

ing mean-

:

Un

A

grande.

uomo

great

large

Un

man.

grand*

A

U9mo.

man.

Un

Un

A

galante.

ugmo

honorable

gallant

Un

man.

galantuQmo.

man.

amico.

caro

Una

friend.

dear

A

A

cara.

casa

house.

costly Una

scrittura.

doppia

Double-entry

doppia.

|)la sola

Do

roses?

Spring bell'

la

pure

?

primaverile

rQse

grass!

green

An

delle

profumo

sola

l'ha

She

Only

Cf.

130,

also

the

is my

my

{Exercises 1

double

La

copy.

scrittura

book-keeping.

miafiglia.

sentito.

A

French

only daughter. has

daughter and

XXIV

usage

of

heard

Mia it.

XXV.) the

same

adjectives.

figlia

98

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

CHAPTER

IX.

POSSESSIVES.

133.

Possessives their

according to is

libro,mio

an

either

are

in the

use

is

a

the

whether other Italian

form

its function

by

|)il suo

and

one

il mio

ecco

such.

as

But

cedent representingan anteabove case libro) In Italian, the possessive is the same, adjectiveor pronominal. In .

of be

"my"

words,

is treated

pronouns

pronoun

(thisbeing in the however,

In

sentence.

adjectiveand

in "cco il mio, mio

adjectivesor

"mine"

and the

in

rendered

word1:

same

This is your

?

newero fazzoletto,

are

handkerchief,

isn't it? Ma

no,

134.

non

The

"

il mio.

article

No, it is not mine.

being

44), it follows that it in

used

most

with cases

most

(cf.

nouns

immediately

cedes pre-

the

The possessivequalifyingthe noun. nominal prois treated as possessive, representinga noun, that is,it also usuallytakes the article. Thus a noun, the possessiveis seldom without found an article,and that article being generallythe definite,the latter is which are: given with the forms of the possessive,

my,

"

mine.

thy, thine

(your,yours),

f-his,her, hers (your, yours). 1

Cf. French

mon

and

le mien,

which

more

resemble

the

English.

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

ioo

figlie. These

mie

Queste sono

daughters of mine,

(

=

daughters).

of my

some

daughters

my

are

But:

Queste sono le mie figlie. These are my daughters ( all of my daughters). is mine (=it is one of my That book Quel libro " mio. books, not of yours). books (=all the Quellisono i mie,ilibri. Those are my in question). books now =

5 Sua questa |)la Sua casa (2) In

this house?

own

you

Is this your

?

*

home?

phrases,such

of set

number

a

Do

as:

vgstra lic"nza. By your leave. It is not my fault. I colpa mia.

Con Non

Per Da

?

casa

On

vostra.

causa

parte mia.

Vado

in tua

137.

The

For

more stricted repossessiveis much than in English, it being replaced article;(2) the definite article and

by (1) the definite a conjunctivepronoun. the subject of (1) Where where

or

stead.

of the

Italian

in

part.

my

I go in your

vece. use

account.

your

for other

the

there

reasons

ambiguity, the definite article possessive : Pr"ndo il quad"rno nella mano.3

is the

sentence

is used

could

instead

be

sessor, posno

of the

2

in my

copy-book

the

hand. il

Portami Dammi

1

I take

la

However,

soprabito. Bring Give

mano.

casa

mia

me

is often

my

me

your used

overcoat.

hand.

for

"at

home"

without

the

article. 2Cf. 3

mano.

44(8).

Sometimes

even

the

article is omitted:

Prendo

il

quaderno

in

POSSESSIVEvS.

ai

freddo

Hg

pi"di

i

H9

or

ioi

pie,di freddi..

cold.1

.My

feet

are

-

II bambino

la

cerca

child

The

mamma.

looking: f.or his

is

mother.

accompanied

but

by lavi

Mi

of

to

hanno

Let "let

in

the

wash

his

him him

i

wash

pronoun

is

possessive

face, he

himself

to

I

capelli.

possessive

placed re-

wash

must

face").

the

broken

have

and

gender

well

"her

mother"

"her

or

made

cases

be

might the

leg (one

my

It follows

Egli di

non

l"i.

by

He

of mai

third

conosciuto knew

never

(Exercises

*Cf.

lui,

84.

his

XXVI

is

di

lui

mother;

and

2Cf.

madre he

loves

XXVII.)

98

(2).

means

"his

in

most

the

sense

of

instead

used

are

sessor, pos-

madre,

where

singular

person la

padre

meaning

l"i

hair.

denoting

sua

but

di

the

noun

suo

father",

context,

di

the

that

The

the

ambiguous

ha

"his

as

with

the

her

off

cut

person

with

mother".

clear

possessive

in

number

father"

have

They

agrees

object possessed.

as

personal

whom,

gamba.

una

tagliato

The

138.

the

reflexive

not

legs).

my

Le

la

faccia.

rotto

sono

verbs

article2:

an

la

with

or

conjunctive

a

person

(literally,

face

his

by

the

indicating

Si

verbs,

reflexive

With

(2)

:

;

ama

hers

molto

dearly.

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

102

*.""

'CHAPTER

X.

ifel"ONSTRATIVES, RELATIVES,

INTERROGATIVES,

INDEFINITES.

adjectivesor used

be

as

which

forms

1.

Plural.

questi

j

fern,

questa

queste

)

masc.

cotesto1

cotesti

fern,

cotesta

coteste

quello quella

quegli,quei2 quelli, quelle Forms

Pronominal

questi,this costui,this

often in

a

this

sense,

these

Or codesto, codesti, etc.

2

Sometimes

3

Notice

cotesto, cf. that

be

must

1

Latin

colui, )

shortened

into

added

some

que'.

of iste.

forms

of llle.

trace

those

men,

cio, "this", "that",

meaning "this" Tste,those meaning "that", with the

[women.

woman,

coloro, those

woman.

that

[women.3

.

that col"i,

To

140.

quegli )

these

men,

t

fellow. this cost"i,

Persons).

these

costoro,

man,

these_

that, those.

of

(used only

man.

contemptuous

not

Forms.

questo

2.

used

persons.

masc.

fern,

may

always

are

Adjectiveor Pronominal

Singular.

masc.

which

forms

have

They

pronouns. either and

pronominallyand only to represent

the

be either

Demonstratives, like possessives, may

139.

For

the

all have the

some

trace

single exception of

contemptuous

sense

of

costui

Costei, costoro, colui, colei,coloro, sometimes,

frequently,have

this contemptuous

sense.

of

but

DEMONSTRATIVES.

which

is

invariable

an

pronoun,

thing, but a concept That IJcco ci9 che I19 detto. or

person

I

which

a

or

representingnot phrase:

(=that

I said

is what

a

said).

Remarks

usuallydrop final inflected like b"llo (115): cotesto

Quello is

vowel.

the Demonstratives.

on

Questo and

141.

103

Quest' UQmo ; cotest' ugmo quelloz"lo; in questicampi

; e

quell'uomo in quelli.

;

o

before

quest' (Jpera ;

vised like English "this" Questo and quelloare the speaker, "that", questo for that which is near

142.

and

quello for that which words

two

than

in the

near

allows

of greater

of

perspicuity

English, cotesto being used of that person spoken to, quelloof that which

Prendete

quell'altro and give me other

143.

questo libro

e

datemi

which

is

is remote

Desidera

cotesto,

e

pgi cercatemi

(which is near me) that one you), and then look for (which is near from both) for me, please. one (which is remote per

this book

piacere. Take

also used

Quello and quegli are

questo and

(=i

"that"

existence

him:

from

that

for

the

But

is remote.

latter"

questifor "the i fiori azzurri

fiori rossi), non

0

for "the

:

i fiori rossi?

quelli(=i

former",

Desidero

questi

fiori azzurri).

adjectivesand pronouns not used in the singularas subjectpronouns are the corresponding pronominal representing nouns, forms being then preferred. They are, however, used in the singularas objectivesand in the pluraleither as subjectsor as objects,to represent persons as well as things: 144.

The

forms

which

are

both

ITALIAN

104

GRAMMAR.

H9 parlato con Alessandro, e ho capito che questi (or questo Alessandro,but not questo alone) ti vuol b"ne. I I understood and that he have spoken with Alexander of whom we are (=this one, this Alexander speaking)is well inclined Hai

towards

parlato

you.

quegli altri?

con

Have

spoken

you

with

others?

those

Quelli(or coloro) che Those

I

whom

ho visto

did not

saw

hanno

non

want

voluto

parlare.

talk.

to

Relatives.

The

145.

relatives

that, which.

che, who, whom, il quale,i

quali,la quale,le quali,who, whom,

cui,whom, chi,the

are:

to

whom,

whose.

who, any one who, whoever. onde, of whom, of which, with whom, one

by which,

whom,

(a) These sometimes II

that which.

are

with

a

all pronouns, noun

first three

much

are

although

il

is

quale

:

quale padre Crist^foro.This

(b) The

which, by

etc.

forms

used

with

Father

Christopher.

frequent than

more

the

others.

Remarks

the

on

is invariable.

146. Che

It is

subject or direct object. throughout by combination the article,is used

for all

Relatives.

II

generallyused

quale, which

with

the As

Che

is

a

noun

in the

as

is inflected

various

forms

of

subjector direct it exceptingwhere ambiguity

cases.

objectche1 is preferredto might result from its invariableness 1

only

expressions:

un

a

of form: bel che,

un

gran

che.

RELATIVES.

V

1191110che parla " mio is my

II

you

del

quale parliamo

is the

colla

since

ambiguous,

is

who

man

ing speak-

the

" il

The

the children of the

are

(a) Che, meaning clause,is

The

quale abbiamo whom

che

might

nemico.

suo

we

abbiamo

refer

of

man

vista

i"ri.

yesterday.

saw

visto

would

either to the

figlidella signora la quale

i

man

young

enemy. la

woman

donna

che

amico.

be the

man,

both.)

or

They

with

man

(IJcco 1' ugmo

Sono

The

friend.

speaking is your colla dgnna ugmo

IJcco r

woman

is my

there

are

we

There

li " il mio

see

L' ugmo

whom

padre.

father.

giovane che vede

whom

105

sort

a

abbiamo

lady whom

"which"

of neuter.

incontrata.

met.

we

and It

referringto usuallytakes the

whole

a

definite

article1:

L"i non You

say

il che vuol dire che non ni"nte, nothing,which indicates that you are dice

n' "

cont"nto

pleased

not

it.

about

Cui

147.

is invariable.

object,generallybut not It is interchangeablein

It is used with

always

quale,dei quali,al quale, etc.: signora cui (a cui, alia quale) parla

della La

preposition.2

with

cases

many

a

del

" mia

he is talking is my aunt. IJccola persona cui (dicui, della quale) Le

lady

indirect

an

as

quale,

zia.

The

to whom

Here

is the person of whom Questa " la ragione per

is the

reason

on

I

spoke to you. cui presto partirrisolvo.

of which

account

I19parlato.

I

am

resolved

to go

This away

at once. 1

It is found

2

Cui

is sometimes

this usage note

in older Italian without

1, p.

is 106.

rare

found and

is

instead

of

it. il

really contrary

quale as to

the

direct nature

object,but of cui.

Cf.

106

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

cui, meaning "whose", is used without (a) When the prepositiondi, it should be placed between the noun : qualifiedand the article belonging to that noun le cui

di cui l"tto,or L' autore (Jpereabbiamo abbiamo l"ttole (Jpere. In this example the difference in the use of cui and il quale is clear. One could substitute for the latter phrase: Ly autore del quale abbiamo could l"ttole (jpere,but one i quali (Jpereabbiamo tto. Cui comnot say : L' autore prehends le, L' autore

in itself il

which which with

with

former

the

preposition

the

expressed

be

must

latter.

the

is invariable.

148. Chi used

where

ship.1 prepositional relation-

some

quale does not, therefore

omitted

be

may

of

notion

a

often

more

che, coloro che, which Chi ama,

teme

It

less

is

frequent, but

elegant,than colui che, col"i have the same meaning:

(or colui che

He

teme).

ama,

loves,

who

fears. Chi

con Consigliatevi

who

those

He

trovera.

cerca

Troverai

chi ha

had

have

seeks

who

shall find. with

counsel

esperie,nza. Take

experience.

chi t' aiutera.

will find

You

who

somebody

will

help you. (a)

.

"some

.

.

.

.

others", "the chi

vi"ne.

va,

Chi

ride,chi piange. Onde

by

.

Chi

149.

rendered

chi is to be

Chi

one

Some

.

.

.

other",

.

or

laughs, the other

is invariable.

It

always

.

.

some",

the like:

coming.

going, some

are

One

the

"some

weeps.

has

a

sense

of

: relationship prepositional

gloriosaonde glorioussoul of which

L' anima

The 1

the

It is the notion

"to".

Latin of the

si we

dative, which

"of" est

si

parla).

speaking.

are

expresses

preposition A qui

Cf. French:

parla (or della quale

as ce

well

the

notion

as

chapeau?

that

of

possession,

of the

tion preposi-

108

ITALIAN

Chi

Chi

is it?

Who

"?

GRAMMAR.

queste d9nne?

sono

Who

are

women?

these

chi parlate?

Di

Di chi

questifiori?

sono

are

a

speaking?

you

flowers

Whose

is sometimes

Che

154.

whom

Of

sometimes

pronoun,

always invariable. As a things,as an adjectiveit may

It is

only of

used

these?

are

jective. ad-

an

it is

pronoun

also be used

of persons: Che

cerca?

What

Che

persona

ha visto?

What

person

(a) Che Che

have

you

Chi ha

visto?)

seen?

you

co,sa is

looking for? than (lesscommon

are

frequentlyused

for "what":

co,sa ha visto?

155.

Quale is either

is in either It is used

Quale

case

both

dei due

adjective. adjectiveending in things:

a

or

pronoun inflected like any

of persons

and la?

ragazzi "

Which

an

of the

two

It e.

boys is

there ?

jjun

ugmo

che

aspgtta.

What Qual ugmo? Quali ragioniha per for thinking so ?

any

who

man

a

is

waiting.

man? crederlo?

156. Quanto is either adverb.1

It is

a

What

Except in the latter

adjectiveending

in

an

pronoun, case

have

reasons

adjective,or

you

an

it is inflected like

o :

do you want ? Quanto vuo,le? How much How seats are Quante s"diesonvi? many "all": (a) Tutto quanto (-i,-a, -e) means Li ha visti tutti quanti. He has seen them

there?

all.

also be interrogatives except chi may used in exclamations. They are not accompanied by the article as in English: 157.

All these

1

Cf.

121

and

128.

INDEFINITES.

Che

What

peccato!

pity!

a

What

1191110!

Qual

Quanti dispiaceri!

!

man

a

109

How

troubles!

many

Indefinites.

158. The

principal indefinite

the

following are

nouns pro-

:

ni"nte,nulla, nothing. altri, another (altri altri, ognuno, everybody. parecchi, several, one another). piu, i phi, most, the most. altrui,of another, to another, of others, to others. qualchecgsa,something, anything. altro, something else, anyqualcuno, qualcheduno, any thing else. alcuno, -i,-a, -e,

some,

.

.

.

.

any.

.

.

certuno,1

a

certain

one.

person.

taluno,3 such

ciascuno, ciascheduno, every,

(checchessia),

checchesia

checche,2 whatever,

uno,

chicchesia,

niuno,

nessuno,

1

e

V

altro,gli uni

e

gli

one.

no

like

This,

Rare.

one.

both. altri,4

whatever.

one

any

ever,

nobody.

1' uno

who-

everything,

all.

one,

every veruno,

any

whatever.

chiunque,

one.

tutto, -i, -a, -e,

one.

every

an

ciascuno,

nessuno,

etc., is

a

of uno,

compound

"one". 2

from

che

+ che

+

Rare.

4

Fern.

three"

+

sia,

3

"both",

used

often

Not

checchesia

che,

Italian.

in modern

from

+ che

che

that

Observe +

this

is formed

sia, chicchesia

from

chi

etc.

Puna

e

the

but =tutti

e

l'altra, le commonest

tre, "all

four"

une

e

le

altre.

expression =tutti

e

also

Ambedue is

quattro,

tutti etc.

e

due.

means

"All

ITALIAN

HO

Remarks

denotes

always

some

of persons

used

are

altri li"to,

Altri "

the

on

Altri1 is used

159.

GRAMMAR.

Indefinite

Pronouns.

either

subjector object,altrui prepositional relationship.Both only,altro only of things: as

One

misero.

is

the

happy,

other) (an-

other

miserable. Io

v9glio(la)rgba altrui (or d' altri).I

non

want

not

people'sproperty.

other

ha

Non

No, ni"ntedi piu. No, nothing more.

else?

and

Checchesia

160.

used

not

meaning

Did

detto altro?

anything

are

do

"

as

chicchesia

subjectof

the

' '

whatever

a

he

not

say

being reallyphrases Other verb. phrases

qualsivoglia, qualsiasi,tutto

are:

quel che, quale che sia, per quanto,2 etc. lo dir" a chicchesia. I shall not Non

:

tell it to any

one

whatever.

dirg checchesia.

Non

I shall not

anything Quali che siano i suoi talenti,non parla b"ne. his talents may be, he does not speak well. Chiunque tema torni a casa. Per quanti tale,nti Whatever abbia, non lavora. have, he does

he may

is

161. Nessuno niuno

or

adapted all these

Non

vi "

Che

cgsa dice?

A

Most

in casa?

talents

every-day Italian

style.

phrases (4) (a).

Is there is

There

nessuno.

Ni"nte.

feminine, altra,is

Cf. 232

Whatever

Nulla

nulla.

is

is often used

Non

than more

with

negatives:

nessuno

2

in

ni"nte than

elevated

to the

whatever.

work.

commoner

and

veruno,

Vi "

1

not

say

of like

also

nobody

at home?

nobody.

What

are

you

saying?

ing. Noth-

found.

meaning

are

followed

by

the

subjunctive.

PREFIXES

Non

ne

nulla.

so

Vergogna

I know

dovere

e

SUFFIXES.

AND

in

nothing about nulla

un

sono

it. lui.

per

Shame

duty are nothing to him. with non also means "no one": (a) Alcuno che capisca. There is no one Non v' " alcuno

be used Ho

adjectivesare

Alcuno, ciascuno,

nouns.

as

indefinite

Many

162.

nessuno,

and

who

stands. under-

sometimes

used

may

ognuno,

also

adjectives:

as

comprato

giornaliillustrati.

alcuni

illustrated newspapers. rime'dio. Non trovo nessun

I

have

bought

some

visto

Ho

Molti but

sono

quel tale. I ma partiti,

I find

have

remedy.

that

seen

tutti.

non

no

individual.

Many

have

gone

away,

all.

not

Ogni and

(a) and

qualche

always adjectives. Cf. 118,

are

(b). (ExercisesXXVIII

CHAPTER PREFIXES

AND

and

XXIX.)

XI. SUFFIXES.

and adverbs1 adjectives, meaning of nouns, of prefixes in Italian by the use is frequentlymodified the latter. and suffixes,especially and straare 164. The prefixesarci-, sopra-, sovra-, and adjectives. They all have a superused with nouns lative meaning. They are not very frequent2:

163. The

1

Adverbs

less often

are

than

less often

modified

than

adjectives,and

adjectives

nouns.

of prefixes are also used with verbs, and most them considered with forms are produced by compounding to word-building and They belong therefore separate words. the province of the dictionary,not to the grammar. 2

All

these

the as

to

ITALIAN

H2

GRAMMAR.

beautiful; arcibriccone, arch-scoundrel;

Arcibe.Ho,very

citable; exsoprabbondevole,superabundant; sopraeccitabile, very overexcitability sopraeccitabilita, ; sopraccarico, overburdened, overloaded; il sovrappiu,the excess ; sovrap-

pi"no, overfull; strata, stragrande,very large. 165. Suffixes

are

an

very

unusual, unreasonable

hour;

They

numerous.

may sometimes

press ex-

so meaning so various and enable the foreigner elusive that only wide reading can their use. ever, They constitute,howfullyto understand of the language. of the great charms one Suffixes may be classified accordingto their meaning terms diminutives, augmentative as expressiveof 's, as endearment, of disparagement,or of deteriority.1 166. The are (those oftenest principaldiminutives -ino (-cino, -icino, -iccino, used being placed first) : of endearment) -olino); -etto (-osetto)(often with a sense -ic"llo) (-c"llo, -ar"llo,er"llo, ; -uccio (often ; -e,llo with a pejorative sense); -U9I0 (-9I0, -eruglo,-ettu9lo, minutiv dia noun -iciottalo,-icolo, -iccu9lo) ; ~9tto (used as of animals only in speaking of the young cf. 167); -9ccio;-ognolo, -fccio; -igno; -astro, -ticolo, -uzzolo (allfour pejorative)3: -uzzo, little boy; ragazRagazzo, boy; ragazzino,4ragazzu9lo,

of

shades

2

zetto, dear little boy; 1

Italian:

In

ragazzuccio,naughty

little boy.

diminutivi, accrescitivi,vezzeggiativi,peggiorativi

(dispregiativi) .

2Cf. 3

171

Added

(b). to

adjectivesof

color

"yellowish". giallastro, all used -igno, and -ognolo are asprigno, "somewhat '

Words

that suffix

to which were

an

a

is

-astro

a

Otherwise

diminutive:

giallo,"yellow";

it is

pejorative. -Iccio, adjectives: gialliccio,'yellowish";

with

harsh".

suffix has been

added

integralpart of them:

are

accented

ragazzino, etc.

as

though

PREFIXES

Fiume,

river;

SUFFIXES.

AXD

113

fiumicello, little river; flumicolo, insignificant

little stream.

Figlio,son

;

(which figliu9lo

little figliuolino,

Braccio,

sense),

son.

bracciuglo,arm

arm;

lost its diminutive

has

Via, street; viuzza,

narrow

of chair.

street, alley.

Cane, dog; cagnolino,pretty little dog.

eaglet. Aquila,eagle; aquillgtto, Orso, bear;

orsacchio^to,bear's cub.

Grande

large. large; grandino, somewhat Caro, dear; carino, winning, Deary (epithet). Pallido, pale; paliduccio,rather pale. Grazioso, graceful,pleasing; graziosetto,graziosettino, pretty, charming. Grasso,fat; grass^ccio, plump. verdastro, greenish. Verde, green; pianino, he came Piano, softly; veniva quite softly, quietly. ,

167. The

principalaugmentatives are : -one (-done, and for adjectives-uto: -accione, -oncione),-gtto,1 il

Do,nna, woman;

donnone,

the

Ragazzo^to, big strong boy. Naso, nose; nasuto (adj.formed

big woman. from

it),long-nosed.

principalsuffixes indicative -ino, -olino, -etto, already mentioned

168. are

The

The

context

shows

whether

of endearment utives. dimin-

under the

meaning

is

endearing or diminutive. -accio, -astro, 169. The principal pejorativesare diminutives and those already mentioned under -azzo, etc.): (-ucolo, -uzzo, Poeta, poet; poetastro, poor poet, poetaster.2 1

Added

to

the

names

of animals

diminutive. 2

Which

is in fact the Italian word.

-9tto is, as

stated

in

166,

a

ITALIAN

H4

Giovine, young

GRAMMAR.

dissolute youth. giovinastro,

man;

St^fano,Stephen;

Stefanaccio.

Amore, love;

amorazzo,

Frate, monk;

fratuzzo,monk

The

170.

naughty Stephen.,

illicit love.

suffixes have

of bad

in many

habits.

lost their

cases

nal origi-

meaning: Conte, count, contessa, countess;

(not "little")count

sina, the young the

son

il contino

and

and

daughter-in-lawof

e

la

(for

countess

the

"little house"

"

(Casetta,

latter usually "wretched

the

"

stance, in-

conte).

Casa, house; casino,country-house, club-house. casuccia

contes-

tle lit-

house".)

(a) In the from

same

a diminutive originally frat"llo,

way

(which latter now religiousorder", "monk"), frate

diminutive

new

brother". of

formed

means

only "brother

means

"brother",

from

it,

fratellino

In figliastro, "stepson", there

is

in and

a a

"little

"

no

sense

of the diminutive disparagement,just as there is none in matrigna, "stepmother", or in matrina, "godmother "

1 .

suffix

final vowel

The

171.

is

Pazzo,

testolina,little

(a) If the

g it retains

a

its

In

being

all these

used

"dish", Latin.

as

an

words element

-the diminutive

faceva the

woman.

scendere

non

sense

final vowel

be

a

giu.in chiesa, a ordinato

freschetto,avevano

suffixes have

for

woman;

little bit.

Per

Fresco, fresh, cool. mattutino, quando

peasant

preceding this quality:

consonant

P9C0, little;pochino, a

1

a

head.

fool; pazzerello. Contadina,

contadinetta,strong peasant

or

before

:

Testa, head;

c

usually dropped

simply

word-building. of

the

sullix

been

incorporated,

In others, was

la

as

probably

scod^lla, lost

in

n6

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

XII.

CHAPTER

IMPERSONAL

VERBS.

IRREGULAR

VERBS.

DEFECTIVE

We

173.

have

(67 and

seen

VERBS.

68) that

regular verbs endings,which vary

by adding certain the conjugation (67) to a stem In many irregularverbs the

their tenses

form with

of the

variations

The

stem

the

are

which

is invariable.1 is variable.2

stem

result of:

traction; (a) con-

(b) the stressingof the stem-vowel.3 "ssere have

irregularverbs except remain regular.

All which

Contraction

174.

is unstressed, that

Dire, to

infinitive may

of the

initial vowel

the

where

is to

certain parts

say,

of the

occur

infinitive

cially espe-

ending

in '-ere verbs:

(contractedfrom dicere).

say

call the

form

dire itself

irregular, yet the fact that parts of the verb are quite regularly infinitive dicere4 give the uncontracted from formed of irregularity the whole system an appearance : One

cannot

He

Dic-eva. 175.

saying.5

was

future

The

and

conditional

e the infinitive, exhibit, where

the 1

contracted

same

In

for the most 2

Some

formed

from

the latter is contracted,

form:

words, regular verbs

other

being

are

weak.

Irregular verbs

are

part strong.

grammarians

prefer

to

say

that

the

verb

has

several

by

the pres-

stems.

of all variations

3

The

4

Which

does

5

Which

is in fact

6

These

secret

tenses

not

are

is

exist in modern a

reallychange

of stress.

Italian.

perfectlyregular form.

composed

of the infinitive followed

IRREGULAR

But

they

and

not

be

may

be

cannot

Tenere,

would

when

contracted

say.

the

infinitive

is

I shall hold.1

Terrg.

parts of the

the stem,

on

He

117

:

hold.

to

176. Those falls

Direbbe.

1 shall say.

Dir".

VERBS.

in

verb

which

i.e.,the present, indicative

the

accent

and

junctive sub-

the singular (exceptthe second person plural), and the preterite imperative, (except the second person singularand the first and second persons plural)are the parts oftenest irregular. The past participleis also frequentlyirregular:

(contracted from traere); Traggo, I draw; Trassi,I drew. But: Traeva, I was drawing, etc., regular.

Trarre,

to

As

177.

with

draw

have

we

(173),Italian irregularverbs

seen

tain singleexception of "ssere, regularin cerverbs given below parts. In the model irregular those which are regular in all irregularverbs (except mentioned those under marked with 180) are an

are,

the

asterisk. (a) Trarre

ent

or

the

have

"I 1

This

to

(contracted from

traere) to draw, drag. ,

mostrare + ho " mostrerp preterite of avere (literally, show"), servire + "bbe" servirebbe ("he had to serve"). "

is because

the

accent,

which

in

the

infinitive falls

on

the

(tenere),is in the compound antepenult, preventing contraction thrown the on tenere +ho" penult tenere?" terrQ. Tener9 does "

exist

not

in modern

2

The

3

Regularly formed

forms

Italian.

bracketed from

are

less the

frequent.

infinitive trarre.

n8

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

INDICATIVE.

Imperfect.

Conditional.

*traeva*

*traevamo

trarrei2

trarremmo

*traevi

*traevate

trarresti

trarreste

*traeva

*traevano

trarrebbe

trarrfbbero

Preterite.

Imperative.

trassi

*traemmo

*traesti

*traeste

trasse

trai

traete

trassero

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present.

Imperfect. *traessi

*traessimo

tragga

tragghiamo tragghiate

*traessi

*traeste

tragga

traggano

*traesse

*traessero

tragga

(6) Venire, to

come.

Imperfect.

Conditional.

*veniva

*venivamo

verrei

verremmo

*veniva

*venivate

verresti

verreste

*veniva

*venivano

verrebbe

verrfbbero

Preterite.

Imperative.

venni

*venimmo

*venisti

*veniste

venne

vieni

venite

vennero

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present.

venga venga venga 1

2

3

(vegna) (vegna) (vegna)

These

Imperfect.

veniamo3

*venissi

*venissimo

veniate

*venissi

*veniste

vfngano (vfgnano)

*venisse

*venissero

regularly formed These parts are regularly formed Sometimes v"nghiamo. parts

are

infinitive traere.

from

the

from

the infinitive trarre.

VERBS.

IRREGULAR

178. In these the stem,

(1)

or,

The

verbs

which

from

present stem,

so, three

call them

prefersto

if one

modifications

three

seen

are

119

stems:

formed

are

of

the

tive; subjunctive and the impera(2) The preteritestem, from which is formed and only a part of the preterite; only the preterite, (3) The infinitive stem, formed by a contraction of the present indicative

and

found

often

infinitive and

irregularonly in so contraction). To these might (which

future

uncontracted, in the

remains

far

are

infinitive itself

the

where

as

and

they

be added:

conditional exhibit

this

(4) The

perfect im-

regular Whether the infinitive itself or only the infinitive stem conditional be contracted, the imperfect and future the indicative and subjunctive,the present participle, second plural present indicative, the second person singularand pluraland the first person plural person finitiv infrom this uncontracted formed of the preterite are (or imperfect stem), and so are regular in all is in fact the

stem, which

originaland

.

irregularverbs. (a) The

Latin

irregular.The upon

forms

tratto " tractum

,

is not

explainand : irregularities

often

Italian

the

the memory

(b) The

be, but

past participlemay

detto " dictum

etc. ,

plural present irregularonly in the verbs

second

always, impress

person

indicative

dare, dire might be called The 180. see tive imperafare, stare, for which (s'ssere1), It may usually follows the present indicative. it is be, although it is not often, irregular. Where so, as, for

instance, in the verb

sapere,

present subjunctive: 1

Which

is

entirelyirregular.

it follows

the

ITALIAN

120

sappiate,you

know;

sapete, you

GRAMMAR.

(ye).1 sappiate,know (c) It will be observed in

third their and

in the

that

first person

others, the

many

know.

may

model

verbs

singular and

as

the

plural of the present differ slightlyin from the other persons of that tense, irregularity that the present subjunctive follows these two person

forms:

Traggo, traggono, tragga;

(d) It will also be forms

except the

simply the

forms)

all the

conditional

and are

v"'ngono,venga, that

observed

future

contracted

vengo,

etc.

irregular

(which

strong, i.e.,stressed

are on

Cf. 176.

stem.

Constructing IrregularVerbs.

By observing for certain verbs the remarks be 180, any irregularverb (except "'ssere) may

179.

under

constructed the

singular of

after these

models, the infinitive,the participles

indicative,and

present

the

first person

the

preteriteand future2 being known. first person The singularof the present indicative junctive gives the third person plural,3and the present subexcept, in

plural.

verbs, the first and

some

The

second

singular of the present indicative gives the singularimperative. (Cf. also 180 (3).) The first person singular of the preterite givesthe third persons singularand plural.

persons

'Cf. 2

be

may 3

person

180(3).

This

future

second

latter

but

the

leave

formed

Except

is necessary

from

in the

only with

verbs

infinitive uncontracted. the

verbs

which Otherwise

contract

the

the future

infinitive.

andare,

avere,

dare, fare, sapere,

and

stare.

VKRBS.

IRRKOULAR

of Irregularities

Other

and

Dire

the second

pluralof

person

Verbs.

that fare

the

dare, stare, have

(2) Dare, fare, stare, form

apart (cf.74).

case

a

(for dicere) and

fate,1and

and

as

be remarked

further

It must

(1)

considered

be

must

Certain

noted, entirelyirregular,

before

"ssere is, as

180.

121

:

(for facere) have present

date,

in the

indicative

in dite

state.

future

and

tional condi-

dar9, dar"i; farp, far"i; star", star"i. This

is

explained by the fact that these verbs are only apparently, not really,of the first conjugation.2 The ordinarilyregular persons of the preteriteand the whole of the imperfectsubjunctiveare also slightly in dare and stare, the a changing to e : desti, irregular "thou gave", dessi, 'I might gavest", demmo, "we give", etc.; also stesti,stemmo, steste, stessi,etc. ordinarilyfollows the (3) The imperative, which present indicative, is in the verbs

avere,

sapere,

and

subjunctive: abbi, abbiate; sappi,sappiate; vogli,vogliate. ends in 1, n, or r frequentlydrop whose Verbs stem the final i of the singularimperative: like

volere

Pon

!

Put

Vie,n qua!

,

An

the

present

it down

!

here!

Come

dare, dare, dire, fare, and

stare

also

drop

this i "

va', da\ di',fa',sta\

compound their primary. Those

(4) Most of

that

1

Cf. French

2

Cf

.

follow

verbs

the

differ from

dites, faites.

the Latin

forms.

irregularities it in any

way

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

122

mention givenspecial fare, stare, etc.).

are

.

Defective

Impersonal Verbs. 181. A

defective

verb

of

(cf Table

is

Verbs, Irregular

Verbs.

only certain

one

forms

of

impersonalverb is one used only this form has no in the third person singular.Even the apparent real subject(although gliis sometimes subject;cf. 86, foot-note 3, and 94), since the verb precludesall idea of any person or thingproducingor Impersonal receivingthe action which it denotes. so used. so or verbs are either essentially occasionally "to rain"; Verbs essentially impersonal are: pigvere, avvenire, "to happen"; bisognare, to be necessary", exist.1

which

An

"

etc.

often used

Verbs

impersonallyare: convenire, "to appear"; bastare, "to

be

fitting";parere, enough", etc.; also "ssere and fare: Piove? No, n"vica. Is it raining? No, molto. It was Faceva caldo i"ri e tonava and it thundered Le

Pare

seems

|)meglio

cosi.

The

It is better

defective verbs

*

sia

the author

(ExercisesXXXII, 1

are

snowing.

warm

day yester-

you like this

Do

che V autore

though

as

be

great deal.

piacequesto po"ma?

Punto.

It

a

it is

"to

uno

were

a

poem? stupido. Not

at all.

blockhead.

thus.

XXXIII,

included

in the

and

XXXIV.)

list, alphabetical p.

198.

GRAMMAR

ITALIAN

124

fra

contro,1against. dopo, after.

toward.

of di before

usage

dopo

venuti

|)rimasto Mia

senza

without

go

me.

They

danaro.

He

II loro astio

:

it after dinner.

after

came

me.

without

was

di

senza

money.

My

me.

daughter

me.

tanto

era

Their

Raimondo.

andare

pu"

figlianon

cannot

di

is not

personal pronoun

a

obligatorywith fra (tra)and verso I shall do Lo far$ dopo pranzo. Sono

without.

senza, verso,

(a) The

between.

(tra),among,

acre

wrath

lei quanto

contro

di

as

fierce

was

against

contro

her

as

against Raymond. noi

Fra

But:

or

fra di noi,

a:

accanto,2 ) \ ,

.

,

attraverso, across.

.

beside,

near.

avanti

accgsto, )

addgsso,3 upon

davanti, ) \ before. dinanzi, )

(111mezzo),

m"zzo

the

m

dintorno

(of).

midst

near,

fino,4until, as far

Takes

3

Also

also di.

seen

the

Used

Ha also

far

him

top".

Used

adverb.

an

as:

as

as.

186.

2

go

(of time).

entro, within

beside.

attorno, around.

4

around. (intorno),

dirimpetto, opposite.

appetto, facing,opposite. appresso,

.

.

-.

,.

.

.

.

front

according (to). ,

,. _

.

...

(davanti), m

conforme,

allato,beside.

^f.

'

J

(of).

(one'sback),

about.

a

or

usuallyfollowed

followingprepositionsare

184. The

lui

Verso

him".

v"rsodilui,"toward

by

us";

"among

with

da

and

with

Florence"; Non since yesterday";

as

has

f"bbre addpsso, "he

where

idioms

in many

in:

be translated,

it cannot

fever".

Andrg

1' ho

visto

Vado

fino

fino

fino

in

da

a

Fir^nze, i"ri,"I

cima, "I

am

"he

have

will not

going

to

PREPOSITIONS.

innanzi, before.

[around,inquanto,

incirca in

(or circa), about, faccia,opposite.

in in

in

fondo, in the

INFINITIVES.

DEPENDENT

) -

at the

end, bottom, ras^nte,close (to,by), midst. vicino,near (by).

185. The are

a

causa,

)

a

motivo,

" on

a

ragione,)

prepositional

la, on

(of).1

account

the

side

other

ing.

(of).

in spite (of). dispetto,

a

favore,in

the

a

by fcjrza,

means

favor

the

ad onore,

in honor

cambio,

in

in

luogo,\

instead

invece,

(of),with

per

much. alP

186.

The

exchange. (of)

j by

m"zzo,

(of).

means

a

outside (of). infugri,

following take either personalpronoun2:

di, di preferably

or

a

(contra),against. dentro, within.

pre,sso, near,

behind. di"tro,

sopra,

in m"zzo,

sotto, beneath.

contro

la, that

oltre,beyond, besides.

in the midst.

187. The

followingtake

da

da

or

giu, down.

di:

.

lungi,

by

this side.

lontano, ) ,

(b) Giu,

''down'

per,

1

It will be

2

Cf. 183.

"

r

far.

)

also "up", may especiallyif they are preceded by

observed

and

by.

above.

di qua,

followingtake

close

:

side.

(a) The

owed

(of).

prima, before.

fuqrior

di

(of).

spite (of).

in .

(of).

foot

appi",at

ad onta, in

al di qua, this side

notwithstand-

malgrado,

a

(of).

before

occasionallya.

con,

followingprepositionsand usuallyfollowed by di :

locutions

a

regard (to).

in

riguardo, risp"tto, )

(a) Insi"me,"together ",usuallytakes

al di

125

that

many

su,

of these

take

"of"

in

fol-

be di

:

English.

126

ITALIAN

Correvano

giu

per la

GRAMMAR.

They

scesa.

running

were

down

the

slope. Egli ha preso

di

su

la collina.

per

He

taken

has

the

hill up-

road.

Prepositionsregularlyprecede the word erned. govThe simple prepositionsare usually repeated before each of several substantives governed1: II padre di Giovanni e di Giuseppe. The father of John 1

88.

and

Joseph.

Carico

d* anni

e

dJ onori.

Loaded

Idiomatic

years

and

honors.

Distinctions.

of

prepositionsis in idiomatic. It can be thoroughly all languages most learned only by careful observation and long practice. different renderingsfor The followingparagraphs show the commoner English prepositions. 189. The

usage

meaning

About.

190.

(1) In the dintorno

of "around"

sense

attorn

=

o

a, intorno

a,

a:

Andava

solo

alia

attorno

chi"sa.

He

went

alone

about

church.

the

(2) In the A

of

sense

di lui.

Parlavamo

the

"concerning"

We

che C9sa pensa?

(3) In a

and

with

were

What

of

sense

are '

=

di, a:

talking about him. thinking about you

approximately "=

?

circa, pr"sso

pQco, su, in su, da: V*

"'ranocirca

hundred Che

it?

due

ce,ntougmini. There

were

about

two

men.

ora

About

"?

Sono

le undid

pr^sso

eleven. 1

Cf.

46.

a

poco.

What

time

is

Verra

sul

Aveva

in tasca

fare

del

giorno.

da

ottoc"nto

lire in his

hundred

will

He

lire.

about

come

He

127

had

break. dayeight

about

pocket.

After.

191.

(1) Denoting place and dopo Paltro.

Uno

tre o,re.

Dopo Chi

INFINITIVES.

DEPENDENT

PREPOSITIONS.

di

Dopo After

with

three

di me?

dopo, dopo di:

=

the

other.

hours. will

Who

esitato

aver

me?

hai?

Che

"

time

long

a

after

come

lungamente

hesitated

having

wrong

after

One

After

dopo

verra

time

domandg. What

asked:

he

is

you?

(2) In the

of

sense

Alia mo, da di Francia. Secondo

to"

"according After

l'uso ordinario.

After

fashion.

French

the

the

secondo:

=a,

ordinary

custom.

Unclassified:

(3) Di

giorno in giorno. Day

In

somma

after

(infine). After

day.

all.

At.

192.

(1) Denoting time

Ven*9 alle die,ci.I fine !

Alia

5 m9rto

At

in

less often

a,

=

shall

at

come

in: o'clock.

ten

last ! di venti

eta

anni.

He

died

at

the

age

of

twenty.

(2) Denoting place A

(or in)

La

figtta"

(3) Sta the

In the dalla

house

sense

of "at

Signora

Stardi.

of Mrs.

Ci

fleet is at

He

dell*

onor

is

sea.

of

the house

"

=da:

living (or staying)

at

:

ragione di die,ci per ce,nto. va

house.

our

S.

(4) Unclassified A

At

The

mare.

in:

a,

ngstra.

casa

in

=

mio.

My

At

honor

the

rate

of ten

is at stake.

per

cent.

128

ITALIAN

Because

193.

A

of.

della

causa

di:

di, per motivo

causa

a

=

GRAMMAR.

stanchezza.

sua

of her

Because

fatigue.

Before.

194.

time

(1) Denoting nanzi

innanzi

di,

prima

=

(a),

di-

a:

prima di me. Innanzi quel tempo,

He

Parti

left before innanzi

or

me.

quel tempo.

a

Before

time.

that

Dinanzi

a

fur cgse create.

non

me

Before

me

was

ing noth-

created.

(2) Denoting place Davanti the

davanti, dinanzi:

=

{or dinanzi) al giudice. of the

presence

scolare

di

=

ferito di

It

per te,rra. He

is

grande metri

la

He

measure

di due

=

pupil was

fatto da

manner

I did

traveling by seized

lui.

di notte.

sword.

him

land.

by his clothes.

meters

two

by four.

da

:

it

by myself.

I

=accanto

was

feet.

a:

sittingbeside

(6) Unclassified: giorno e

a

di, su:

of '"beside" a

by

by post.

came

Two =

me.

(5) In the sense |)raseduto accanto Di

ished pun-

etc. =per:

pie,di.Bigger by

quattro.

su

(4) Denoting L' ho

The

wounded

was

means,

pel vestito. afferr^

Due

He

posta.

per

(3) Denot'ng Piu

in

da:

=

:

spada.

una

(2) Denoting way, Viaggia

passive

teacher,

(a) Or descriptive

|)venuta

a

punito dal maestro.

venne

by the

Lo

judge,

judge.

(1) Denoting the agent after

Fu

the

By.

195.

Lo

Before

By day

and

by night.

him.

Lo

him

I know

di vista.

conosco

INFINITIVES.

DEPENDENT

PREPOSITIONS.

by sight.

vglta. Two by two. it by heart. Learn Imparatelo a mente. Mugiono a migliaia. They are dying by

A due

per

capelli.

al color dei

riconosco

La

129

I know

thousands.

her

the color

by

hair.

of her

196. For.

(1) In the

of", "on

of "instead

sense

of"

account

=

per:

I

fatto per

L'

hQ

L'

ho,preso per

it for you.

I did

l"i.

for his brother.

him

I took

frate.Ho.

suo

for you. Here is one per voi. IJcconeuno We start for Pisa. must Bisogna partireper Pisa. li serbo per me. I keep my I mi"i consigli counsel, own keep my opinions to myself. da: (2) Denoting duration of past time =

Dimora

for many

Rome Li

da

cercava

for three

"

or

for"

tre mesi.

is often

He

living in

been

looking

been

has

Pistoia

for

s"i anni.

Durante

Restera

of present time

for

a

Pistoia per

a

couple of days.

them

paio

un

di

durante :

giorni. G.

six years.

For

quattro mesi.

per,

=

at all in Italian

rendered

not

"ra andato to

gone

197.

has

months.

Gemmati had

He

years.

(3) Denoting duration "

anni.

molti

da

Roma

a

He

will remain

for four months.

From. '

(1) Denoting separation da, di1: from Paris. V"ngo da Parigi. I come =

Partii subito di

I left home

casa.

(2) Denoting the time 1

The

Remark

separation is 2.

more

from

at

which

once. =

fin da:

forcibly expressed by

da.

Cf.

213,

da

Fin

quel momento spoke no more

he

(3) Denoting 198. In,

5

From

that

ment mo-

of it.

=di:

cause

is

She

sufferingfrom

neuralgia.

into.

(1) Denoting time in

Avenne

parlgpiu.

ne

non

Soffre di nevralgia.

*

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

130

It

marzo.

andato

in campagna.

Mettetevelo

in tasca.

(2) In the

place

or

in:

=

happened He Put

in March.

it in your

of "within"

in

giorni. They

will

sense

into the

has gone

country.

pocket.

speaking of

time

=

fra: fra due

Verranno

in two

come

also (3) Denoting place after a superlative, of day (morning, afternoon, etc.)=di: It is the most |)il piu b"lpaese del mondo. in the

country

IJranole

days.

the time

beautiful

world.

tre del

dopopranzo.

It

(4) In description di : IJranovestite di bianco. They

in the

three

was

noon. after-

=

(5) Unclassified: Is he |)a casa? Avanti!

Come

]Jraci"coda

in white.

in?

in!

un

colla

Stava

dressed

were

(Jcchio.He

spada

alia

blind

was

He

mano.

in

one

eye.

stood

sword

in

hand.

Of.

199.

(i)=di: Alcuni

|)un

di loro

ugmo

sono

d*

degP ingrati.

ingegno.

He

is

a

Some

man

of them

are

grateful. un-

of talent.

(2) Unclassified: II cugre

anni.

My

mi heart

batteva beat

come

like that

ad of

un a

ragazzo

di

lad of fifteen.

quindici

ITALIAN

132

Till,

203.

until.

fino a, sino

=

GRAMMAR.

a:

star"fino a domani to-morrow evening. Vi

alia

there

stay

until

To.

204.

(1) Denoting the vowel) :

I19dato ad un (2) Denoting

object

often have

They

|)caduto in t"rra. It has (3) In the sense of "to

it to

I gave

of motion

the end

(ad before

a

=

amico.

in1 Francia.

andati

Sono

indirect

mio

L'

=

I shall

sera.

fallen

to

in

the house

of

:

France.

to

gone the

friend.

a

=

a

ground. "

or

to

a

person

da: Sono

andati dal

(4) In the Con God

Dio

verso

have

gone

to

=ve,rso:

vgrso gliugmini. With

e

Mr.B.'s.

love

to

man.

(5) In

the

Dissi fra

of

sense

"

within"

I said to

me.

=fra:

myself.

Towards.

205.

Cf. 204

verso.

=

They

of "towards"

sense

amore

and

Signor Bardi.

Under,

206.

(4).

underneath.

sotto, di sotto:

=

|)sotto

la tavola.

Guardate

di voi.

sotto

Cf. 186.

With.

207.

(1) In the

of

sense

"along with

"=

con

or

insifme

con2: Vanno

noi,

con

Vanno

or

going with us. (2 ) Denoting instrumentality =

1

of

a 2

In

is

so

city: Or

used Sono

insieme

before andati

a.

the a

name

Parigi.

Cf. 184

(a).

noi.2

insie,me con

of

a

con

They

are

:

country,

never

before

that

fatto

L' ha

con

INFINITIVES.

DEPENDENT

PREPOSITIONS.

semplice matita.

una

did

He

133

it with

an

ordinary pencil.

(3) Descriptive =

canuti. (dai,coi)capelli pugnale del manico b"llo.

suo

Cammina

(4)

The

gray-haired

With

man.

his dagger with

handle.

beautiful

the

con:

ai

L' uo,mo Col

da, di, or

a,

chino.

a

capo

In the

sense

of

'at 1

da

molti anni

Dimorava

He

with

walks

the house noi.

He

bowed

of",

lived

head.

etc. =da:

many

years

with

death.

with

us.

(5) "With" Fu

punito

Piangeva

He

punished

was

"on

of "from", and

of verbs

di rabbia.

She

was

di molti talenti.

dotato

"

:

=

sense

number

a

specificationdi

di mgrte.

In the

(6) after

of

He

of", and

account

adjectives=di: weeping is

with

rage.

endowed

with

many

talents.

(7) Unclassified: Che fece delle f^rbici? What

did

she

do

with

the

scissors ?

Within.

208.

(1)

In the di

Dentro

(di,a) :

dentro

=

me.

"

al mio

Dentro

fra

'inside of"

Within

me.

"

(2 )

of

sense

In the

Within

cuo,re.

sense

of

' '

between

heart.

my "

"in the

course

of

"

,

(tra),dentro:

Fra2 Fra 209.

(or dentro a) queste tre

giorni. Within

mura.

three

Within

these

days.

Without.

of "outside of" =fu9ri (1) In the sense Without the walls. Fugri delle mura. (2) Denoting deprivation=senza: *Cf. 213.

"Cf.

204

di:

(5).

walls.

=

ITALIAN

134

di

l'assistenza

Senza

GRAMMAR.

Without

nessuno.

the

assistance

of

anybody. of

Use

Since

210.

used, and

English their

di,and

is used

in

generalto where

there

is

idea of direction

an

express

such

no

notion

in

It is used:

English.

indicate

(i) To

the

the action

Datemelo

(2)

prepositionsoftenest

is necessary.

towards, often

Fammi

the

are

they are often used where they have in equivalent,specialinstruction concerning

no

A

which

da

da.

since

use

211.

a,

di, and

a,

a

is

questo favore

after verbs

object,

it to

to

or

for

a

me.

Do

me.

this favor.

me

infinitive after verbs

an

that

"

performed:

Give

me.

Before

indirect

of motion,

also

of

pelling, accustoming, attaining,beginning,comcontinuing,hastening,helping,learning,preparing, and teaching. All these verbs tion direcexpress towards some goal. A in this case renders English

"to"

"and":

or

Andiamo M'

vederlo.

a

"ra abituato

Let

us

and

go

ad andarvi.

I

was

him.

see

in the

habit

of

going

there.

Cominciarono

a

parlarne. They began

Seguitava a seccarmi. I piccini imparavano

(3)

towards,

mio

a

on

scrivere.

boring The

me.

children

were

frat"lloa l"'ggere.I

am

teaching

my

read.

to

In

a

went

of it.

write.

learningto Insegno brother

He

speak

to

general

after

verbs

which

as:

Avvicinati

a

me.

Come

near

me.

imply direction

Si

appgggiaal

He

muro.

after especially

And

abituarsi,to self

is

the

to pensare,1

domandare, a

sopravvivere,to outlive. to etc.). toccare,1to concern, [cards,

al

Parliamo

a a

padrone.

Ask

Oggi tocca (4) Before

Think

loro.

a

the Let

quell'ugmo.

noi.

to

(games,

play

to

Domandi

Pensate

or

son). per-

ask, demand

to

person,

giuocare,

be

(a

to reflect. riflgttere,

(to). of

of

think

addicted

become

to

wall

leaningagainst the

parlare,to speak.

one's

accustom

135

verbs:

(to).

darsi,

INFINITIVES.

DEPENDENT

PREPOSITIONS.

of

the

fall

lot of.

master. us

speak

to

that

man.

us.

It is their turn

to-day.

followingadjectives(which, it will observed, express also in English the relation "to" "for"): the

inclinato,inclined.

attgnto,attentive. atto,

necessario, necessary.

accustomed.

awezzo,

bugno

(in

"able". caro,

inferiore,inferior.

apt, fit. the

Cf.

of

sense

82, Remark).

nocevole,

)

nocivo,

)

harmful.

ngto, known.

dear.

conforme, like,conformable.

odioso, hateful.

contrario,contrary, inimical.

pericoloso,dangerous.

convenient,

conveniente,

preparato, prepared.

[ing. corrispondente, corresponddannoso, prejudicial. disposto,disposed. eguale,equal.

pronto, ready.

fedele, faithful.

utile,useful.

grato, pleasing.

vicino,near.

suitable.

1

Only

when

proporzionato,proportioned.

prgprio, proper,

peculiar.

simile, similar.

superiore,superior.

the verb

has

this

sense.

136

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

(5) After of

followed

noun

a

limiting

or

material, in which

another

by

first (but

the

indicative

not

used,

di is

case

tive descrip-

noun

purpose,

or

212,

of

expressed by da, 213). form in English a compound Usually the two nouns is

which

noun:

barca

Una

vela.

a

A

sailboat.

"

lumaca.

Una

scala

Uno

a sgab"llo

Una

macchina

(6) In

a

L"ggeread Averselo A

pi"di. A three-legged

tre

steam-engine. of idioms, such as:

alta

At

potere Di

212.

in

expresses

It is used

indicate

to

a

thing ill.

first. di.

meno

a

aloud.

read

take

To

prima giunta.

Non

To

voce.

male.

a

stool.

A

vapore.

a

number

a

winding stairway.

A

Not

help.

of

possession. possessing,also some

general a

the

able to

be

to

sense

person

qualitypossessed,as the material of its origin,nationality,or is made,

which other

article

an

istic character-

:

La

del mio

casa

amico.

My friend's house. gold ring ( ring of gold).

an"llo d* gro. A di Sciampagna. Vino Un

L' ambasciatore

(a) The is also

Un Una Un

of

sense

by

a

di

second

bambino

La

strada

Un

maestro

di

wine

=

Swiss a

from

pagne). Cham-

ambassador.

qualitypossessed,

where

the first

noun

:

A

The

scugla.

kilogram

of butter.

of tea.

cup

cinque anni.

di Roma. di

A

The

cases

di burro.

t|.

(

of description,

in many

chilogramma tazza

Champagne

di Svizzera.

expressed

modified

=

A

road

A to

child of five years. Rome.

schoolmaster.

is

DEPENDENT

PREPOSITIONS.

di

Male Col the

(1) Before

used

(2) and

211

that some

Italians

the

padre the

cases

C"rto,fingo di

ciate.

a

all'

indipende,nza. He of

state

di may

in

(2) After the followingverbs

:

quale

saperlo,

mezzan^tte.

a

midnight.

at

be omitted

saper

non

independence.

di scrivere

stopped writing

sapete, o fingetenon

Non

to

smetteva

his father

except those

214:

Italiani

gV

richiamare

sought to recall Sapeva che suo In

dagger with

:

infinitive after all verbs

an

under specified

Cerc9 di

his

be,llo. With

handle.

beautiful

(a)

del manico

pugnale

suo

knew

137

te,sta. Headache.

It is further

He

INFINITIVES.

voi n.i las-

stato

so,.1

ma

less

(and others

mon) com-

:

abbisognare, j avere bisogno, ) abbondare, abusare, ill use

to

have

to

need

to abound

(of). (in).

abuse, make

an

fun

burlarsi,to make

congratularsi,to on

contentarsi, to

(of).

late congratu-

something). one's

content

self

(with). divertirsi,to self

upon

one's self. inform

informarsi, to self

one's

(of).

int"ndersi,to

(of).

(one

take

to

incaricarsi,

skill

have

understand,

(in).

lagnarsi,

) to

lamentarsi,

}

complain (of). wonder

maravigliarsi, to (at).

one's

amuse

occuparsi,to self

(with).

dubitare,to doubt to trust, fidarsi,

(of). have

dence confi-

(with).

to repent (of). pentirsi, to profit(by). profittare, to ricordarsi,

(in).

impadronirsi,to (of). 1

take

session ridere, to posto ridersi,

Goldoni,

II Vero

one's

occupy

Amico,

remember.

laugh (at). make

11,3.

fun

(of).

138

ITALIAN

(3) After

adjectives,such

many

abbondante,

(in). ammalato, ill.

capace,1capable (of).

ricco,rich (in).

"

soddisfatto,satisfied (with). vestito,clothed (with).

(of).

degno, worthy

(with).

(of).

vugto, empty.

fecondo, fruitful.

etc.

(4) To express dei fiori. "

(with).

pi"no,full (of). (of), ptjvero, (in). poor

avido, greedy, desirous

Ho

contented

pago,

contento, contented

as:

meritevole, deserving.

rich

abundant,

certo,1certain

GRAMMAR.

the

partitivesense

I have

(cf

47

.

and

48) :

flowers.

some

"

(5) In comparisons (cf.126) : Mi

piace questo vino piu dell' altro.

than

the

and",facendo del s^lito.He bow

than

(6) Before a Quel benedett*

un d"jnAbbondio went making away,

inclino

a

Don

A.

men

pro-

less profound

a

usual.

in

noun

apposition: del

uomo

signor

curato!

That

blessed

!

curate

(7) In Di

ter bet-

other.

Se n' fondo

I like this wine

many

adverbial

expressions,such

Di

ngtte. At night. In Springprimavera.

Di

vista. Da

213.

expresses

Dire

di si, di 119.

yes,

By sight, [time.

as:

To

say

no.

etc.

denotes

It also (a) the agency by which. in general (b) a sense of removal, of ration sepa-

from:

(a)

by

|)una

macchina

fatta da lui.

It is

a

machine

him. Essa

" lodata da tutti. 1

Also

She

is

praised by

incapace, incejrto.

every

one.

made

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

140

Camille

Camelia?

da

la Duse

veduto

Ha

Have

Duse

seen

you

as

?

Egli ti fara

da

He

padre.

will be

father to you.

a

adjectivesof separation,deprivation,and

(/) With

the like,as1:

ali"no,foreign,averse.

indipendente, independent.

distante,distant. diverso,different.

lontano, far,remote.

Dependent The

214.

followingverbs

Infinitives.

rule

i.e.,English "to" directly,

is not

ardire,to

parere,

dare.

bastare,to

suffice.

bisognare,to

need.

convenire, to

be

desiderare,to dovere, to

"ssere

be

called

ought,

necessary.

dare.

know.

to

sentire,to feel,hear. vedere, to

) to be need-

see.

volere,to wish.

ful.

udire, to hear.2

observed

that

auxiliaries

modal

seem.

potere, to be able.

lasciare,to let, allow. It will be

to be

to

sapere,

must,

mesti"ri, )

to appear,

osare,

suitable.

d* ugpo, "'ssere

be translated:

to

occorrere,

desire.

owe,

infinitive

dependent

a

of these

most

in the

wider

verbs

might

sense

of the

term. farlo subito.

Bisogna necessary

to

N9, non

do

it at

conviene

Desidera

It must

done

be

at

it is

once,

once.

farlo.

No, it is

partireade^sso? Do

partire alia N9, vcjglio

sera.

not

you

desire

No,

I

want

to

do it.

to

proper go to

now? go

in

the

evening. 1

Cf.

(b) above.

2Bramare, rule

the

"to

long for", and dubitare, "to infinitive directly.

doubt",

also

times some-

I bambini

non

alle

venire S119I

s"i.

After

verbs

under

211

215.

by

(b) "to" in denoting duty

the or

(212 (1)),except: ing to", i.e.,denot-

order

"something to", da2: necessity,which arrivare

per

in

time.

good

scendere

through, courtyards V^ngano tutti,non

salire,lunghi corridoi

e

nothing

is

the

Quello has

m'

Non a

burden

da pr^mere

ha to

affair of

an

Stare

or

passed

be

to

all of

Come,

you!

of !

il tramonto.

We

waiting

were

he

time.

short

a

What

tempo.

vita.

la mia

My

life need

not

be

me.

given ! 3 Io glidava 1

temere!

fare " cgsa di poco

da

ha

che

Quanti conti be

stairs to

were

sunset.

do is

to

afraid

per vedere

Aspettavamo see

c' " da

be

to

da

crossed.

be

to

leave

I must

t"mpo.

a

There percorrere, cortili da attraversare. and ascended, long corridors be descended

There

also "to'

=

da

scale

"rano

infinitive

an

of

sense

to arrive

in order

di

tioned men-

per1;

=

D"vo partiresubito once

by

of "in

sense

others

before

it.

known

have

to

those

and

otherwise

a,

which

purpose,

to

children

The

at six.

comes

ought

of motion

in the

"to"

usually

(2), English "to"

is to be rendered

(a)

He

saperlo. We

dovuto

Avremmo

C

discorrere.

ancora

sanno

141

yet talk.

cannot

at

INFINITIVES.

DEPENDENT

PREPOSITIONS.

I gave

da bere.

per

"ssere

It is evident

r^ndere!

da

s' ha

=

"to

after

that

a

be

about

How

him

to

of motion

verb

accounts

many

something do

to

anything". either

a

or

must

drink.

Cf. 81

per may

(a).

often

used.

be 2

Cf

avere

da

" =

to have

to

3

This

construction

" ,

.

is often

84 (b) .

best

translated

by

an

English

sive. pas-

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

142

qualche 095a you anything

Ha Have

Yes, I

do?

to

after

prepositionplaced meaning:

A

216.

its

assistere,to aid; assistere a, to

cercare,

seek;

di,to seek after.

cercare

giocare,to play; giocarea, pensare, to think; pensare

to

play

to

of

of (a

person); pen-

XIV.

the

Following are

AND

0,

che, that.

ma,

come,

per

as.

.

ne, neither

.

e, both

(ne

.

.

.

.

.

TENSES.

simple conjunctions:

anche, also.2

.

XXXVI.)

MOODS

CONJUNCTIONS,

of, etc.

be the turn

and

CHAPTER

(e

(a game).

at

think

a, to

(ExercisesXXXV

2

ask

a, to

a, to

toccare

toccare, to touch;

..

person).1 (a person);

believe in (a

reflect.

su, to

e, and

fies modi-

often

verb

a

to do.

di, to ask after (a person).

domandare

217.

great deal

a

be present at.

to

credere,to believe; credere a, domandare, to ask; domandare

sare

have

fare.

da

Si, ho. moltissimo

fare?

da

and),

.n", neither

or

(0 )

.

.

.

0, either

.

.

.

or).

,

but.

$,

pure, yet. se,

if,whether.

.nor). 18.

Following are

the

credere in Dio, in

Cristo.

principalsecondary conjunctions, also words sometimes times conjunctions and somerelative adverbs and conjunctionallocutions:

1

But

2

Anche, che, also

before

e

and

i.

nemmeno

and

neppure

elide

the

final vowel

CONJUNCTIONS,

after,1dopo

che

MOODS

(dop chfc),

P9sciache. che, benche,

; as

as

as

more

.

so

soloche.

.

spiteof

as, cosi

.

.

in order that, accioche, affin-

che, affine di, perche.

.

.

as, tanto

fact that, mal-

the

grado che.

sebb"ne.

...

for,in quanto if, come se,

as

in

tale, tanto quale .quanto,etc. (Cf. 121.)

come,

the

only,

stante

non

che, quantunque,

...

if

J43

incase,caso,incaso,casomai.

although, ancorche, avvegna

as,2 siccome

TENSES.

AND

nulladimeno, tuttavia, ci^

piu che.

a.

nondimeno,

nevertheless, ostante.

non nor.

comecche,

.

.

either,nemmeno,

nep-

pure.

quasi. long as, tanto, tantoche,

notwithstanding that, nonostante che, malgrado che.

fin tanto.

on

zione

because, perche, perciocche. but

but

rather,

indeed,

bensi. even,

even,

quando

anche.

except, salvo

ecc"tto che except that,

non

che.

given that, granted

that,

dato che, semprechfe.

quanto, quantunque,

per

provided that, purche. rather, anzi, anzi che. che. than, piuttosto

since

(causal),giacche,poi-

(temporal),dacche. so, so then, adunque, so, and dunque. che, sicch^.3 so that, di modo supposing that, posto che, supposto che.

tuttavia.

than, che, di.4

if,se, quando. 1

ossia.

since

for, che.

however,

condi-

che.

non. se

a

else,ossia.

rather

che, fuorche,

that,

che, a patto che.

or, ovvero, or

anche, anzi, pure. if,anche se, ancorche,

condition

English equivalent is placed first to facilitate reference. For "as" "while", "as" ="since", cf. "while", "since". le In other "as" =" that Fece which": cases quel che la madre She did as her mother bade her. comand9. The

2

=

3

Cf. also "in order

4

Cf. 126.

that"

above.

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

144

perci9,

dunque,

therefore,

ancorche,

benche,

quantunque. unless, 7

che

che,

meno

a

che, infino

a

whence,

quindi. though,

"

"

*

whereas,

considerando

whether,

se,

che.

sia, sia che. che.

mentre

"

che,

ecettuato

non,

a.

!o che.

per

while, whilst,

meno

a

sino

until, finche, finche non,

is, cio".

che; that

that

se

yet, nulladimeno,pure,

perg.

non. m

following

The

219.

by the indicative

subjunctive,sometimes anche

"

"

che,

appena di modo

soon

as

che,

as.

that.

so

following are (cf. 232 (5)): .

,

order

}"m

.

,

che,

,

provided

che non,

ancorche,

unless. if.

even

che,

patto

condition

on

that.

che, before. che, )

awegna

",

'

(che), in

dato

se,

if.

,

che non,

non,

that.

unless.

until.

"

standing

,.

'

;

order

^

that.

that.

posto che, supposing that.

prima che, before. purche, provided that. if. quandanche, even quasi, as

although.

if.

sebbene, although.

senza

che, granted

eccetto

finche

as

notwith-

che, I

ostante

sempreche,

case.

)

che,

quantunque,

alth0Ugh bencS, J"

come

-

-

perche, in

that.

as.

junctive by the sub-

followed

,

non

.

caso

soon

as.

*

V

condizione

meno

long

as

malgrado

that.

'

'

avanti

r

)

,,

a

i

always

The

arnnche,

a

se,

"

accioche,

a

)

7

220.

_

quando,

tostoche, as

finche, until. "

(cf.233) :

*

tantoche,

after.

dopoche,

the

by

onde, wherefore.

if.

se, 7 even

followed

sometimes

are

provided.

che, except.

soloche,

if

only,

provided

that.

supposto che, supposing that.

MOODS

MOODS

AND The

TENSES.

verbal

a

be

good Mi

II

secca

ol

non

(a)

made

in

(b) with

other

after

one's

is

noun

with

not

ing hav-

usually

to

participle.Cf. with

pnjpriorischio

a

To

begin

the

be

222.

infinitive

di,

pericolo,una

e

is to

unbeaten

peril,an

di venire.

dove,

then

may

the

point out,

road,

be used

instead

words

them

with

orms

writes

He

after

infinitive

cept, which

road

a

at

that

coming.

che, chi, come, substantive

one as

of

the

object of

cona

verb,

:

Non to

His

me

prepositionsdi, dopo di, invece

da battersi.

risk and

c) The

etc.

e

invece

Scrive

donde,

She bores

beaten.

be

must

Reading

(Cf. 45 (4)). It is also usually

" mostrare,

battuta own

time

same

senza:

Cominciare non

a

omitted

be

noun

the

prima di, and

as

the present

English by

any

omitted

used

article may

The

so

dove

to

(d) In the

same

nor

adjectiveor

ne

che

way

an

andare,

what

go

a

feel doubtful.

me

infinitive

The

the

dubitare.

fece

it

noun

gioventu.

ete,rnochiacchierare.

suo

chattering. eglirispostomi

aver

rendered

via

utile alia

a

governed by

at

mav

is useful to the young.

answered

as

it

books

ceaseless

her

As

noun.

article and

accompanied by an preposition,and as a verb rule an object: II l"'ggere dei buoni libri " may

145

Infinitive.

infinitive is

The

221.

TENSES.

AND

fare.

I do

not

know

where

do.

adverb

forms

infinitive one

after

concept:

" with

an

146

ITALIAN

5 meglio

It is better

dirlo.

non

GRAMMAR.

to

not

say

it

"not(i.e.,

to-say-itis better"). should

student

The instance

out

reason

the

presented.

cases

:

|)piu

facile criticare che far

than

do

to

It is easier to

meglio.

criticism is (i.e.,

better

better). Therefore

the

phrase

should

be

easier

The

Neither

222.

noun

and such

or

not:

rendered

in

present participlein -ante, -e,nte,

categoriesmay

(1) Where him

saw

the

ever

be used

as

a

noun.1

the

be

: distinguished is evidently a verb: participle

going to

the

city (

=

I

him.

saw

He

was

going

city).

In this

the

case

correspondingverbal

in -ando, -endo, is used: participle V hg visto andando alia citta. (Or alia

and

noun?

a

Three

to

doing

it is a verbal English present participlewhere be rendered must ing existby the only verbal noun in Italian, i.e.,by the infinitive (cf. above, 221 with regard 0 every (a)). The question occurs Is the participle English construction: reallya

verb

I

the

icise crit-

Participle.

in -ando, -endo, may

that

The

Present

than

ats above

|)piu facile di criticare che di far meglio. (e) An English infinitive is often to be Italian by the subjunctive. Cf. 232 (1).

nor

For

form, i.e.,the

L* ho visto che

andava

citta.)

(2)

Where

the

participleis apparently, but not In this case it is in a noun. reallyand necessarily, but English governed by a preposition, an attempt x

Cf.

become

in

and

nouns,

112.

but

The

they

-ante, -ente are

never

forms

verbs

used

where as

not

nouns.

adjectives

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

148

Participle.

Past

The

it follows a English past participlewhen verb of perceiving,also g'ssere, a transitive, especially tive. by the Italian infinifare, lasciare, is to be rendered An English passive infinitive is also rendered The

223.

and

infinitive after lasciare

by the active

often

after

the

prepositon da : L' hg sentito dire.

Lo

vidi

Hg

fatto fare

|)un

abito.

un

killed.

him

saw

I have

is

da temere. He ugmo si lasciano mai vedere.

Non be

I

ammazzare.

it said.

heard

I have

a

had

a

man

to

They

made.

coat

feared.

be

let themselves

never

seen.

cgsa " da fare? (a) The use of the

Credevo

done

passiveis avoided by using the infinitive

in Italian

cases

is to be

What

Che

ferito.

severamente

gsser

? 1

in many

other

:

I

I

thought

was

severely wounded.

protasis,relative clause, or the like, often, and elegantly,expressed in Italian by a present infinitive: or an a participle, past participle,

is

whole

A

224.

malata

Essgndo being

mia

ill (or: Since

Guardandolo it well he

madre

be

sure

gsser lui ugmo

Disse

is

mother

my

ill)I

of the

mother

come.

If he

looked

at

matter.

He

ricco.

My

cannot

sargbbe sicuro.

bgne, ne

would

pgsso venire.

non

said that

he

rich

a

was

man.

Vedutagli a

A

bottega.

him

into

Passata 1

The

Cf. 104

tale

the

disposizione,un

brother

shop

with

of his

is much

had

who

lo

tglse con

his

se

bent

took

appagherg piiidi

chiac-

seen

him.

questa settamana,

passive (a).

fratglsuo

less

non

m'

frequent

in Italian

than

in

English.

MOODS

Once

chiere.

myself

with

Dette

che

this

A

words lo

se

padre

he

longer

no

a

save

+

content

mendicante.

him

did not

who

man

he

as

of Past

From

his

beggar.

a

used

father

My

soon

away.

think

Rendering An

went

As

and$.

ne

"sser difficile salvar

diceva

salvarsi lui.

hard to

I shall

over

credergbbeun

would

one

appearance

voleva

is

"bbe queste parc-lese

vederlo

Mio

week

t

talk.

said these

had

TENSES.

AND

U91110 che

un

to

that

say

non

it

was

himself.

want

to

save

Tenses

in

Italian.

represented as unfinished and still continuingis often expressedby the present tense: long have you been here ? Quant* " che si"tequi ? How I have in Italia da s"imesi. in Italy about Sono been 225.

action

six months.

(a) A

vividlydescribed Aspettavo waited

un'

hour,

by the piu

ora more

or

0

use

in the

An

less,and

then

he

in the

An

I

came.

I

ancora.

se,mpre

when

he

action

past, but

took

place;

still

was

b"ne allora.

action

I

waiting for him. always slept well then.

The cagnino seguiva ordinariamente. usually followed. d alta voce quando egli entr^. I Leggevo

227.

:

eppoi "ccolo che viene.

meno,

11

aloud

more

action

10 1' aspettava

Dormivo

past is

of the present tense

representedas: (1) Incomplete; (2) Habitual; other past (3) Going on when some expressedby the imperfect tense :

226.

is

an

if finished

past action

little dog

was

ing read-

entered.

represented in

a

as

past either

having taken place recently or not yet

w ITALIAN

aitirelyelapsed,and is rendered Glien'

An

at

I have

Have

moment

a

indicated definitely

not

the past indefinite:

by

I19parlato.

ha viste?

Le

GRAMMAR.

spoken them

seen

you

him

to

it.

about

?

action

entirelypast, completed in the past, and which happened at a fixed time in the past, is rendered by the preterite.1This is the Italian narrative It is more used in books tense. formal public or address than in conversation or easy correspondence: 228.

Gli

parlaiun

Le vidi in Che

ottcjbre.I

be,lla gitafeci

excursion

(a) The made

be

indicated) your Si,ma

V

hq

the

What

ful delight-

a

of these

tenses

may

followingexamples:

ritrovata.

Have

Yes,

you

lost

(at a time

not

and

but

I found

it

again.

passata,e la ritrovai i"riV altro.

settimana

found

it

of all tenses

usage

go.

father!

my

in the usage

borsa ?

sua

I lost it last week

The

padre !

yesterday with

by

month

a

in October.

them mio

him

to

purse?

perdei la

La

spoke

saw

difference clearer

I

ieri con

I took

perduto la

Ha

fa.

mese

again day

is best

before

yesterday.

learned

careful

by

reading. The

229.

is used

future

The

Future

in Italian where

it is not

in

English2: (1) In dependent clauses

in which

in

present tense reallyexpresses futurity: Partir"domani se fara b"lte,mpo. I shall if the 1

t9sto che, "as 2

For

the

that soon

future

leave

row to-mor-

is fine.

weather

It follows

English the

the

preteritemust

as", and of

the

be

used

after appena

ch$,

like.

impending action, cf. 81 (a) and

215

(a).

TENSES.

AND

MOODS

la l"ttera, ve Quando avr" l^tto1

read the

letter I shall return

Remark. future

The

would

in

vividly (cf. 225

English

To

(2) Sara

I shall go

riccone.

Saranno

He

be

must

che

se,ianni

(3) Sometimes Padre and

"

where

action

an

the more

Germany.

to

a

He

meco.

rich

very

man.

have

must

been

with

imperative force:

with

madre

e

onorerai.

Thou

domattina.

You

shalt

dirai tutto

The

something else were (1) To express in statement

Conditional.

to

pendent denoting result dewould what (i.e., happen in case happen) is employed in Italian :

a

reserved

condition

on

wish, request,

or

I should

like to

there.

go

di dirmelo?

Would

sapre.i.Is

he at home

have

you

the

ness good-

tell me?

to

|)in

casa?

he may

Non

be, but

I cannot

tell

=

it

seems

me

I

ought

"

do

imperfect ind:cative

The we

to

should

future

comes

under

know

uncertainty: I

ought

I know

is

the

same

to

know

this

her?).

sometimes

expect the conditional

anterior

I do not

?

you).

(2) In a generalway to express questa signora. Dovr"i conoscere

The

a

way

:

Vorr"i andarvi. Avr"bbe la bonta

where

everything

me

conditional, besides

The

230.

(a)

tell

must

morning.

to-morrow

lady (

thy father

honor

mother.

thy

Mi

=

Italian

six years.

me

(

in

suppositionor uncertainty:

a

express

un

I have

you.

describe

to

When

(a)):

in Germania.

Vado

it to

render^.

is used

present

be

la

151

used

:

rule

as

the future.

ITALIAN

152

interrogava,glirispondeva di ng.

Se m'

I should

me

answered

have

conditional

(b) The

him

avr"bberopotuto from

distance

dal

distava

scala

had

is often

used

where

we

tense:

davanzale

bugn

un

attaccarvisi ?

How

could

Come

tratto.

ladder

The

window-sill.

the

asked

If he

no.

anterior

expect the simple

should La

GRAMMAR.

was

quite

a

they get hold

of it? i suginon avevan aprile, egli avre,bbe trovato V inv"rno, e pensato che in America His vestito da estate. 1' avevan family, putting him on board ship in Genoa at the end of April,had not reflected

Imbarcandolo

in America

that

suitablyfor

Gf'novasul

a

would

he

find

from

had

dressed

him

Imperative.

to express imperative is used as in English,i.e., command. The a missing persons are supplied the present subjunctive:

The

Non

lo faccia.

Che

non

Non

domandare

Do

(you) do it.

not

Let

paiano.

che

is necessary

what

winter, and

summer.

The 231.

finir d'

them

not

quelloche

appear.

ti " necessario.

only

for you.

imperfect subjunctive

(a) The

Ask

may

also

express

mand. com-

Cf. 232. The 232.

has

A

gone

verb

subordinate

(1) After

action

expressingan

before

It follows

Subjunctive.

as

that

the

clause. verbs

in

some

indicated

doubtful

way

by

is made

subjunctiveis usuallyfound It is used

ve express'

what

junctive. sub-

in

a

:

of

command,

consent,

TENSES.

AND

MOODS

153

denial,desire,fear, hearsay, hope, ignorance,necessity,

approval,disapproval,etc.),preference, opinion (belief, surprise,will,wonder, and the like: che

Desidero

Si dice che has

she

mi

Non

do

piace

him

to

come

soon.

that

say

England.

to

Vorr"i solamente believe me, only

to

I want

partitaper Inghilte.rra. They

sia

essa

gone

siibito.

v"nga

che

credessero.

mi

wish

that

facciano

che

they

I

them

want

believe

would I do

cosl.

only

me.

like them

not

to

so.

maraviglio che siate

Mi

che fossero partiti. I thought

Credevo Pensi

Bisogna che ci I should

of

out

(2)

wish

never

They

how

write

must

credeste ch* io avessi

che

gone. much

me.

scrivano.

vorrej.mai

sione.

they had

ci" mi affliggesse.Think

L"i quanto

this (must have) distressed

Non

surprisedthat

am

still here.

are

you

I

qui.

ancora

you

to think

us.

scritto

that

per

I had

pas-

written

passion.

expressionsof

In

Peccato

che

emotion

sia arrivato!

non

sentiment:

or

What

pity that

a

he

has

come!

not

!1

Volesse

Dio

Potessi

scoprir1'

grant it !

God

!l

arcano

Would

Could

to

I

but

God

!

discover

the

!

secret

is qualifiedby a comthe antecedent parative (3) When superlativeor by solo, unico, primo, or ultimo : |)la prima vo,ltache 1' abbia visto. It is the first time I have

that Tu

only

it. di cui pc;ssa fldarmi.

l'unico amico se,i friend

(4) 1

seen

After

in whom a

I

can

You

are

the

confide.

qualifyingor

restrictive relative clause '

:

called the ent independexample of what is sometimes in clause". or a subjunctive", "subjunctive principal

This

is

'

an

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

154 Cerco

(P

s"rvo che parliinglese. I

tin

looking

am

for

a

speak) English. Scelga un allgggiodov' Ella pgssa stare piu tranquillo. be quieter. Choose a dwelling where you can (a) Also after indefinite relatives such as chiunque, any such asqualwhosoever", and indefinite adjectives one", speaks (=

who

servant

can

"

"

"whatever":

unque,

vggliovederlo.

Chiunque sia,non I do

not

want

to

Whoever

he

be,

may

him.

see

(5) After the conjunctionsgiven tinder 220: he is. Andr" dovunque sia egli. I will go wherever Gli scriver" prima che parta. I shall write him before

he

leaves. Lo dico accioche that

know

they may

Quand'

sappiano la

ne

anche

the

truth

about

1*avessi detto.

non

it in order

I say

verita.

the matter. if I had

Even

not

said it.

conjunctionsgiven under 219 and in the question,Shall the indicative or other cases many the subjunctive be employed? is to be decided by the action is indicated not as or determining whether After

233.

the

*

doubtful Se

:

padre

studiera,suo will

father Se

Si da

that

suo

often

padre sar"bbeccont"nto.

he does

c"rto che

per

studies,his

not), his father would sia fatta.

la pace

If he would be

They

say

satisfied. for

tain cer-

is made.

peace

|)c"rto che

If he

satisfied.

be

studiasse

study (but

cont"nto.

sara

la pace

" fatta.

It is certain

that

peace

is

made.

|)la piu b"lladgnna 1

one

In

some

of these

cases

che io abbia mai

of so-called

conjunctions

sar"i contrario I should

alia not

sua

is understood:

with

Were

him.

he

She

is

(as far

principalclause" Fosse anche un magistrate) (=if he were) a magistrate

"subjunctive

opinione.

agree

vista. in

a

156

ITALIAN

gliattestati.

They

in to bestow

come

I should to

have

twelve

the

boys

to

certificates.

the

in lui

piu vggliad' imparare.

avesse

se

in him

confidence

more

for

waiting

were

fiducia

Avr"i piu

GRAMMAR.

if he

had

desire

more

learn.

(a) The

compound for the

laid down

reckoned

the

as

dubitato

Hg would

verb:

che v^ngano.

they

whether

either

past definite

the

present

is

past time

whether

by

pending imperfect subjunctive,deaction related in the secondary taking place in present or in

the

:

given us you

doubted

however, be followed

may,

represented as

Iddio ci ha dato la

come

had

the

or

whether

on

clause

I

come.

(6) The

And

doubted

I have

che venissero.

dubitato

they would

E

generalfollow the rules primary ones, the auxiliarybeing

come.

Aveva

has

in

tenses

ragione,affinche in order

reason

si vendicasse

know,

you

that

ce

we

ne

may

il Buondelmonte

have

heard

God

serviamo. make

use

of it.

lo avete

saputo.

B.

avenged

before, how

himself. and

(Exercises XXXVII

CHAPTER ADVERBS.

XV. AND

NUMERALS

XXXVIII.)

NUMERICAL

VALUES.

INTERJECTIONS. ADVERBS.

236. Adverbs of manner; and

be

distinguishedas: (1) Adverbs of place; (3) Adverbs of degree (2) Adverbs of comparison; (4) Adverbs of affirmation may

ADVERBS.

of

and

157

negation; (5) Adverbs

of time;

cal (6) Numeri-

adverbs. Adverbs 237.

Most

adverbs

by adding

of

of

Manner.

manner

formed

are

to the feminine1

-mente

from

jectives ad-

singular:

c"rto, certain; certamente, certainly. franco, frank; francamen'e, frankly. on"sto, honest;

honestly. sincere; sinceramente, sincerely. sinc"ro, onestamente,

(a) Adjectivesending in e2 when

by

those add

consonant

any

in

ending

1 and

except e

r

preceded by

1

that

e

is

preceded

simply add -mente and or r drop the e

;

-mente3:

felice,happy;

felicemente, happily.

fgrte, strong; fortemente, strongly. facile,easy;

facilmente, easily.

difficult ; dirncilmente, in difficile,

a

difficult manner,

with

difficulty. particolare,particular; particolarmente, particularly.

(6) Altrimenti,"otherwise "in

like manner"

(pari),are

guarimente, "(not) "

almost

"

parimenti

irregular,isolated forms, and "(not) long", quasimente,

much",

remarkable

"; are

(from altro-a),and

as

showing

-mente

added

to

an

adverb.

238. Other end

in

e

or

adverbs

of

fewer

manner,

in

number,

i:

b"ne, well. cosi,thus, in this

male, badly. volentie,ri, gladly.

manner.

etc. 1

Mens, mente,

being

2

Which

but

have

a

one

Latin

feminine.

termination

for

masculine

and

feminine.

Cf. 109. 3

Adjectives in mente, "softly".

-lie do

not

drop

the

e:

mplle, "soft";

molle-

158

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

used

as

in

ending

number

certain

A

(a)

o

reallyadjectives

are

l:

adverbs

pr"sto,quickly. subito,suddenly, at

alto,loud. basso, low.

once.

etc.

class of adverbs

Another

239.

suffix

of the

]Jcaduto

added (-oni),

-one

Andar

brancolone

Andar

carpone.

Star In

same

has

usually to

fallen

To

go

means

nouns:

grope

one's way.

all fours.

on

lean

by

his face.

on

To

(or tastone). To

gomitoni.

the

He

boccone.

is formed

on

one's

elbows.

way:

cavalcione,astride.

rotolone, rolling.

ginocchioni,kneeling.

sdrucciolone,slipping. etc.

a

gara, 6

locutions

Adverbial

240. '

as

common,

are

indarno, )

competing. F

.

m .".

:

vain,

.

.

a

malincugre,unwillingly,

a

vice,nda,by

turns.

adagio,slowly.

) in fretta,in haste. invano,

dubbio, doubtless.

senza

etc.

(a)

Such

locutions

are

the

also among

found

other

classes of adverbs: appena, di

quando time

di

as

to

soon

in

hardly. quahdo, from as,

time.

d'

ora

innanzi, henceforth.

fra poco, per

soon.

t"mpo, betimes, early.

sometimes. talvglta,

rado, seldom.

etc. 1

Some

adjectives from

formed

live

which

the

-mente

adverb

has

been

larly regu-

in certain pressions: exyet used in their adjective forms "to Parlar chiaro, "to felice, speak plainly"; Vivere are

happily".

ADVERBS.

Adverbs

The

241.

avanti

of Place.

of

principaladverbs

(avante), before

donde, )

place are:

ci, qua,

(also

cola,

there. ,

y where

dove,

qui, here.

vi, ivi, li, la, costa,

comein).

=

159

)

indi, quindi,

ne,

addietro,)

,

,

.

} behind.

....

d'

onde, di

la, thence.

,

mdi"tro, j

Ci, "here"

242. "

thence",

in

used

are

and

("there"), vi, "there",

speaking of the

when

never

idea

*

and

ne,

tioned placealready menof place is at all emphasized. positionwith regard a

They occupy the same elided like the to the verb, change their form, and are ci,vi,ne (cf.97 and 101). They conjunctivepronouns beginning with 1 or n, precede conjunctive pronouns otherwise they follow the conjunctive forms: Ce ne vi"ne. It comes there. to us from Ce n' " molto. Va alia citta? I

No,

(a)

N9, ne from

coming

am

"Here

"ccola, etc.

is

There

it

is",

idea

for

qua

from

spoken 1

the is used

"there".

place near

They

the

to

city?

"here

is",

she

etc.

="ccolo,

:

When

or

going

you

there.

Here

qui

Are

v"ngo.

IJccociarrivati. 243.

great deal of it.

a

both

of

are.

place

for "here",

In

the

we

general

person

the

all

emphasized

li, la, ivi, costa, costi,

costi

addressed, person

is at

and

indicate

costa

li and

speaking

la

and

a

a

mote place re-

the

person

to:

are

often

used

where

they would

in

English be superfluous.

160

ITALIAN

There a are great many " molti. dalla citta? Is he No, vi torn a.

Ven' Viene

No,

city?

Venite

is

he

qua.

li.

Andate

"

Go

that

moglie "

di la.

My

of them. from

coming

the

it.

returning to

Fatti in costa. Mia

GRAMMAR.

Come

here.

Go

"

way

(the

wife

is there

there.

you). (e.g.,in the near

way

next

room). Adverbs

The

244.

of

Degree and

Following are times

of

principaladverbs

come,1 phi, meno,2 di, and the

of

Comparison.

comparison

che.3 of

principaladverbs of quantity):

called adverbs

abbastanza, enough,

cosi,

are

degree (some

po,co, little.

sum-

quanto, how

ciently. alquanto,somewhat.

tanto,

assai, very.

trgppo,too much.4

so

much,

as

much.

much.

molto, much. etc.

Adverbs

The

245.

si, .

I "

v

gia,

of Affirmation

principaladverbs

and

Negation.

of affirmation

are:

davvero, indeed, truly, of yes.

)

course.

sicuro,yes indeed, of

(a)

Gia

in other

Pio,vea 2

Cf.

3Cf. 4

For

6

Gia

is used

cases

Pigve? "Cf.

5

Si.

in

si is

assentingto employed :

Is it

raining? It catinglle.Gia. "

a

self-evident

course,

truth ;

Yes. is

pouring. Quite "

true.

121. 122

and

125.

126.

molto, poco, quanto, tanto, trpppo, adj.,cf. 128.

gia

del monte.

sometimes The

sun

" =

was

almost":

almost

II sole

touching

toccava

the

gia gia

mountain

la

cima

peak.

ADVERBS.

246. The

not.

non,

of

negation are:

mai,

)

giammai,

v

non-mai,

)

principaladverbs

not.

119,no,

1

non-mica,

\

non-punto,

v

not

non-piu,

all.

at

6

1

never.

longer.

no

nignte affatto,)

(a) Ng is sometimes

placed after the noun is made negative:

is then which

denari

Ha

amici

ma

ng.

Saparlare, pensare

(b) Non the

ng.

It

non.

the

statement

of fact

but

friends.

He

has

money

He

can

talk, he

stands

then

non-mica, non-mai,

not

think.

cannot

In

between.

etc., the

stands

verb

locutions

the

between

the

members:

two Non

parla

Non

g mica

Non

lo

Non

"

dice

piu.

has

a

not

Lo

I

until I have

In

Cf. 235 2Cf. ="he

detto cosi.1

finche

value

non,

the

"until7',

credevo.

non

in

I have

che

se

che,

non

more

of

non

money

thought.

studiergfinche

Non

ha mai

negative

comparison,2 nor in "except that", etc.: Hg piu di denaro che than

nignte.

Non

tardi.

farg mai

(c) Non

3

or

of

sense

less always immediately precedes the verb1 unlatter is accompanied by a conjunctive pronoun,

which

1

in the

used

ha

ne

learned che

non

compound (a).

tense

127.

has

not

but

avrg imparato.

I shall

study it

it.

due.3

a

V

two".

He

the

has

only

two.

auxiliary is considered

the

verb.

l62

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

of T

Adverbs

of time

principaladverbs

The

247.

me.

are

:

quando,

when.

ora,

se,mpre,

always.

allora,then.

subito, at

dibu9n'ora,|

sometimes. talv9lta,

adesso, 3

y

now.

domani,

tardi,late.

J

per tempo,

once.

tgsto,soon.

to-morrow.

ultimo,

yesterday. i"ri, 9ggi,to-day.

prima,

last.

at

at first.1

etc.

of Adverbs.

Comparison

248. Adverbs

like

regularly compared

are

tives adjec-

(cf. 1 19-127) : fa cosi facilmente

Lo "

come

Lo

fa

piu

Lo

fa

meno

"

fa

Lo

facilmente.

piu

male

manco

di

me. "

compared irregularly: il meglio,2 best

meglio, better

benissimo,

) "

ottimamente,

male, badly

di tutti.

facilmente

"

followingare

bene, well

fa il

Lo

"

The

frate.Ho.

suo

facilmente.

a

249.

j

che

facilmente

fa molto

Lo

fratello.

suo

"

"

)

..

well

very J

il pfggio,worst

pfggio, worse

malissimo,

)

badly

pessimamente, { yery molto, much

(very)

il piu, most

piu, more

moltissimo, very ppco,

1

little

Che

is

visto che

meno,

adverb

an

faceva

ancpr

of

less

time

=

il meno,

) least,

pochissimo,

f very

in

quando I have

piu.caldo.

much

like:

sentences seen

little

it when

it

lo was

1' ho still

hotter. 2

Meglio

parve or

the

maniera

is

il meglio least or

adjective-noun

an o

il meno

bad". some

male, "this In

such

in such

fare

noun

alia

expressions as:

seemed

meglio

being

to him

it is

understood.

the

again

Questo gli best

an

course,

adjective,

164

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

another qualifyingan adjective, adverb, or a phrase usuallyprecedes it: due tre viaggiatori incontravano a o Rarissimamente

mediately.

cavallo.

They

travelers

on

Appena see

me

Essa

as

adverb

An

very

long intervals

two

trovarmi.

They

arrivati as

soon

venuti

sono

always

a

She

have

They

il ragazzo

to

came

Cardinal

cardinal

the boy.

Numerals.

numerals

are

it

older.

purposely.

piu fissamente.

s"mpre

fixedlyat

more

is somewhat

done

NUMERALS

The

three

they arrived.

fatto apposta.

Egli guardava

251.

or

horseback.

" alquanto piu attempata.

L' han

looked

at

met

:

He

165

NUMERALS.

If the

una.1

form:

etc., follows

uno,

the

precedes it,it

it

Ventuna Lire

is

by

weeks.

Twenty-one and

hundred

trent-

singular;if plural:

regularlymade

One

ventuno,

it is made

numeral,

settimana.

centuna.

modified

noun

liras.

one

(b) Millione, 'million", billione, 'billion", trillione, "trillion",etc.,

are

of number,

nouns

having

a

lar regu-

plural,millioni,billiori,etc.; the plural mila already been given. With these exceptions and of uno,

the

cardinals

mille,

thousand".

a

No

the different parts of Cento

' '

Eleven

be

translated

not

counted

Nell'

tre

'

'

and

between

:

twelve

'

hundred

'

etc. ,

thousand

must ,

etc., and

hundred",

one

dred hun-

one

hundreds:

mille

due.

cento

ngve

In

the

nineteen

year

two.

Both"

=tutti

due

e

or

i

due,

"

all three"

=tutti

e

i tre, etc.

or

numerals

(/) The words

two

"one

and "

hundred, by

anno

hundred

0)

conjunctionis used

quarantacinque (centoquarantacinque). forty-five.

and

(d)

'a hundred",

cento,

number

a

that

indeclinable.

are

(c) No article is used with "

has

when

or

the

they

second

Trentuno

or

one

shortened

as

uno,

hundred

into

is

number

trent'

The

1

As

an

one

or or

written

be

may venti

due) except

eight,in

which

case

trentotto, etc. and

forty

on

cento

may

cen:

ordinal

as

one:

Cenquaranta, censettanta, 252.

twenty

(ventidue

one

be written

must

From

as

after

numbers

etc. are:

adjective it has the pluralforms:

gliuni, le

une.

be

1

66

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

ventesimo

21st

ist

primo

2d

secondo

3d

tfrzo

2d

2

ventesimo

30th trentesimo3 40th quarantesimo3

sesto

7 th

sfttimo

8th

ottavo

9th

nono

1

10th

dfcimo

110th

nth

undfcimo

etc.

etc.

200th

13th tredfcimo or dfcimo terzo 14th quattordicesimoor dfcimo quarto 15th quindicesimoor dfcimo quinto sedicfsimo

dfcimo

or

8th

diciottesimo

or

dugentesimo tesimo

etc.

ottavo

1000th

millesimo

2000th

duemillesimo

19th diciannovesimoordfcimon9no

etc.

ventesimo2

20th

duecen-

or

trecentesimo

300th

sesto

dfcimo

ducen-

or

tesimo

17th diciassfttimoor dfcimo sfttimo 1

centesimo

secondo1

dfcimo

or

ooth

centodfcimo4 115th cento quindicesimo

dfcimo primo1

or

duodecimo

6th

or

etc.

6th

1

secondo

ventiduesimo

5th quinto

2th

or

ventunesimo

4th quarto

1

primo

millionesimo

1000000th

etc.

(a) La

ordinals

The

trentesima

ninety is

except is

"

novanta

The

tre.

of

thirtieth

"one

expressed by the regular ordinal

are

half"

=

un

adjective,me' a a minuto ci salgo.

an

In m"zzo up

parte di

adjectives:

three.

(b) Fractions

m"zzo

all

are

Of

meta.

una

me,zzo,

bers num-

these

noun:

In half

a

minute

I shall

come

there. solamente

Datemene Un

quinto, J. Due

(c) "Firstly",

"

la meta.

Give

dfcimi,T2Tr.Due "=

secondly

mieramente, secondariam

e

me,zzo,

primo, secondo,

nte, etc.

1

Undicesimo,

2

Vigesimo is also found.

8

Trigesimo, quadragesimo, are Centesimo dfcimo, etc., are

4

only half

me

dodicesimo,

also

exist.

rare.

not

allowable.

of it.

2\. or

pri-

(which Multiplicatives

253.

167

VALUES.

NUMERICAL

adjectives)are:

are

quadruple* etc.: triplo,1 triple. ddppio,double. Una doppia vittgria.A double victoria. (

Collectives

254.

ambedue,

ambo,

entrambo, And

the

are

adjectives:

y )

the

nouns

:

C9ppia,a couple.

una un

paio, a pair.

un

terno,

dozzina,

a

dozen.

una

ventina,

a

score.

centinajo,4(about)

un

decina,3half

a

score,

ten.

migliajo,(about)

un

NUMERICAL

ahun-

[sand.

dred.

numbers.

three una

of

combination

a

una

a

thou-

VALUES. Dates.

In dates

255.

is

preceded by

where

the number

prepositionand

a

month, the definite article nel mille

Accadde

with

be used

must

trecento

representinga not by the name It

ottantuno.

year of a

it : in

happened

1.381. Fino

dal 18

in tre atti

12

avea

Even

presentato

in 181

tragedy in three acts. Dal 1870 in pgi. From

2

he

had

1870

(a) It is frequentlyused month

a

padre

suo

presented

una

trag^dia

to his father

a

of

a

on.

also where

the

name

precedes:

Nacque

il 29

giugno

del 1798.

He

born

was

the

29th

of

June, 1798. 1

Also

2Cf. 3

a

quadruplice,etc. triplice, 251

(s).

Sestina, "a poem

of six stanzas,

stanza

of six

lines",is not

now

collective. 4

Cf. 63.

Di is used

after these collectives:

Un

centinaio

di

u^mini.

1

68

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

Questi 1119SSO a compassione 1833

lo meng

seco

his friend, in October

1833

compassion for with him to Naples.

with him

he took

article is used

definite

(b) The

Moved

Napoli.

a

amico, nell' ottobre del

deir

before

numeral

the

in English,but it as indicatingthe day of the month in dating letters etc., as it is in English: is not omitted del mese? Quanti abbiamo Qggi " il di"ci. What day is it?

of the month

Allora scriviamo Then

let

write:

us

is the

(c) Primo

days

:

To-day is the tenth. il 10 (or il die,ci) maggio, Fire,nze, Florence, May 10, 1902.

of the

ordinal

only

used

indicatingthe

in

the

otherwise

month;

1902.

cardinals

ployed em-

are

:

II1

il due

primo (di)maggio,

of

Time

the time

of

It follows

day

that

except in the case of Che ora "? Sono gtto e

and

maggio.

numerals

with

cating indiwith

is understood

ora, ore,

article is feminine, and

the "

o'clock", the verb

one

Sono

undici.

le

il di tre di

Day.

definite article is used

256. The all.

maggio,

is

le ngve.

that,

plural: le

Sono

mezzo.

Sono

le

(a)

cinque

II tocco

is

die,ci.

meno

commonly

of V una,

instead

used

"

one

o'clock".' (b) M"zzo

giorno

Antimeridiano

pomeridiano Arrivano 5

" =

alle

in the

"noon",

=

"

mezzangtte

in the

morning", afternoon", "p.m.": =

cinque pomeridiane.

They

will

=

night". "mid-

"a.m."; arrive

at

p.m.

1

Li

or

ai may

aprile. "Vienna,

also be

employed: April 5."

Vifnna

li

cinque (ai cinque)

Numerical

Ordinals

257.

Titles.

in

used

are

169

VALUES.

NUMERICAL

titles of

numerical

the

rulers,also in indicating a book', chapter, etc., "but article intervenes

in

as

no

English: the Fifth.

Charles

Carlo

quinto.

Libro

quarto, capitolo t"rzo, paragrafo 119110.

chapter three, paragraph nine. Luigi de_'cimose.stoe.ra un re sfortunato

Book

the

Fourth,

Sixteenth

the

a

was

verb

Che

is used

avere

(or Quanti anni) ha

eta

is

old

How

etremes'.

Age.

of Time.

Duration

258. The

king.

unfortunate

very

to suo

denote

age

:

figlio?

Ha

cinque

anni

years

and

three

Five

son?

your

Louis

molto.

months.

Cosi

nel

adesso

rono

nell'

anni

sessantadue

Avrg

The

259.

verb

fa, or " Dodici anni fa, or anno

|)molto t"mpo

un

Sono

che

A

anno.

dodici

"Twice

"Two

and

"

Six minus

"

A

two two

di

are are

three

table

iunghezza

in

now

note to de-

.

.

.

.

.

.

four"

four"

died

e

three" .

ago.

time

ago.

long

a

via due, quattro. due

fanno

=se,imeno

broad" .

years

Idioms.

=due

=due

leaves

della

Twelve

Numerical

long by e

ago.

year

anni. He

" mo,rto.

Miscellaneous

260.

am

of time:

duration Un

I

I

anno.

"ssere, is used

less often

fare, or

So

April.

old next

sixty-two years sixty-secondyear.

venturo.

anno

secondo

sessantesimo

mio

shall be my

dell'

aprile

.

.

.

tre, tre. tavola

=una

.

larghezza di

quattro.

.

della

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

i7o

INTERJECTIONS. The

261.

interjectionsand

commoner

expressions

are: interjections (1) Expressive of joy, admiration, approval,

used

as

and

like:

the

Ah! Good

Oh!

Ah!

done

Well

!

Bene!

Oh!

Che !

!

2

Well!

What

!

(2) Grief, pain, fear, pity,and the Ohi! Ahi! Ah! Ahim" (or Ohim") ! Oh

Wretched

!

me

pQvero Peccato

(or Che

Pieta!

Pity!

Den

that

What

a

like: Alas! I

Ahimisero! !

am

pity !

Oh, poverino!

Mercy!

Woe

Alas !

!

being

peccato) !

Bravo!1

Good!

Oh,

thing!

poor

!

(3) Surprise: OhbeUa! Bacco

Curioso! Man

!

Ehi!

Strange!

Ahi!

Per

E cosi!

!

(4) Disdain, disgust,disapproval: Guai! Beware! Woe! Oib"! Fie! Vergogna! Shame! nonsense! Eh, via, sciocchezze! Oh, come, Questa

b"lla!

A

fine state

"

of affairs!

(5) Encouragement: Orsu!

Come

Animo!

now!

Courage!

Di

su!

Speak

out!

Via!

via!

cheimpgrta?

(6) Enthusiasm, Evviva!

1

Bravi!; 2

a

he

Che

to or

an a

O

Viva

adjective. Thus

woman,

che

already

is oftcd

done

does

what

it matter?

V

Italia!

to

two

Long persons

live

Italy! would

one

say,

Brava!

used, especiallyin Tuscany,

question implying doubt: has

come,

applause:

Hurrah!

is

This

Come,

it!"

Che

V abbia

to

gia fattol "Can

introduce it be

that

ITALIAN

172

it ; if the

future

is not

be constructed

to

For

GRAMMAR.

given,it and the conditional

from

are

the

the construction

of

infinitive. the preterite see

178 and

179.

The

imperative,unless otherwise stated, is like the correspondingforms of the present indicative. Irregular There

are

Andare,

1.

Present

Vado

Verbs but

to

go,

va

vanno

andato; andai; andr" (ander^).2

Va'

go

3

andate

Vada

andiamo

vada

andiate

vada

vadano

back

The

first and

rida)take the written

for

Subjunctive.

Present

again, to examine again. trasandare, to go beyond, to neglect. Dare, to give,dato; di"dior d"tti, dar".

Remark.

2

gation.1 conju-

andare:

riandare, to

1

of the first

Imperative.

andate

2.

Conjugation.

andiamo

vai

Like

First

the

irregularverbs

Indicative.

vo

or

four

of

accent.

Really only one, dare; fare their preteritesshow. as Forms use

Di"

bracketed

in exercises. also

are

Forms

sing.ind. pres. (rid",

third

and

stare

belonging forms.)

not

(Cf.Latin

for reference

and

preceded by

exists, pi. dier,diero,

or

are

"or"

didrono.

not are

to

here

be

alternate.

nally, origi-

learned

VERBS.

IRREGULAR

3.

faccio

fo

or

fa' fate

fate fanno

Like

assuefarsi,to

malfare,

one's

accustom

the

All these

f"cciano

do to

mischief. tame.

do

again. soddisfare,to satisfy.

verbs

3d sing.ind.

1st and

take pres.:

the

written

accent

disfa,rifa,etc.

Stare,to stand, be; stato, stetti, star". Pret

Ind.

Imperative.

Ind.

stg stiamo

stetti stemmo

stai state

stesti steste

sta

stette stfttero

stanno

Like

Present

Subjunctive.

stia stiamo

sta' state

stia stiate

stia, stiano

or

stieno

stare

ristare,to

sovrastare, to stand

cease.

soprastare,to stand

over,

to

over,

to

tarry. sottostare,to be subject.

command.

like the

accented

Rista, etc., are

compounds

of dare

fare.

(a) Distare, and

f"ccia

undo.

to (sfare),

Remark.

and

facciate

to

rifare,to

contraffare,to counterfeit.

Pres.

faccia

mansuefare,

confarsi,to be suitable.

4.

facciamo

to liquefy. liquefare,

self.

on

faccia

fare:

affarsi,to suit, become.

disfare

Subjunctive.

Present

facciamo

l

fa

Imperative.

Indicative.

x

fai

fac"ndo, fatto; feci,far"

Fare, to do, make, Present

173

has

no

"

to be

distant," is regular in the present

present participle ; otherwise

it is like stare ;

constare, contrastare, instare, ostare, etc., verbs. (Exercises XLI

and

XLII.)

1

also

found.

Faci, face,

are

are

regular

ITALIAN

174

Verbs

Irregular

GRAMMAR.

of

Second

the

Conjugation.

great majority of the verbs

263. The

of the

second

ing less irregular.1Of those endor conjugationare more in -ere, only two, godere and temere, are perfectly nate regular,i.e.,have all the regular forms without alterirregularones. The following are all the '-ere verbs that are perfectly regular: 2

of the Second

(a) IrregularVerbs 264. Most the

of these

verbs

stem-vowel, only in

-6re.

stressed strong, i.e.,

are

the present indicative

and

on

junctive, sub-

the past participle preterite,4 being, persuadere and rimanere, weak, i.e.,ending

and

except in

Conjugationin

in the

of the The infinitive,the vowel regularly in -uto. perfect contracted antepenultbeing stressed,is never ; the imtherefore be formed tenses directlyfrom may it.

The

future and

conditional

are

in

some

verbs

irregularin the present tenses,5 but regular weak preterite :

Verbs the 1

Conversely, the great majority second conjugation. 2 And their compounds. 3

In the

4

Some

8

Sometimes

sense

of

have

the with

"

to

weak

of all

meditate."

See

preterite.

contracted

future.

irregularverbs

68, p. 184.

tracted. con-

having

are

of the

IRREGULAR

5. Dovere, to owe;

VERBS.

175

dovuto, dovei fdov"tti), perative dovrj. Im-

lacking. Present

devi

(debbo, dfggio) (debbi)

deve

(debbe)

devo

dobbiamo

d^vono

"

(dfbbono, dfggiono)

Subjunctive.

(deva, d^ggia)

debba

(deggiamo)

dovete

Present

debba

Indicative.

dobbiamo

"

dobbiate

d"bba

d"bbano

(d"vano, d^ggiano)

Potere, to be able, potuto; potei,poti-9. No

6.

Present

Indicative.

posso

possiamo

Subjunctive.

Present

possa

possiamo

pu9i potete

ppssa

possiate

p9ssono

ppssa

p9ssano

pug

Sedere, to sit,seduto; sedei

7.

si"do

Present

sediamo

seggo

(seggiamo)

sedete

si"de

sifdono or sfggono sedere

sieda

or

"

siedi

Like

sedftti, seder".

or

Indicative.

Present or

tive. impera-

segga "

"

Subjunctive.

sediamo(seggiamo) sediate

si|dano

or

sfggano

:

"

possedere,to

to supersede. soprassedere,

possess.

risedere,to reside. (Exercise XLIII.)

II.

irregularin the present preterite:

Verbs

and

having

a

plicated redu-

l

Cadere,

8.

Present

cado

to

Indicative

(caggio)cadiamo

cadi

cadete

cade

cadono

1

Avere

Like 2

by

fall,caduto; caddi,2cadr".

belongs

avere:

The the

dero.

aid

of

forms 179:

(caggiamo)

to

this

class, but

Subjunctive.

(caggia)cadiamo(caggiamo)

(caggiono)

riavere,

other

Present

cada

has

cadiate

(caggiate)

cadano

(caggiano)

already

been

given (74).

etc.

of the

preteriteare

to be

caddi, cadesti, cadde,

constructed

cademmo,

from

this,

cadeste, cad-

176

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

cadere:

Like

"

accadere, to

to fall again, ricade*re, scad6re, to fall off.

happen.

decadere, to decoy. sapr". 9. Sapere,to know, saputo; s"ppi,

sappia sappiam"

sappiamo

so

Subjunctive.

Present

Imperative.

Indicative.

Present

sai sapete

sappi sappiate

sappiate "

sa

sappiano

sanno

Tenere,

10.

to

hold, tenuto; tenni,terr$. Present

Indicative.

Present

tengo

teniamo

tieni

tenete

(tenghiamo)

teniate "

tifne tfngono Like

Subjunctive.

tenga teniamo

(tenghiamo)

tfngano

tenere:

appartenere,

attenersi,to belong, to hold contenere,

rattenere, to detain.

ritenere,to detain,to retain,

contain.

to

obtain.

belong, [to. ottenere, to

to

intrattenere,to delay.

entertain,

mantenere,

maintain,

to

sostenere, to sustain.

[keep. trattenere,to entertain,keep waiting.

Volere, to wish, voluto; vglli or vglsi, vorr^.

11.

Present

Indicative.

Imperative.

Present

v$glio vogliamo vupi

volete

vuole

v9gliono

"

v^gli vogliate

volere

Like

Subjunctive

v^glia vogliamo vogliate v^gliano

:

"

disvolere

(svolere)not

rivolfre,to

to

wish, to refuse.

have

a

wish

mind

to

again, to do again.

III. Preterites in -si : 12.

Calere, to matter,

make

a

difference,caluto, calse.

Impersonal. conditional Present

Imperative, present participle,future lacking.1 Indicative.

Present

cale 1

are

Moise not

in

gives use.

and

Subjunctive.

c"glia carra

Caluto

(calera)and is also almost

carrebbe never

(calerebbe),but used.

they

IRREGULAR

Dolere,

13.

Present

VERBS.

grieve, hurt, doluto;

to

Indicative.

Subjunctive.

d9lga (d9glia)dogliamo (dolghiamo) dogliate

dolete

d9lgono (d9gliono)

"

d^lgano (d9glianoj

dolere:

Like

condolere, to condole. Persuadere,

14.

dolsi,dorr$.

Present

d9lgo (dQglio)dogliamo du9li du9le

177

to

Like

persuade,

in the

Regular except

ridolere, to grieve again.

persuasi.

persuaso;

and past participle. preterite

persuadere : dissuadere,to dissuade. Rimanere,

15.

to

remain,

rimasto

(or rimaso) ; rimasi,

rimarr^. Indicative.

Present

rimango

rimaniamo

rimani

rimanete

rimane

(rimanghiamo)

rimanga

rimaniamo

rimanga

rimaniate

(rimanghiamoj

rimangano

rimangono rimanere:

Like

to

permanere,

remain.

Valere, to be worth, valuto

16.

Subjunctive.

Present

Present

Indicative.

valga (vaglia)vagliamo (valghiamo)

vali

valete

vale

valgono (vaglione) valere

to equivalere,

of the

vagliate valgano (vagliano)

:

be

equivalent, invalere,to

become

rivalere, to

worth.

same

Subjunctive.

Present

valgo (vaglio)vagliamo (valghiamo)

Like

(valso); valsi,varr^.

prevalere,to prevail.

one's

self

recover,

valid. avail

again.

IV. in -vi

Preterite 17.

Parere, to

Present

:

seem,

Indicative.

paio paiamo pari parete pare paiono

or

pariamo

appear,

paruto Present

parso

or

;

parvi,parr J.

Subjunctive.

paia paiamo paiate

paiano

or

pariamo

178

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

V. *

Preterite in -cqui

:

Giacere, to lie,giaciuto;giacqui,giacer".

18.

Present

Indicative.

Present

Subjunctive.

giacciagiacciamo giacciate giacciano

giacciogiacciamo giaci giacete glace giacciono

"

giacere: piacere,to please. Like

tacere, to be silent. VI.

and

Solere

of the

other

vedere

Indicative.

Present

sogliamo s"?glio suoli

solete

suole

s"?gliono

Vedere,

20.

Present

conjugation: has no imperaof, sglito,2 tive,

"

to

see, veduto

visto; vidi (v"ddi), vedr".

or

Indicative.

Subjunctive.

Present

vediamo vedete

vede

vedono

vedere

Subjunctive.

solessi,etc.

vedi3

Like

Imperfect

Subjunctive.

sdgliasogliamo sogliate s9gliano

(veggo, veggio)

vedo

any

conditional.

nor

Present

from

of this

habit

in the

preterite,future,

different

somewhat

verbs irregular

Solere,to be

19.

are

(veggiamo) (veggono, veggiono)

:

"

antivedere,4to foresee. awedersi,

to

perceive,

mark. re-

provvedere,6 to provide. ravvedere, to improve,

form, re-

[again. divedere,5to convince.

rivedere,

prevedere, to foresee.

travedere,to

{Exercises XLIV 1

Cf. Class

2

Used

3

Sometimes

XLV

shortened

into

/e' in

Future

and

conditional

familiar

see, see

examine

indistinctly.

.)

(6),nascere, 114, p. 190. "I only as an adjective. Ex. : era splito,

also become imperative singular may 4 Past participleonly anteveduto. 6 Only the infinitive is used. 6

and

to

was

accustomed."

conversation.

ve\

provvedero, provvederei.

The

180

29.

ITALIAN

Chiudere,

to

GRAMMAR

close, chiuso; chiusi.

chiudere:

Like

include.

accludere,to enclose.

includere,

concludere, to conclude.

precludere,to preclude.

to

escludere,to exclude. 30.

Collidere,to collide, colliso; collisi.

31.

Conquidere, to

conquer,

32.

Contendere,

to

bruise,

33.

Correre, to

run,

corso;

Like

Rare.

conquiso; conquisi. contuse-

Rare.

; contusi.

corsi.

correre. "

accorrere,

to

run

flock,to

to

concorrere,

in haste, com-

pete.

percorrere,

through. to have ricorrere, soccorrere,

incorrere,to

scorrere,

to

occorrere, 34.

happen.

to

succor.

to pass

trascorrere,to

recourse

away.

run

over.

Decidere, to decide, deciso; decisi. Like

decidere:

circoncidere,to coincidere,1to to incidere,

35.

rapidly,

pass

run

discorrere,to discourse. incur.

to

cut

cut

round.

coincide.

to precidere,

recidere,to

cut

off.

cut.

into.

Dif"ndere,to defend, difeso; difesi. Like dif "ndere: to ofr^ndere,

offend.

36. Dividere, to divide, diviso; divisi. 37. Elidere,to elide,eliso; elisi or elidei. to expel,espulso; espulsi. 38. Esp^llere,

Like

esp"llere:

to compel.2 comp^llere,

to repel. rep^'llere,

to impel. imp"llere, to explode, esplc;So; esplgsi. 39. Esplgdere, 1

Also

regular.

2

Rare.

to.

IRREGULAR

40.

Evadere, Like

evade,

to

evasi.

evaso;

evadere:

invadere, 41.

181

VERBS.

Fondere,

to

to

invade.

melt, fuso (fonduto); fusi (fondei).

fondere:

Like

confdndere,1to confound. 42.

Imm^rgere, to immerse, imme.rso; imme.rsi. Like imm"rgere: to plunge. m"'rgere,2

44.

Intridere,to dilute, intriso (intrito) ; intrisi. Intrudere, to intrude, intruso; intrusi.

45.

L"dere,to hurt, offend, l"so;l"si. Rare.

43.

46. Molcere, to soothe. 47.

Pret. mulse.

Defective.

Rare.

Mgrdere,to bite, mcjrso; mcjrsi. Like mgrdere: to grieve. rimgrdere,

48. P"rdere,

lose, p"rso

to

(oftener perduto);

(oftener perdei or perd"tti). 49. Pr"ndere,to take, preso; Like

learn.

compr"ndere,to comprehend. Radere, Like

to

radere

shave, raso;

to retake. riprgndere, to surprise. sorpr"ndere,

rasi.

:

sorradere, to 51.

presi.

prgndere:

to appre*ndere,

50.

p"rsi

graze.

R^ndere,to render,

reso

(renduto);

resi

(rendei,ren-

detti). Like

r"ndere:

to yield,surrender. arrg'ndere, 1

Which

3

This, the primitive,is rarely used.

does

not

have

the weak

forms

exhibited

by its primitive.

1

82

ITALIAN

Ridere,

52.

Like

laugh, riso; risi.

to

ridere:

arridere,

smile

to

sorridere,to 53.

Rodere, Like

GRAMMAR

to

smile.

rosi.

roso;

gnaw,

rodere

favor.

to

upon,

:

corrddere, to corrode. to (discendere1), 54. Scendere Like scendere:

ascendere, 55.

Sparge re, Like

to

strew,

spargere:

Sp"rgere,to

asp"rgere,

scesi.

(sparto,poetical); sparsi.

sparso

sprinkle.

to

56. Sp"ndere,to spend, Like

sceso;

to ascend.

cospargere,

57.

descend,

speso;

scatter, sperso;

spesi. spersi.

Rare.

spargere: to disperse. disp"rgere,

)

^

cospargere,)

^

-nkle

58. T"ndere,to extend, teso; tesi.2 Like

t"ndere: to show. ost"'ndere, to st^ndere(dist"ndere)

to attend, wait. attgndere, contendere,to contest. to understand. intgndere,

59.

,

tend.

to wipe, t"rso; tersi. T"'rgere,

Like

ex-

Rare.

t^rgere:

ast"rgere,to absterge. Rare. 60.

Uccidere, to kill,ucciso; uccisi. Like

uccidere:

ancidere, to kill.

no

1

Discendere

2

This

is the

is the

older

transitive

past participle.

Rare.

form verb

of scendere.

; the

intransitive

is

regular,but has

183

VERBS.

IRREGULAR

II. in participle

Past

Mettere,

61.

Like

ammettere,

to

preteritein

-sso,

put,

messo;

misi

-si:

(messi).

mettere: admit.

premettere,

to

premise.

to commit.

promettere,

to

promise.

to

commettere,

compromettere,

to

rimettere,to

compro-

remit.

scommettere,

mise.

framm^ttere, manomettere,

smettere

interpose.

to

to

lay

hands

to

wager,

(dismettere),

to

quit. sottomettere, to submit.

upon.

permettere,

to

permit.

trasmettere,

transmit.

to

III. Past 62.

in -ssi: in -sso, preterite participle annesso; ann"ssi. Ann^ttere,to annex, Like

ann^ttere: connect.

conn"ttere, to connettei.

64. Comprimere,

deprimere,

to

press,

comprimere to

2

cedei

depress,

compre.sso;

de-

opprimere,

c^ssi.1

succeed.1

compre,ssi.

to

reprimere, to

of

premuto

exists.

is

oppress, repress.

sopprimere,to

Italian. Generally a weak verb in modern The primitive primere (oftener prf mere)

pre,sso instead

or

:

esprimere,to express. imprimere, to impress.

2

or

succ"dere,to

preciate.

1

c"sso;

connettuto,

c"dere:

conc"dere,to concede.1 to intercede. interc"'dere, Like

also

Rare.

63. C"dere,to yield,ceduto Like

Has

suppress.

regular, although

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

Ksctitat

iiscuaBO; jjmhhm

" -

.

:

dis:_:e:f

Like

coz:_:r:r

incutrrr Fendere.

66

concoaN) past participle

-

-

:;

inspire mfnse. split,fenduto

fendei

:e=5o:

fendftti

Eessi

Figgere figere

--

Fiertere.

Like

bend, Hesse

tc

rif.r::r:r

69. Influere

u u

prom

in

influence,influsso

be

overe

Alsc reflettuto

reflect

to

infioss

:

movendo.

mcve.

1 riflettei.:

an "

mosso:

moss.

overe

u

overe

Rare

kneel

muovere

-

affect

rim

mote.

s:mm

-

Scindere

-:

to

be

Mgvere Like

rlessi.

::":::

genufl$tteretc

comm

.

me'sseU

::vt hide

-

5:~:i"rre

-:

fitto: fissi fisi

w

tljggere:

[ike

-

fix,fisso

t: .

-

-

sdsBQ

u

overe. o

:o

overe.

scindei

remove.

fee

?::r

up.

s::?s. .

S;::e:e

-:

scuotere BC

perc

5

BCfSSO

....-.-.

scossi.

::ere

D

tc

otere

u

:

rise

sti

u

| a shake

otere

,

Suggere.

-:

sock

bo

snggei

boss

s_::

~

(up)

.

rticiple. Preterite

re

:

5_"r.

sugga.

etc

--"::

IV. -

-_

rl

A;:orgere

in -si:

ret

". -to

accorgersi ,to pes

accorto:

accgrsi.

accorgerr ,;:

-I.

rgere

to

e.

pe~ weak

when

gh\

t means

CI lird

36,3 conjugation, is

Strang oft

ener

used.

VERBS.

IRREGULAR

75.

Ass^lvere,to

assolvetti

assglto or

assolvei,

ass^lvere:

to ris^lvere.

dissolve.

melt,

76. Ass^rbere.to absorb, 77.

assoluto;

assglsi.1

or

Like

absolve,

Assumere, Like

to

ass9rto; ass9rsi. Rare. assunsi.

assunto.

assume,

assumere:

to

consumere,

to

presumere,

consume.

78. Cingere (cignere),

to

cinto

gird,

presume.

cinsi.

cinger^

.

(cignerj). Present

Indicative.

Present

Subjunctive.

cingo (cigno) cingiamo (cigniamo" cinga (eigne cingiamo (cigniamo) cingi (cigni) cingete (cigneto cingiate 'cigniate

(cignono)

cinge (eigne) cingono

(cignano;

cingano

Imperative.

cingi (cigni) cingete (cignete)

cingere:

Like

giungere (giugnere),to

(pugnere), to prick, punto: punsi.

pungere

ar-

giunto. giunsi. raggiungere, to rejoice. rive,

(mungere),

mugnere

sp^'gnere^spengere),2to

tinguish, sp"nto; spensi.

milk,

to

munsi.

munto:

piangere (piagnere),to

to push, spingere(Spignere), stringere (strignere), to

weep,

pianto. piansi. compiangere,

to

ex-

brush,

stretto

strinto;

or

strinsi.3

bewail.

rimpiangere,to regret. pingere (pignere),to paint. dipingere (dipignere), to

to tingereitignere),

dve.

lignere (lingere),to unto;

anoint,

unsi.

paint. 1

cf.

The

forms

strong

solvere,122,

2

The

3

This

forms

are

poetical.

For

riscUvere,

"to

determine

",

p. 191. with

gn

are,

however,

quite as

common

as

those

with

ng

stretto.

differs

from

cingere

only

in

having

the

past

participle

1

86

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

gather, cogli"ndo,cglto,cglsi,

Cggliere(cgrre),to

79.

coglierg(corrg). Subjunctive.

Present

Indicative.

Present

c9lgo (coglio)cogliamo (colghiamo) C9lga (c9glia)cogliamo (colghicogliate [amo) cogliete C9gli C9lgano (c9gliano) c9lgono (c9gliono) C9glie

Imperative

present indicative.

like

cggliere:

Like

to collect. raccggliere, ascigglisciggliere (scigrre, to untie. ere, disciggliere)

receive, wel-

to accggliere, come.

to absolve. prosciggliere,

change of

with

Also

to prescegliere,

choose

,

(e for

vowel

o

throughout) :

scegliere(scerre)to choose. to select. trascegliere,

be-

,

fore, select with

care.

And

1, tggliere (tgrre)to take, take distggliere) stggliere (stgrre, ,

to

dissolve, divert

80.

Cglere,to

revere,

away.

colto

C9I0and

present indicative 81.

from. or

cglein

culto.

Defective.

Only

Rare.

use.

Distinguere,to distinguish,distinto; distinsi. Like distinguere: estinguere, to extinguish.

to erect, "rto; "rsi. Rare. JJrgere, 83. Fingere,to feign,finto; finsi. to break, franto; fransi. 84. Frangere (fragnere), Like frangere: 82.

infrangere,to crush, infringe. 85. Fulgere, to fulsi.

shine.

No

present participle. Preterite

Rare. Like

fulgere:

rifulgere,to

shine.

Also

rare,

defective, and

poetical. 1

Here,

contractcd

as

always, the present participleis formed infinitive:

scegli^ndo, togliendo,

etc.

from

the

un-

1

88

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

to turn, vglto;vglsi. V^lgereor v(Jlvere, Like v^lgere : to wrap invglgere, up. awglgere (awglvere), to to turn, revolve. rivglgere, wrap. to overturn, to devolve (past sconvglgere, devglvere, to unfold. devoluto). svglgere, participle

95-

V. in in -tto^preterite participle

Past

-ssi:

to afflict, affiitto;afflissi. 96. Affligere, 97. Condurre, to conduct, conduc"ndo, condotto;

con-

dussi. condurre:

Like

addurre, to bring,allege. dedurre, to deduct (dedotto

introdurre,to introduce.

dedutto). ducere1,to conduct.

ridurre,to reduce.

indurre, to induce.

tradurre,to translate.

or

produrre, to produce. sedurre,to seduce.

to correct, corr"tto;corr"ssi. 98. Corrgggere, Like correjggere: to direct. dirigere, rgggere 2,to govern. to

erigere, 99. 100. 1 01.

erect.

to cook, cocgndo,cgtto; cgssi.3 Cgcere (cugcere), Friggere,to fry,fritto;frissi. Lgggere,to read, lgtto;lgssi.4 Like lgggere: to elect. elgggere, to have a partialityfor. prediligere, No past participle. Defective. Lucere, to shine.

102.

Preterite lusse. Like

Rare.

lucere:

to shine. rilticere, 1

This, the primitive,is used often

not

its past 2

The

contracted

into

participle. primitive,but

8Cf.7o(3).

or

rilucei.

infinitive is poetry. The Dutto, "duct", is etymologically

only

durre.

much

Pret. rilussi

less used

in

than

corrfggere.

4Cf. 70.

IRREGULAR

189

VERBS.

103.

Negligere, to neglect, negl"tto;negl^ssi.

104.

Prot^ggere,to protect, prot"tto; protgssi.

105.

Scrivere, to write, scritto;scrissi. scrivere:

Like

ascrivere,to ascribe, circoscrivere, descrivere,to

to prescribe. [scribe. prescrivere,

circum-

to

proscrivere,

describe.

to

proscribe.

sottoscrivere, to subscribe.

inscrfvere,to inscribe.

trascrfvere,to transcribe.

to destroy, dissolve,strutto; Struggere (distruggere)

106.

,

strussi. 107.

Trarre

(traere),to

draw,

tra"ndo, tratto; trassi,

trarr". Like

trarre:

attrarre,to

attract.

estrarre,to

extract.

contrarre, to contract.

protrarre, to protract.

detrarre,to

to ritrarre,

detract.

distrarre,to divert from.

draw

back.

sottrarre, to subtract. VI.

Past 108.

in participle

-sto, in -si :

or Chigdere,to ask, chi"sto;chie,si Like chi^dere:

to request. rfe^^dere,

to inquire. inchi"dere,

109.

Nascondere,

to

nascondere

Like

chiedei.

hide, nascosto;

nascosi.

:

"

ascondere no.

(ponere)2, to put, pone,ndo,posto; posi.

Porre Present

1,to hide,

Present

Indicative.

Subjunctive.

pongo

poniamo

poni

ponete

poniamo poniate

pone

pongono

pongano

1

The

2

This,

primitive, but the

uncontracted

ponga

less used

form,

than

nasc"3ndere.

is still used.

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

190

Like

anteporre,

porre to

:

intraporre,to interpose.

prefer.

(apponere),to affix,

apporre

impute. disporre,to dispose.

oppose.

posporre,

to

postpone.

preporre,

to

prefer.

riporre,to replace. sopporre, to place under.

(esponere, sporre),

esporre

to

opporre,

expound. imporre,to impose. to

to

supporre,

suppose,

Rispondere, to respond, risposto;risposi.

in.

rispondere: to correspond. corrispondere,

Like

VII.

showing reduplicationin the preterite. (a) Preterite in -bbi,past participle regular:

Verbs

Condscere,

112.

to

know

the

(by

senses), conosciuto;

conobbi. Like

condscere:

ricondscere,to recognize. sconpscere

Crescere,to

113.

Like

(discondscere)not

to

know.

,

cresciuto; crebbi.

grow,

crescere: "

increscere, )

to increase.

accrescere, ,

.

.

decrescere, to decrease.

(b) Past participle regularor Present

Indicative.

Present

nasco

115.

-cqui2:

Preterite.

nacqui

etc.

nacesti,

etc.

etc.

to harm, nociuto; nocqui. N^cere (nugcere),

Present or

sorry. J

nacqui.

Subjunctive.

nasca,

nasci,

y to be

in -to,preterite in

Nascere, to be born, nato;

114.

nuQco

.

rincrescere1,)

Indicative.

Present

mjiccionociamo

nu9ci

nocete

nu9ce

nu9cono

nuoca

[ciono or

119c-

in (c) Past participle 1

Impersonal.

or

Subjunctive.

n^ccia

nociamo

"

nociate

"

nu^cano

in -ppi: -tto, preterite 2

Cf.

giacere,18, p. 178.

[ciano or

n9c-

IRREGULAR

Rompere,

116.

Like

191

break, rotto; ruppi.

to

rompere: to

corrompere,

interrompere, to interrupt.

corrupt.

dirompere, to break, to break

erompere,

VERBS.

break

irrompere, to

bruise.

forth.

in.

to burst

prorompere,

regular,preteritein -wi participle (bevere),to drink, bev"ndo; bevuto 117. Bere bewi (beveior bev^tti). (d)

bevo bevi beve

Past

Present

Indicative.

or

beo

beviamo

or

bei

bevete

or

bee

bevono

Present

beva

bea

forth.

:

(beuto);

Subjunctive.

be(v)iamo

or

beiamo

or

beete

be(v)iate

or

beono

be(v)ano

or

Pi^vere,to rain, piovuto,pigvve. Impersonal.

118.

VIII. Verbs

irregularin

the past

participle only:

Assistere, to be present,

119.

Like

to

assist,assistito.

assistere1:

consistere,to consist.

to perish. persistere,

desistere,to desist.

resistere,to resist.

to esistere,

sussistere, to subsist.

exist.

to insist. insistere,

Concepere,

120.

Like

to

conceive, conc"tto.

concepere

percepere,

to

Like

perceive. esatto.

esigere:

to transigere,

transact.

to undo, Solvere, Like solvere:

to dissolve. diss^lvere, 1

:

Esigere, to exact,

121.

122.

2

soluto.

to determine. risglvere,

irregularonly in having the participialform proper to the -ire conjugation. 2 used. Concepire, percepire,are the verbs commonly These

verbs

are

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

192

IX.

Vivere,

123.

vivrg.

(vivuto),vissi,viver"or

live, vissuto

to

"

Like

vivere

:

"eat convivere, to live together,

or

drink

together.

rivivere,to revive.

Verbs

Irregular

of

Third

the

Conjugation.1

I.

irregularin the present regularweak preterite:

(a) Verbs the

Cucire, to

124.

Present

cticia a

and

o, but

Like

or

cucire

sdrucire

Empire

125.

Present

or

having

cucisco, etc. (This verb

e

and

Present

junctive sub-

inserts i before

i.)

: or scucire,to rip. (sdruscire)

"mpiere,to fill, empi"ndo,empito, empii. Present

Indicative.

empiamo empite fmpiono (empiscono)

irregularforms Like

or

cucisca,etc.

fmpio (empisco) "mpi (empisci) fmpie (empisce) These

cucio

before

not

but

cucito, cucii.

sew,

indicative

tenses

are

from

Subjunctive.

fmpia empiamo empiate ^mpiano

"mpiere.

empire:

to accomplish. (This verb adempire (ad"'mpiere),

has also the past

participleadempiuto.) to compire (cgmpiere), perfect. (Past participle compiuto. Cdmpito is used as an adjective.)

1

For

forms

verbs see

71.

which

do

not

show,

or

do

not

always show, the -isco

VERBS.

IRREGULAR

126.

Salire,to ascend, salito,salii

salsi.

Indicative.

Present

.

or

193

.

salite

salgono (saliscono)

(salisce)

sale

(sagliamo, salghiamo)

saliamo

salgo (salisco) sali (salisci)

Subjunctive.

Present

saiga (salisca)

saliamo

(sagliamo, salghiamo)

sagliate (salisce)

sale

salgano (saliscano)

salire:

Like

to reascend. risalire,

assaiire,to assail.

or

127.

Seguire,to follow, seguito,seguii.

The

stem

diphthong

may

e

under

the accent

:

s"guo

etc. si^'guo, 128.

Udire, to hear, udito, udii,udh-9,or udr". odo

udiamo

odi

udite

ode

129.

Uscire

oda

udiamo

"

udiate

"

9dono to (escire),

Present

go

fsco esci

uscite

Present

-

Subjunctive. usciamo

esca

"sci fscono Like

9dano

out, uscito,uscii.

Indicative.

usciamo

Subjunctive.

Present

Indicative.

Present

"

usciate

"

fscano

uscire:

to succeed, riuscire,

to turn

out.

in the present and preterite : (b) Verbs irregular Sparire,to disappear, sparito,spariior sparvi. 130. Present

Indicative.

Present

Subjunctive.

' spaia or sparisca spariamo spaio or sparisco spariamo spariate [cano spariot sparisci sparite [riscono or spaiano sparisspare or sparisce spaiono or spa"

"

Like

apparire,to

sparire: appear,

apparso,

apparito

apparvi,

parsi,apparii.

ap-

comparire, to parso

or

appear,

comparito,

er comcom-

parsi,comparvi, comparii.

ITALIAN

194

Venire,

131.

venuto, venni, verr^.

come,

Present

Indicative.

Present

(ven-

veniamo

(vegno)

vengo

to

GRAMMAR.

venga

Subjunctive.

(vegna)

veniamo

ghiamo) vieni

venite

viene

vfngono

ghiamo) veniate 4"

(veg-

venire

nano)

:

prevenire, to hinder.

avvenire, to happen. convenire, to divenire

[come.

agree,

(provvenire)

to

,

proceed from. sovvenire, to relieve.

intervene.

invenire,to find

provenire

be-

(devenire),to

intervenire,to

(vfg-

vfngano

nono) Like

(ven-

svenire,to faint.

out.

in the present and past participle, irregular and preterite : present, past participle, Morire, to die, mQrto; morii, morrg or morh-9. 132.

(c) Verbs

or

Indicative.

Present

*

mugio (muoro)

Present

moriamo

or

muo-

muQia

Subjunctive.

(muora)

moriamo

iamo muori

muoi

or

muore

"

mugiono

"

Dire, to

say,

(mug-

muoiate

mugiano

dice,ndo,detto; dissi,dirg. Imperative.

dico

diciamo

dici

dite

dice

dicono

dire

Like

(sdire)to deny.

replacing 2

diciate

:

(benedicere), to

In all forms

diciamo

dicano

,

1

Subjunctive.

di' dite

bless. disdire

Present

dica

addire, to assign. benedire

(muo-

rano)

Indicative.

Present

muo-

iamo

morite

rono) 133.

or

where

the

indire, to

announce.

maledire,

to

curse.

predire,to predict. ridire,2to repeat. diphthong

uo

occurs

o

is sometimes

found

it.

Redire,

"to

Cf. 153, P- ICA

return",

(poetical,)has

nothing

to

do

with

dire.

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

196

wise OtherNo past participle. Comp"tere,to compete. regular. No past participle. converge. 146. Conv^rgere, to Otherwise regular. No past participle. 147. Delinquere,to be delinquent. Otherwise regular. Poetical. wise to diverge. No past participle.Other148. Div"rgere, regular. found. to extol. Only estglle 149. Estgllere, No past participle.Used only to be hot. 150. F"'rvere, 145.

in the third person. to Fi"dere, regular. Poetical.

151.

Gire,to

152. Present

go,

No

wound. Rare.

gito. Imperfect.

Indicative.

past participle.Otherwise

Imperative.

giva (gia) etc.

giamo

,

gite

gite conditional

and

Future

Present

Subjunctive.

giamo giate

gir$, gir"i,etc., regular.

Poetical.

ire:

Like

redire,to

return.

to Illanguidire, Otherwise regular.

154.

155.

Lambire,

in the third

lece

No

other

to lick.

No

faint.

No

past participle.

past participle. Used

person.

156. Lecere Present

grow

to (licere),

be lawful, lecito

Indicative

(lice)

parts found.

Poetical.

(licito).

only

VERBS.

DEFECTIVE

Olire,

157.

olivano

and

oliva

used.

Perire,

158.

indicative

imperfect

Only

smell.

to

197

No

perish.

to

wise Other-

participle.

present

regular. Priidere,

159. in

the

third

Used

participle.

past

only

person.

Ri"dere,

160.

No

itch.

to

Present

to

return.

Present

Indicative.

Subjunctive.

ri"do ri"di ri"de 161.

Stridere,

No

shriek.

to

participle.

past

(Poet.)

rifdano

ri"da

rifdono

Otherwise

regular. 162.

Tangere,

163.

Urgere,

164.

V"rtere,

indicative

to

Has

urge.

and

only

tange.

urge, but

urgeva, used

urgesse.

only

in

the

imperfect.

v"rtere: controv"rtere,

165.

only

Regular,

turn.

to

present Like

Has

touch.

to

Vigere, Used

to

only

be in

to

controvert.

in

force,

the

third

to

nourish.

person.

No

past

ciple. parti-

Verbs

conjugated in

this index verbs

are

in

set

verbs, are

included

not

Accadere,

Accfndere,

the

Rare

manner

same

the

from

placed.

so

AND

IRREGULAR

OF

INDEX

margin.

compounds,

and

Accdrrere,

Asciplvere, Ascdndere,

unusual

Aspfrgere,

113

57

Assidere, 27

133

Assistere, 119

97

Ad"mpiere (adempire), 125 Affarsi,3

Ass^lvere,75 Ass^rbere, 76 Assuefarsi, 3

96 Affliggere, Algere, 22

Assumere, 61

Ammettere,

77

Astfrgere, 59 Att^ndere, 58

23

Ancidere,

109

Assalire, 126

Acquisire,143 Addurre,

88

Ascrivere, 105

33

Accrescere,

Attenersi, 10

60

Att9rcere,93

1

Anteporre, no

Attrarre, 107 Avfllere, 28

Antivedere,

Avere, cf. " 74

Ann"ttere,

very

AsciQgliere,79

29

62

20

Avvedersi,

Apparire, 130 Appartenere, 10 App^ndere, 24 Apporre, 1 10 Apprfndere, 49 Aprire, 134 Ardere, 25

Avvenire, Avvincere,

20

133 94

Avv9lgere, 95 Benedire, Bere

133

(bevere), 117

Arr^ndere, 51 Arridere, 53

in

compound

commoner

obsolete

are

Ascendere, 54

Acc^gliere,79 Acc^rgere, 74

Andare,

The

verb

other

some

Arr^gere, 26

8

Accludere,

Alludere,

as

here.

21

Addire,

VERBS.

DEFECTIVE

Cadere, 8 198

OF

INDEX

Calere,

Capere,

IRREGULAR

DEFECTIVE

VERBS.

Contendere,

144

Convertire,

131

135

Convincere,

29

Circoncidere,

C9rre (c9gliere)79 Corr^ggere, 98

34

Circoscrivere,

,

105

Correre, 33

C9cere (cupcere), 99

Corrispondere,1

C9gliere (c9rre),79 Coincidere,

04

Coprire (cuoprire),136

Cignere (cingere),78

Corrodere,

34

1

16

Conv^rgere. 146

Collidere, 30 Colludere,

23

Commettere,

61

Comm(u)9vere, Comparire, 130 Compfllere, 38 Comp^tere, 145

57

Cospfrgere,

57

Cucire,

Dare, 78

Compr"ndere,

49

Comprimere,

Cospargere, Crescere,

70

Compiangere,

114 124

2

8

Decadere, Decidere,

34

Decrescere,

64

Compromettere, Concfdere, 63 Concepere,

1

13

Dedurr:,, 97

61

Delinquere, 147 Deludere,

120

23

Concludere,

29

Deprimere,

64

Concorrere,

^^

Descrivere,

105

Concutere,

65

Desistere,

Condolere,

13

Detrarre,

Confarsi,

Diffndere,

3

Confondere,

19

107

Dip^ndere,

62

Dire,

31

(costruire) ,

Consumere,

77

Contendere, 58 93

Contraffare,

119

133

Dirigere,98 Discendere

(scendere") 54 ,

Disci9gliere(sci9gliere)79 (sconoscere), ,

Disconoscere

10

Cont9rcere, Contrarre,

24

Dipingere, 78

112

Contenere,

35

Digerire, 138

41

Connfttere, Conquidere,

1

Dev9lvere, 95

97

Conoscere,

1 1

53

Corrompere,

Cglere, 80

Construire

99

32

Convenire,

Cfdere, 63 Chifdere, 10S

Condurre,

1

Controv^rtere, 163

12

Chiudere,

AND

3

107

112

Discorrere,

Discutere, 65

^^

ITALIAN

200

GRAMMAR.

Essere, " 74

Disdire, 133 Disfare, 3

(smettere), 61

Dismettere

Dispfrgere, 57 Disporre, no

Estinguere, 81 (estogliere)149 Est"?llere ,

Estrarre, 107 Evadere,

40

116

Disrompere,

Dissplvere,122

Fare,

Dissuadere,

F^ndere,

66

Distare, 4

F^rvere,

150

Distfndere, 58

Fifdere, 151 67 Figgere (figere), Fingere, 83

14

Distinguere,81 Distpgliere(distprre), 79 Distprcere,93 Distrarre, 107

Distruggere,106 Disvfllere(svfllere), 92 Divedere,

20

Divfgliere (div^llere) (div"rre),92 Di

venire,

131

3

Fl"ttere,68 Fdndere, 41 Frangere, 84

Friggere, 100 Fdlgere, 85 Genufl^ttere, 68

Divfrgere, 148

Giacere,

Dividere, 36 Dolere, 13

Gire, 152

Dovere,

61

Frammettere,

18

Giungere (giugnere),78

5

Dticere, 97

Illanguidire,154 Illtidere, 23

Elfggere, 101 Elidere,37 Eludere,

23

Equivalere, 16 ]"rgere,82 Erigere, 98

Er6mpere, Esaurire, Escire

Inchifdere, 116

139

(uscire),130

Escltidere,29 Esigere,

121

Esistere,120 Esp"llere, 38 Esplpdere,

Imm^rgere, 42 Impfllere,38 Impfndere, 24 Imporre, no Imprimere, 64

39

Esporre, no Esprimere, 64

108

Incidere, 34

IncMdere, 29 Incdrrere, 33 Increscere, 113 Incutere, 65 Indire, 133 Indurre, 97 Infliiere,69

Infrangere,84 Insistere,119

INDEX

IRREGULAR

OF

(iscrivere),105

Inscrivere

AND

VERBS.

DEFECTIVE

N^cere (nu^cere),

201

116

Instruire, 137 Occdrrere,

Int"ndere, 58 Intercfdere, 63 Intervenire,

Offfndere, 35 116

Interrpmpere,

131

Intrapprre,

Offerire

Oppprre, 1 to Opprimere, 64

10

Intridere,43

Orire,

Introdurre, 97 Intrudere, 44

Invadere,

40

Invalere,

16

(offrire),140

Olire, 157

no

Intrattenere,

33

141

Ost^ndere, 58 Ottenere,

10

Parere, 17

Invenire, 131

Percipere, 120

Invplgere,95

Percprrere, ^^

Ire, 153

Percptere (percuptere),72

Irrdmpere,

116

Pfrdere, 48 Perire, 158 Permanere,

15

Lecere, 156

Permettere,

61

L"dere, 45

Persistere,

Lambire,

155

Persuadere,

Lfggere, Liquefare, 3 101

Lucere,

119

14

Piacere,

18

Piangere (piagnere) 78 Pingere (pignere), 78

102

,

Ludere,

23

Maledire, 133

Pipvere, 119 Pprgere, 86

Malfare,

Porre

3

Manomettere,

61

Mansuefare, Mantenere,

M^rgere,

(ppnere),

no

Pospprre, 1

10

Possedere, 7

3

Potere,

10

6

Precidere, 34

42

Mettere, 61

Precludere,

Mplcere, 46

Prediligere,101

Mprdere, 47

Predire,

Morire, 132

Premettere,

Mpvere (mup vere) 70 Mtingere (mugnere), 78 ,

Pr"ndere,

29

133

61

49

Pre porre,

no

Prescifgliere,79 Nascere,

Prescrivere,

114

Nascpndere,

109

Negligere,103

Presumere, Prevalere,

105 77

16

ITALIAN

202

Prevedere,

GRAMMAR.

Rifulgere,85

20

Rilucere,

Pre venire, 131

Produrre,

Rimanere,

97

Promettere,

102

15

Rimettere,

61

61

Rimordere, 47

Prompvere (promupvere), 70 Prorpmpere, 116 Proscipgliere, 79

Rimpiangere, 78 Rimpvere (rimupvere),70

Proscrivere, 105

Rincrescere,

Protpggere, 104

Ripr^ndere, 49 Riporre, no

Protrarre, 107 Provenire

(provvenire)

,

Provvedere, Prudere, 159

20

Pungere (pugnere), 78 Raccpgliere,79 Radere,

131

Risalire, 126

Riscuptere,72 Risedere, 7 Risolvere, 75 and

Risprgere,90 Risppndere, in

Raggiungere, 78

Ritenere,

Rattenere,

Ritprcere,93 Ritrarre,107

10

Ravvedere, Recidere,

20

34

Redimere, 87

10

Riuscire,

129

Rivalere,

16

Redire, 153

Rivedere, 20

Rpggere, 98

Rivenire, 137 Rivivere, 123

51

Reppllere,38 Reprimere, 64 Resistere,

119

Rivolere, Rpdere,

53

Rpmpere,

Riandare, Ricadere,

Salire,126

117

1

8

Richi^dere, 108 Riconpscere, 112 Ricprrere, t,^ 2

Ridere, 52

Ridire, 133 Ridolere,

n

Rivplgere,95

Riaccpndere, 21

Ridare,

126

Ristare, 4

50

R^ndere,

113

13

Ridurre, 97

Rifdere, 160 Rifare, 3 68 Riflfttere,

Sapere, 9 Scadere,

8

Scfgliere(scerre), 79 Scendere,

54

Scindere,

71

Scipgliere(sciprre), 79 88 Sciplvere, Scommettere, Sconpscere,

61

112

Sconvplgere, 95 Scoprire,137

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

204

(ungere),

Ugnere

78

165

Vigere,

163

Urgere,

164

V"rtere,

Vilipfndere, 24

Uscire, 129

Vincere, 94

Vivere, 16

Valere,

124

Volere,

Vedere,

11 20

V^lgere

(v"rre),

V"llere

92

Venire, 132

(v^lvere), 95

EXERCISES.

I.

EXERCISE

(For

drill in

pronunciation.)

I. Vowels.

inni,bibita,indi,minimo, nimico; e: avere, me, e, averemo, to have, me, and, we shall Hymns, draught, thence, least, enemy; ", fbbe, semto, l'anello; consapevolmente, fidele; ": pssere, have, consciously, faithful; to be, is, he had, I feel, the ring, a: amai, scale, l'Alamanna, l'ala;9: np, cpsa, to amava, amare, loving,I loved, stairs, the German, the wing; no, thing, love, I was dolore, curipso, curiosita, vi^ttola; p: sprte, mpdo, sp, I know, narrow pain, curious, curiosity, fate, manner, way; dopo, doveva; u: utile,punto, nulla,studiare,ultimo. afterwards, I ought; useful, not at all,nothing, to study, last. i:

II. Consonants.

nptte, Pevere, b"ne, finire, mplto, npbile, tutto, temere, noble, all, to fear, night, Pepper, well, to finish, much, l'acca, prometto, tedesco, dico, medico, dpsso, adornare, capo, I say, doctor, back, to adorn, head, the h, I promise, German, nocchiere, caccia, accid"nte, bacchetta, bacchiata, npce, blow with a stick, walnut-tree, pilot, hunt, accident, wand, pagina, dugento, gente, castigo, duchessa, arciduca, cip, pago, archduke, this, I pay, page, two hundred, duchess, ment, people, punishcastighi,ghiaccio,casa, mese, rpsa, scpglio,scegliere,pascere, rock, to choose, to graze, rose, punishments, ice, house, month, raschiare, pesci, vpglio, paglia, gli specchi, magnifico, pgni, the mirrors, magnificent, every, to fish, I wish, straw, scrape, bagno, mfzzo, bath, middle,

guizzare,z"lo,azzurro, to

dart, zeal, blue, III. Vowel

to

alzare. lift.

Combinations.

Bupno, pi"de, maestoso, aria, chiama, causa. Good; foot, majestic, air, he calls, cause. IV.

Accent.

Calamita, calamita, metafora, metafprico,metallo, metallico.

Magnet, calamity, metaphor, metaphorical, metal,

metallic. 207

208

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

VOCABULARY

la lo

piccolo,small, piccoli; piccola, piccole much, pi. quanti, quanto, how how (fern, quanta, many

boy, pi.i ragazzi pi.le ragazze ragazza, the girl, the scolare, pupil, pi. gli scolari la scolare, le (fern, the

il ragazzo,

quante)

scolari)

gentleman (signor, sir,Mr.) pi. i signori la signora,the lady, pi.le signore l'uomo, the man, pi.gliu^mini inglese,English,pi.inglesi(fern. the same, cf. 109) il signpre the

I

due,

siamo,

not

no,

si,yes

fssere,to be;

avere,

to have

io ho, I have

egli ha,

he

has

noi abbiamo,

are

we

hast

hai, thou

tu

art

egli ", he is noi

["behold")

two

non,

am

tu sei, thou

(literally

are

e, and

,

io sono,

is,here

here

"cco,

,

voi siete,ye (you) essi sono, they are

we

have

(you) have essi hanno, they have

voi avete, ye

are

INTERROGATIVE.

ho

io?1

sono

sei

io?,etc.

tu?, etc. NEGATIVE.

10

tu

non

io non

sono

ho, etc.

sei,etc.

non

(1) The

Remarks. I

Sono. Ha.

He

Non

hanno

pronouns

are

usually

not

expressed.3

am.

has. i libri?

Haven't

they the books? singular of these and all verbs

(2) The second person (tu)is used intimate in addressing a near friend, or a child, its relative, an in relatives,friends, or children, addressing two or more plural,voi, of the this in but voi is of Italy often extended south even usage to

ordinary ha,3 1

3

and

Tu

strangers. form

voi

of address

are

also

much

is the feminine

used

3d

in

poetry, but the Lei ", Lei or

sing.4,Ella

etc. 2

Cf. 72. Cf. 91.

exercises,the

*

For

fuller

explanations see 87 and 88. Only the third person singularwill be used other forms later. being introduced

in the

first

EXERCISES.

209

EXERCISE

fJcco un Si,"

libro

un

i tali

ani

libri itali

I

II

L'

libri.

hanno

Ipcco

scolare. libri

non

it ali

Si,sono

ha

uomo

lo

ho

scolare,e

Ij)piccola la

ani

I tali

libro.

un

Lo

americana?

ragazza

e?

Lei, signor professor 1

For

2

Note

the

scolare

capitalization see

Here

English (5)

he

and

a

a

a

The

(10) She

has

Is the

pupils. (12) The books? (14) Yes, I (16)

pupil.

The

Italians

English

"

The

indicate

1

Omit.

2

Una-scolare

3

have

" piccolo.

ano

libri ha

libri.

have

Italian

two

(7) Yes,

are

books.

he

is

a

pupil

pupil? (9) Yes, she is a2 books. (11) The boy and the

have

English books.

Italian

I tali are

ah

books.

(17)

pupils.

they1

(3) They1

girl a

two

not

has

pupil?

a

the

Is

The

books.

x

have

(13)

(15)

I

(2) have

men

(19)

Italians.

(22) They

books?

pupil

employed to

Lei?

Are

(21) Italian

the

Have

Have am

a

(0

no3 men

the

books

and

books.

English Note.

man

pupils

are

(20) Yes,

Italians?

book

men

(18) Yes, they1

books.

scolare

books.

boy

Italian

two

girl are you

hanno

37.

two

are

American

(S)

book.

uno

III.

Here

(2)

(6)

pupil.

has

pupil.

book.

(4)

books. is

He

is

"

non

scolari

"

itali

scolari

position of the adjective.

the

EXERCISE

(1)

Gli

Si," piccola. Quanti libri. Gli u9mini hanno

due

Ho

Gli

scolari.

sono

"

II ragazzo

No,

scolari.

due

Sono

ragazza

ani.

scolare?

uno

libri.

scolari.

sono

ragazza

o?1

an

americana2

ragazza

libri it ali

ha

i"cco

due

inglesi. La

La

libro, "

un

scolare. Gl'

la

Ha

sono

ano.

ano

e

ragazzo

ani.

uno

itali

ani,

libro i tali

un

ragazza.

It ali

"

$

libro.

un

i t ali

sono

il ragazzo

scolare.

ha

Ipcco una

o.

No,

inglesi,il ragazzo

libri uno

an

?

Americana,1 ha

II ragazzo

ragazzo.

II.

in

should

in

Italian,

the

writing the

not

use

only accents,

diacritical

signs

used

pronunciation.

taking In translating arrange "

the

logical gender.

words

in order

as

etc.,

numbered.

in

monly com-

this

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

2IO

VOCABULARY. Note.

beginning

Before

"

of

present indicative

show, point" (68).

"to

strare, Like

change its form either in fern. in pi.) or destro, right,destri; fern, destra,

mostrare:

salutare,

dimorare,

good-

say

to

destre

live,dwell

to

altro, other, altri; fern, altra,

like,love

to

are,

salute,

to

morning am

verb

model

the

pupil should learn the of the first conjugation, mo-

guardare, to look il giorno,the day

altre

at

mprto, dead, morti; fern, morta, morte

bupno, good bupn1 giorno, good-day,

good-

mplto, much,

morning il

the

il fhime, the

country, i paesi river,i fhimi

1' indice, the

index

P

[belle utile, useful, pi. utili (fern,like

king the

il paese,

pcchio,the

eye,

the

la mano,

masc.) Emmanuel

Chiara, Clara

le mani

Italia, Italy

la tavola,

the

mio, my,

mine, miei;

Victor

Emmanu"le,

Vittprio

finger glipcchi

hand,

mplta, molte

terzo, third

picture,portrait

il ritratto, the

molti,

bel,1bello, beautiful; fern, bella,

teacher

master,

much,

very

fern,

many;

maestro,

il re, the

the

IV

Exercise

table, le tavole

1'

fern, mia,

Eurppa (fern.)

il Tevere,

the

Tiber

dove, where

mie

loro, their, theirs

(does

da, with,

not

at the

of,among

house

lCf. 115. EXERCISE

il mio

tavola.

libro.

no.

Dove

il libro

paese. 1' Italia.

altro libro.

un

il

ritratto

un

^ mprto

I.1

dimpra

nella

Si, guardo Ecco

Emmanuele

il libro

Ho

coll' indice

Ecco

mafstro. it alia

?

i loro

Hanno

il libro

Mostro

libro, Carlo

giorno, signpre

Bupn

maestro!

giorno,signor

"cco

scolari.

i miei

Saluto

IV.

d' Italia?

re

II Tevere

Dimpra

il

"

un

Dante

flume

re

libri ?

della

cogliocchi. un

Vittprio Dimpra

il libro

no,

Emmanuele?

in

Np,

Italia. Ama Dante

sulla

"

il

Guarda del

"

della ragazza.

dell' Italia.

in Italia?

"

it alia

re

i libri.

II libro

destra.

mano

Buon

signori.

Si, abbiamo

destra.

mano

Ipil libro d'

e

del

signor libro

un

Vittprio

re

Si, ^ mprto. L'ltalia

|

1' Italia?

" mprto.

bel

un

Si, amo E

la

ITALIAN

212

GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE

dell'

Hanno

Francesi.

libri

dei

vi

Non

del

degl'Italiani

|

gli scolari?

sulla

delle

gran

"

spno

America

le

calamaio

gli

per

lapis,

ma

i,

an e

dei

italiani?

dell' Non

Dante

inchigstro lapis

hanno

Sono

penne.

Si,

del

Qpere

con

scolari.

non

degl'

sono

I tali

dei Tedeschi

libri

Sono

un

Vi molti

anc'he

sono

dell' emisfero

paese paese.

vi

Si, Vi

tavola.

penne

dei

Si, hanno

un

in

vi

Si,

cosa?

anche

Ho

dentro.

"

npbili.

gP

America,

Nord?

Italiani

italiani

altra

in

Nord

del

nell' America

sono

"cco

siamo

No,

L' America

9vest.

Italiani Vi

Italia?

in

Siamo

VI.

Italiani

American Hanno dei libri italiani, i. No, sono gli scolari? della carta e dell' inchipstro. Io sono e anche degl'inglesi,:Hanno il ma"stro. II padre del ragazzo col libro inglese" anche maestro, il |pun buon maestro di lingua francese. Insegna francese,lingua Ha bella e molto music ale. scolari? degli Si,ha degli scolari ha scolari italiani. Non non americani, " a scuola adesso, " a

casa.

1="some

English it"j

EXERCISE

(i) paper

Have and

a

he

any

ink?

some

(4) I have some Dante (6) Was

books.

poet.

VII.

(2) No, pencils. (3) I have

you

Italian

of the a

ones."

some

He

ink;

books

too,

of Dante.

works

Frenchman?

(8)

no1

I have

(7) No, he

lived

in

I have

some

Italian

some

(5)

Dante

was

an

was

Italian;

Florence.

(9) Florence is a city of Italy. (10) It is in Tuscany, a province of Italy. Tuscan. was a a (11) Dante (12) He was politician. (13) He speaks as2 a2 poet and as2 a2 politician. (14) tie speaks for Italy. (15) Italyspeaks with the mouth of Dante. (16) They3 say3 that3 an

was

Dante

not

was 1 2

="I

noble.

a

have

Cf. 49

poet.

not

(3).

ink"

"

placing "not" 3

before

"have".

Si dice che.

VOCABULARY. il

piede,the foot

il leone, the

lion

il mare,

sea,

the

il fratello,the il

la

the directress direttrice,

la maestra, ocean

brother

direttore,the director

V "ssere,

the mistress, teacher

the

being

V insetto,the insect V autore, the author

EXERCISES.

la

la

la

le

spagnuolo, Spanish cinque, five for, since poichfc,

sponge le ali

the bee

1' ape

lunga,

lunghi;

human

umano,

settimana, the week

wing,

our

lungo, long, lunghe

lesson

the

sue

sua.

corto, short

lavagna, the blackboard, slate matita, the pencil,crayon

1 ala, the

la

nostro,

the bench

la spugna,

his, her, suoi, fan.

suo

seat

la lezione, the la

mountain

the

the s"?dia,

la panca, la

questo, this

pittura,1the picture

la montagna,

213

like, as

come,

study danno, they give (from dare, irr.)

studiare,

regina,the queen Alpe (or Alpi) the Alps ,

to

tutto, all 1

Cf.

Remark

ure, and

38,

VIII.

EXERCISE Sulla

mia

vi

tavola

grossi e piccoli,italiani,inglesi,

libri

sono

(c).

2

Lo "cco un libro di Shakespeare. francesi,spagnuoli, e tedeschi. V Ari9sto sono e autpri autore inglese, Dante Shakespeare " un Tutti E il Goethe? italiani. questi autori " un autore tedesco. sono

fa

si.

mo

ritratti di

Dante

ritratto

un

dell' Ariosto?

e

scuQle in questo edificio. panche, tavole e lavagne. Vi matite

e

una

scolari

diligenti1

Hanno

anche

Hanno

una

delle corta

Vi

spugna.

stiidiano. lezioni

lezione

libri. una

Studiano delle

geografia.

Dove

vi

delle

una

nei

lezipni di Hanno

dei

calamai.

lezione

sono

sedie,

sono e

penne

i

sono

scupla, vi

scuola

" dell' inchiostro

inglesi e di

in

nostra

anche

sono

nei

anche

Ha

Shakespeare.

Siamo Nella

molte

delle

dello

Si, sono

scupla, sulla tavola.

Nella

libri?

]"cco

lapis, Gli

italiana.

geografia. cinque lezioni

la settimana. 1

Observe

the

positionof

EXERCISE

the

adjective.

IX.

in1 it1. classrooms are (2) There (1) Here is our school. many (4) There are a great many (3) The scholars have Italian books. school. of the directress and the director tables. are (5) Here (7) The girl on the (6) They give the lessons to the scholars. also is diligent. two bench (S) The boys, her brothers, are diligent. (9) They have long English lessons and short Italian lessons. (10) Here are pictures of two kings of Italy, (n) Here

ITALIAN

214 is

picture

a

of

the

of the

(12)

Alps.

(13)

week.

GRAMMAR.

The

scholars

in school

are

five

days

mistresses)2

also.

(3)

(2) The

teachers

(1)

(masters

and

girls2have desks,3pencils,pens, books, paper, and ink. (15) They are4 studying4 geography. (16) Geography speaks of continents,countries, oceans, rivers,mountains, and cities. lion speaks of animals. (17) Zoology (18) The mals. is the king of ani like human (19) For animals, beings, have have not kings. (20) Bees kings. (21) Bees are queens, (22) Bees have insects, but insects are animals. wings, men (14)

The

have

feet.

and

boys

*

Omit.

Cf.

s

46.

they study"

Tavole.

sttidiano.

"

VOCABULARY. il

la

prontincia,the pronunciation la guancia, the cheek, le guance the shoe la Scarpa, [period susuperiore, superior, upper,

polso,the pulse the

i

mfdici il singolare,the singular il plurale,the plural il

mfdico,

il nome, il

the

doctor,

the thumb ppllice,

1'

ring-finger

duke,

monarch,

the

the figliuolo,

little

i

irregolare,irregular,irregolari difficili difficile, difficult,

mo-

dabbe, ne, the

V inimico, the

enemy, 1' ucc^llo,the bird 1' "st, the

povero,

of

the (lit.

V

forte, strong, forti

son

good man man good) the friend, amico, gliamici

1' uomo

roseo,

gl'inamici

rosy,

unghia, the nail, le unghie the leg la gamba,

extremity,

suna,

le

exception,1' ec-

cezioni P "rre, the "r", V la rfgola, the rule

"rri

rosei;

rosea,

rosee

no,

nessuni;

none,

nes-

nessune

savio, wise, savi; savia, savie

estremita

the

p"?vera,

antico, ancient, antichi; antica,

nessuno,

the

p9veri;

antiche

1'

V eccezione,

poor,

p9vere

east

1' estremita,

attaccare)

sinistre

narchi il

(p. part.

sinistro, left, sinistri; sinistra,

i duchi

Egiziano, the Egyptian

il monarca,

of

attaccati;

attaccate

attaccata,

the

il dito annulare, il duco, the

attached,

attaccato,

name

tastare, feel

(first conj.) imparare, to learn (first conj.) vedono vede, you see, pi. (from to vedere, see, irr.) si unisce, is united

itself"),from

(lit."unites

unire

EXERCISES. done

fatto, made,

of

(p. part,

always

se,mpre,

fare)

tre. three

had

(p. part, of avere) (p.part, of l^ggere) mostri, show (imperative of moavuto,

215

[narily usually, ordi-

ordinariarmente,

lftto,read

quale, what di, of

strare)

cio". that

is,that

is to say

.

qualche volta, sometimes often

spesso,

e

non

Vedono le

la mano?

al

braccia,

i

e

braccio

col

del

colle

membra

Io

polso del

I"cco le unghie. il pgllice. Quanti pglliciha? il

plurale di labbro.

Sono

eccezipni.

difficili. 5 dell' 1

Le

Hanno

tastano

cplle dita della

ordimano

" all'estremita dita.

Mpstri

gli ucce,llile dita?

Quale vero? Dite irregolare,non " irregolare. E il plurale di due a?

nome

un

anche

rfgole la

sinistro

si unisce

mano

mfdici lo

sono

attaccate

sono

La

dita?

hanno

eccezioni. dell'

proniincia

L'

italiano?

eccezioni La

sono

pronuncia

| difficile.

erre

the

Really

third

plural of

person to

persons

of

one

the

whom

Used

verb. third

the

in addressing

person

singular

used.

be

would

"

difficile

several

2

|

singolare di dita?

gambe

unghia (pi.le unghie) delle Impariamo2 i nomi

dito.

il

I

cinque

le

mani

gambe.

polso.

braccio

Le

Le

L'

unghie.

I

alle

il

tasto

superiori,e

forti.

sono

attaccati

pie,di il

II dito anulare?

braccia

sono

Tasto

de,stra. Non

Le

polso.

nariamente.

le

Sono

inferiori.

membra

alle

X.

II braccio?

le braccia?

true

than

piu...di,more... EXERCISE

Vedono1

is not

vero,

Means

as

wTell "let

learn"

us

as

"we

EXERCISE

learn ".

XI. (2)

(1)

are (1) Oxen strong. (2) They have large bones. (3) Oxen but men are are more stronger1 than men, intelligentthan oxen. are made (4) Many animals (5) Men have sometimes very strong. (6) The ancient gods of animals. Egyptians made gods of bulls

of

and

birds.

(8)

Do

is

friend

a

is poor. two

see

you

the

of my

man

and

cheeks.

ancient with

father's.

(12) Parsons

the

Greeks

large book

(10) He often

had

has

had

on

hundreds his knees? two

wives.

of

gods. (9) He

(11) He

(13) His little son has not (14) But he is a good man. (15) He has no2 he has friends. His little (16) daughter3 has many (17) Kings are not always good men, are they?4

pairs of shoes.

enemies rosy

(7) The

are

poor.

2l6

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

monarchs

(18) No, 5

about

are

always good That

men?

wise

three

the

not

(19)

men.

is to

the

say,

Have

three

you

kings

read

of the

East.6 1

from

Construct the

2

(with art.).

forti di

Piu

word

the

given

Non for

nessuni.

ha

son"

"little

by changing

ending.

4

it

="is

6

true?"

not

6

="of."

Cf. 62, Remark

1.

VOCABULARY.

rising,sunrise (the

il collo, the

neck

quickly lentamente, slowly gladly volenti^ri, davvero, indeed, truly altre volte, formerly

the

dog

fino a,

il levare, the

infinitive used

il cane, il

tive, substan-

sun

coraggio,the

courage

the

il sentimento,

Torino,

a

(a) (2))

cf. 51 il sole, the

as

sentiment

Turin

Spagna, Spain la porta, the door, gate la

the

la svoltata, la

strada, the

la via, the la spesa, la

the

essa,

soon,

far as, until

as

insi^me, together to counsel consigliare, pensare,

to

think

sperare,

to

hope lack

to

mancare,

to accompany

accompagnare,

sob

singhiozzare,to

road

cost

the tranquillity tranquillita,

noi, we,

se,

street-

street

way,

la vita, the

me,

turn,

[corner

subito,

life

us

gettare, to throw, cast restare, to remain, stay tornare,

return

to

picchiare,to

knock

dimenticare,

to

passeggiare,to

she

mi, me, myself himself, herself,itself

forget walk

viaggiare,to travel chiamare,

call

to

meet

giovane, young

incontrare,

oggi,to-day

lasciare, to leave, let

il mercoledi,

quando,

Wednesday

when

benchfc, although

subjunctive) cosi, so, thus perp,

but, however

fra, within,

to

(followed by

to

complain stare, to be (of health),3d pers. sing.ind. pres. sta, pi. stanno risppndere, to reply (irr.pret. risposi) piangere,to weep

lamentarsi,1

abborrire,

to

to

abhor

EXERCISES.

sentire, to feel

aprire,to open dire,

to

(irr.pret. dissi, I

say

217

capire, to understand

said)

tossire, to cough

flnire,to finish 1

un'

Mancava

alia porta.

in

Chiamerp

la

Cf. 96 and

XII.

quando partii. Mia Io, singhiozzando, le 2 gettai le

che

mostra

seggiavo

la

Ma

Io

fra

braccia

restava

ma

me,

Coraggio!

Incontrai

alia

un

Picchierp?

porta.

no, dicevo

parti subito!

la via.

per

la

madre

te! Comin-

con

parlare.

casa,

Ma

aprire?

3

di

temeva

s"i upmo,

amico.5

mio

parto! Resterp

guardare

ad

lentamente

Npn

a

102.

del sole

lei,e

4

istrada

mamma

stare,

strada

anche

piangere

momento

lascia

levar

dissi: No, mamma!

e

a3

ciava

al

pra

accompagnp

al collo

was

Si is the reflexive pronoun.

EXERCISE

mM

I

"ra,

E

svoltata

d'

mi

np, pasuna

domandp, partite? Si, risposi, parto per la Spagna. Capisco, ma perch" npn siete condi le grandi temessi tfnto partire? Viaggerei sfmpre io, se non un

"

come,

"

spese.

Lascerfi pggi

quando

vi

6

p"nso

la

adesso

finisco

sfnto, perp, sfmpre d' allpra. Abbprro Perdiamo

Cosi,non

3

for mi

M' Le For

lamentarmi.

senza

dire7:

per

Capisco

il momento

Com'

.

.

in casa,

before

E mi

bino del bam-

E

al collo

.

the

of

use

a

benche

vowel.

a

="

partire.

davvero,

sciocco!

ero

i sentimenti

ancora

del

E

"

a consiglier^i viaggiassimplto quando e,ra gipvane. mplto tutti,perd"ndo la tranquillitadella vita di casa. viaggiamo piu!

tutti di restare

2

e

casa,

lo stesso!

1

"

"

"

around and

her

neck".

di before

Cf. 98 (2).

dependent infinitive cf.

a

211

(2),

(1).

212 4 5

for strada

Istrada "A

friend

because

6

of mine."

ORAL

(1) Quanto

tempo

mancava

ragazzo? (2) Chi V accompagnp

(3)

Che

(4)

Ha

(5)

Perche

cpsa

faceva

preceded by

alia

"Of

Cf. 36

in. 7

it."

al

levar

del

sole

pprta?

part^ndo, e

che

cpsa

diceva?

np?

(7) Cpsa

ancora

voleva

qualche tempo

fare?

Bv

(b). saving." '""

EXERCISE.

parlato la mamma?

(6) Restava

"

Cpsa diceva

in istrada? fra se1?

quando

parti il

218

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

(8) Chi incontrp (9) Che domandp

(10)

Che

(n)

Perche

dove?

e

amico?

P

risppse2

cosa

npn

parte

? 1' amico

per la

Spagna? viaggiare?

Lei la casa per (12) Lascerebbe le grandi spese? (13) Teme del (14) Capisce i sentimenti del partire? moment o (15) Ha viaggiato mplto? volentieri? (16) Viaggerebbe ancpra

ragazzo?

Abborrisce

il

Viaggerebbe volentiericon

me?

(17) Quando 1

="to

7

From

partiremo? himself."

risppndere preteritethird XIII.

EXERCISE

(2)

sunrise.

before

hour

singular.

person

"

I

sleep well, and so I knocked. hear when did not (3) Who accompanied you ! to you the house? (5) Oh, I (4) Your brother; he2 travelled with me.3 him13 in Turin, did4 you4 not4? You met understand. (6) When Turin? did you5 leave (7) I left6 Turin yesterday,but I left home 2 (8) I hope that you will stay with us a 2 long 7 on Wednesday. time. (9) I shall stay a week, then I shall travel as far as Rome. to us. (11) Do not (10) Let us hope, then, that you will return (12) I shall not forget. (13) I shall show forget your friends. and you8 that I do not forget. (14) Let us speak of your mother of your (15) Yes, they are well. brothers;are they well? (16) My 9 well. but she feels mother (17) Shall we take 10 a 10 coughs a little, walk10 together? (18) Yes, I will gladly take a walk. (19) My will accompany is a us.11 brother (20) There dog; do not be of2 him.13 afraid12 (21) I am not afraid of him. (22) My sister she does15 not fear them.16 used14 to be afraid14 of dogs, but now shall not to the house now. (24) We (23) Let us return go out any2 more to-day. (1)

It is still an

1

T'

5

Use

second

8

Use

partirefollowed

9

before

Supply

person

si before

12

="

fear."

14

="

feared

lb

="

fears

2

verb.

3

Omit.

formerly."

8

"

=

10

verb.

more."

Is it not

="

plural preterite. 7 much." by di. 13

no

4

Me.

Use

="

n

walk."

Lp before

Ti before

Ci before

verb.

imperfect. 16

Li before

true?"

verb.

verb.

verb.

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

220

e dagli altri due trhimviri agli estremi, fu da Ottavio dei soldati condotta una col9nia militare a Firenze, e a ciascuno 5 Essendo numerosi porzione di terreno. venne assegnata una stibito molto piu grande. Vi spno questi coloni la citta 9 divenuta molte traccie delle edificazioni del periodo. Cost nel lupgo ancora

"ra

romana

dei Peruzzi v' era un e piazzettedi San Simone anfiteatro o an r o m Firenze,fin dai primi tempi, ebbe molti diritti, di dipendemza assoluta da Roma, e le C9se di stato "ra pen) in uno in male. Fu alia m9rte dell' imperatore Teodosio andavano Roma fra i su9i due diviso che V imp^ro venne figli. Fir"nze "ra 395 dove fu signore Onorio. della parte Occidentale naturalmente dove

9ggi

le

sono

.

city of ours." 4 Read hold it as certain that." "We quaranta. Third person singularpreteriteindicative of venire.

1

2

Cf. 36.

3

5

dear

"This

ORAL

Cf. 251. Cf. 81

EXERCISE.

citta antica Firenze? (1) % una (2) Che C9sa va perd"ndo? (3) ^ interessante la st9ria dell' origine di Fir"nze? a Firenze (5) Da chi fu condotta la col9nia militare 40

avanti

(6)

Ch'

Gesu

(b).

nell'

anno

Cristo?

"ra allora la condizione

i col9ni? (7) I"rano numerosi (8) " divenuta grande la citta

della

di

repubblica romana?

Firenze?

del periodo? (9) Dove? (10) Vi "ra un anfiteatro romano? (11) E*a indipend^nte la citta? diviso 1' imp^ro romano? (12) Quando venne (13) Di che parte e,ra Firenze? (14) Chi fu signore della parte occidentale? la st9ria dell' origine della i Fiorentini (15) Dimenticheranno Sonvi

ancora

traccie delle edificazioni

citta?

EXERCISE

XV.

l the history let us talk about (2) Then sleepy? No! of Florence. (3) I should be2 very glad to listen.2 (4) I have been in Florence not long,3 but I love it.4 (5) It is an old city,but Columbus old city when it is changing5 very6 much. an (6) It was 7 a baby. was long history. (S) We should (7) So it has had a very

(1)

have

Are

to

you

study

a

long time

(in order) to

(1) know

(3) its

(4)

(2)

historywell.

(9)

A

EXERCISKS.

Roman

colony

there

were

into

that the

but

that8

who does

who

and

"

Etruscans

1

from

were

has

will

was

be, let

Florence?

Cambiandosi.

6

Omit.

We

have

the first colonists of Fiesole

spoken

knows

Fiesole? (14)

(15) FJ"sole was,

but

"

And

Florence

hope!

us

time."

"much

=

5

city,and

in Florence

="of."

3

(13)

(u) Listen! They emigrated

Romans, Greece.

Etruscan

an

been

not

from

were

(10) But

Octavius.

by

not

were

Fiesole.

know

not

Florence

to

city who

Italy. (12),Fiesole

of Florence

is

the

in

men

It is believed

brought

was

221

7

="

4

L'

listen

gladly/'

before

rendering of

the

For

2

8

Molto.

verb. "

is

"

cf. foregoingexercise.

Che.

VOCABULARY. Io str"pito,the

noise

il genitore,the

parent

il

piacere,the

pleasure as piacere, a favor, please

per il

qui, here li,there

cugino,

the

la zia, the

volere, I

cousin

la

the

favor;

grazie, grace, thanks grazie, quiet tranquillo, piccino,little,little child tan to, such

a,

da,

thou) giocare (giuocare) to play rincrescere (impersonal) to ,

.

at

be

to

good, quiet

(a person)

Parla

Lei?

No, parla lui. Nemmeno

tanto

strfpito.

tu,

Carlino, vieni

"

cugino

ride

ridono

di se,

non

laugh

star(e) buono,

.

EXERCISE

amico

for

di,to be sorry

ridere, to laugh

either .

be

sorry

ridere di, to

nor

to

vuoi

come

rincrescere

niente, nothing nemmeno,

to

,

much

so

(irr.voglio,vuoi, wishest) (irr.vieni,come

thou

wish,

venire,

aunt

wish

to

venire

di te.

con

con

di me?

me.

"

piacere che non voglio E Voi, bambini, state tranquilli!

zia, non Non

fa

Si, si, vieni

Enrico, voglio giocare saresti contento

di

loro

Dica

Cosi.

me.

No, no,

"

non

io.

XVI.

con

vederli1?

per

Starai ride

buono

di

niente.

Io tu.

lui.

Oh,

Mi

Essi

me!

anche "

adesso

"

vado Io

rincresce.2

"

ridono,

dalla

no,

cattivo!

tu? ma

mamma,

vedo E

II

li il mio i

genitpri,

Ebbene,

venite

ITALIAN

222

voialtri

GRAMMAR.

buona, studierp Grazie, signora,Lei " molto di lpro. lui che " contento. Vedete, piccini? $

"

io,senza

bene

adesso

"

1

Li

2

"

them"

="

I

a

"

sorry"

am

"

conjunctive form. a conjunctive form. XVII.

EXERCISE is

(2) It is they, not I; children,it talking so much? is you, isn't it? Be to study. (3) You, Charlie! quiet! I want (4) Be quiet now, please, you (=thou) and he and all of you! (6) The two little girls are very (5) He is quiet,and so is she. but good. (7) Yes, they are good you! (8) Mrs. Baretti,where I? I are am (9) here; don't you see me1? (10) We are all you? do you do? And here; talk with us. (11) How your brother, how is he? (12) I am well, but he has been ill. (13) Oh you poor were thing2! (14) We speaking of him yesterday, of you and of for him. him. so (15) I am (16) Let us speak to them sorry about him. They 3 will be so sorry too. Who

(i)

"

1

Non

mi 3

vede

mi

"

Translate

being '

'

a

them

to

2

conjunctive form. "

Exercise

Cf

.

Omit.

XVI

.

.

VOCABULARY. la voce, ad

the voice

alta voce,

assicurare,

aloud

poco

well

(p9') little ,

gia,already

preso) EXERCISE

Dov'

"

il libro?

excuse

"

but

ma,

assure

spiegare,to explain dare, to give (irr.) (a thing), (irr. sapere, to know I so, know) potere, to be able (irr.posso, I can, puQ, he can) piacere,to please (irr.and often mi piace, used impersonally I like) prfndere, to take (irr.p. part.

sight a sight prima vista,at (first) la lettura,the reading V immagine, the picture,cut interessante,interesting solamente, only ebbene, well, very allora,then

to

scusare,

la vista,the

to

"

Eccolo.

"

Datemelo.

P9'. Oh, signor maestro, np! Non 1' ho, letto. E perch^ no? "

"

XVIII.

La ne

"

prego

Grdzie! di

I19 avuto

Ne

parleremo un scusarmi, poich^ npn il

tempo.

"

Ebbene,

EXERCISES.

^ccovene non

altro

un

assicurarvi

p9sso

bene

l"ggerload

farebbe

alta

anche

sia

interessante.

leggeremo

Lp

di poterne

cont^nto

sono

" piu facile,solamente, che

vista.

gerlo a prima Come

che

223

e

voce, lui.

capire

allora

Ma

insi^me molto

avendolo

non

S9 che

e

ve

da

me

lo

potrete Ifg-

spieghierp. "

solo!

fratello

vpstro

letto,

Vi

fara

1' ascoltera.

Gli

"

la lettura ad alta voce farp volentieri, mi Non Le piace, signorina? Si, signore,mi piace molto. piace Nostanto, e ne farp la mia parte. Avete visto le b$lle immagini? signpre.1 Allora guardatele. Esse spno davvero bflle. Mostratele anche ad Ernesto. Non " qui? Chiamalo, Carlo, per piacere. Ma ad"sso dpv' ^ il libro. Dammelo, ti prego, glielo Oh, eccolo! mostrer^.

b"ne

a

"

Lo

"

"

"

"

"

"

1

"

for np

Frequently used EXERCISE

(1)

Show

me

him

say:

1

I

hands.

(2)

XIX. Here1

they

(3)

are.

Show

them

showing them to you. (4) Take the book. (5) I have taken it. (6) Give it to them. (7) They are showing him have the them. already seen pictures. (8) We (9) Show them to me. (10) I have seen them, and I shall show them to him them and to her. to them at once. (11) I will show (12) Show it. me some. (14) I have not seen talking about (13) We were it. I told her so, but she would2 him. listen to not (15) I knew them seen me. (16) Have to-day? (17) Yes, and I have you (18) I have talked to her about it,but it does not spoken to them. please her. to

and

your

signore.

Use

am

2

"cco.

Cf. 82.

VOCABULARY. la

grandfather the il nippte, grandson the il gusto, pleasure,delight the

il npnno,

il in il in

the

manner,

mpdo

da,

in such

fpndo,

the

bottom

mpdo,

the

way

la carezza,

manner

la

as

the

tiratina,

1' assenza,

the

1' arditezza, the

the

course

certo, certain

[scolding

caress

contention,

absence boldness

respectful rispettpso,

study

the evening la cpsa, the thing, matter,

demand

the

heart

lo studio, the

mild-

ness

la domanda,

at

fpndo,

il cprso,

a

dolcezza, the sweetness,

la sera,

rosso,

affair

matto,

red

mad,

immoderate

ITALIAN

224

GRAMMAR.

lively

vispo, merry,

the

stesso, same,

liberare,to

very

affinche, that, in order

that

mai,

"

pra,

seek free

observe,

to

osservare,

to apply applicarsi,

never

contentarsi,to

now

allentare,

loosen

to

contrariare,

to

accomiatarsi,

lower,

to

sbacciuccare, to ripigliare,

to kiss

down

cast

self

one's

take

to

leave

part, interrotto) proseguire, to continue p.

repeatedly

to repent pentirsi,

resume

EXERCISE la vpstra assenza-disse

Durante

content

self

stringere,to press, draw close fingere,to feign interrpmpere,to interrupt (irr.

vex

saltare,to jump esclamare, to exclaim abbassare,

one's

become

farsi,to

to throw

buttare,

notice

crollare, to shake

durante, during npn

to

cercare,

XX. il npnno

ai tre

gipvani-parlerp io

pp' di cpse fiorentine a' npstri ragazzi. 0 che se ne ricprda Lei di certi studj? domandp Adolfino arditezza con rispettpsa: poco II npnno abbasso glipcchi' si fece un pp' rosso e disse con dolcezza ad Adolfo,il quale gia s' era inconsiderata. pentitodella sua domanda me ne meno ricprdo. Ai miei tempi si studiavano Si,figliuplo, cpse, ma quelle ppche s' imparavano bene, in mpdo da npn dimenticarle mai piu. Oh, frano altri tempi quelli! Ora Ppvero signor Leoppldo! Npn gli fu possibile proseguire la tiratina. Adolfo saltato sulle ginpcchia, gli aveva sua gli era un

"

"

le braccia

buttate stato

gusto

da

cpllo e II npnno

bambino.

un

di liberarsi un

al

quellecarezze

matto,

del

e

lo sbaciucchiava

se

fingendo d' tumultupse;

si sarebbe

ben

esser

guardato

tutto,

come

fosse

se

contrariato, cercava in fpndo ci aveva ma di allentare

le braccia

disse il signor di vpi vispo nipotino. ^Se il npnno sara1 contento i " mplto p r o b a b 1 e ch' io vi faccia venir Leone, accomiatandosi da me Oh a paio di giprni. Torneremo Firfnze insieme. per un J esclamarono al oh bene! i due strettisi e lp bene, fanciulli, npnno, di la il versazioni, sera stessa affinch^ ripigliasse cprso quelle conpregarono "

"

"

"

"

cosi presto interrotto. 1

2

'

'

having pressedup close

to

' '

.

1

02.

Cf. 229. EXERCISE

(1) (2)

Cf of stringersi. ,past participle

"

"

Oh

XXI.

another) about the affairs of Florence." (to one to one another) yes, grandfather,let us talk together (i.e.,

Let

us

talk

EXERCISES.

studied

do

(3) "Well, boys,

them."

about

Florentine

about

history?

225 remember

you

"

(4)

"

We

what

do

you

remember

not

have it as

do,1grandfather ", said little Adolph. (5) " I have noticed that ", rather said their red. grandfather. (6) Adolph (7) He grew (8) More things are studied now", said he. repented his remark. shook his head. (10) But Adolph jumped on his (9) The old man you

"

knees

and

himself

threw

from

pleasure

those

Mr.

apply

is

Leo

ourselves 2

back."

1

(13)

with

Well

taking leave, let to

the

2

Omit.

he

But

old

study things

of

(14)

us

go

be

"when

Let

with

us

"

let

go

him."

Florentine

cannot

Translate

"

(15)

in

shall

we

a

us

away "

history when done

freed

man

really took

", said the grandfather, have."

we

(11) The

(12)

caresses.

"

what

"These

(16)

his neck.

about

arms

stormy

them.

in

ourselves since

his

great tent con-

now; will

We we

come

moment."

back."

come

VOCABULARY

the

il danno,

cost

p9polo,the

people,nation,

il potere, the

race

power

caso.

unlawful illegale,

barbaro, barbarous, barbarian

il

famigliare, the

case

mate familiar, inti-

friend

il verso, il

the

invader

il Franco,

[age

mind, heart,

cour-

the

the

Longobard

Frank

1a

gente, the

la

signoria,the rule, lordship

la

race,

nation

salvatichezza, the

wildness,

rudeness

la

pieta,the piety grandezza, the greatness vivacita, the vivacity

la

violfnza,

la la

vfrso,

subito,

towards soon,

solo, alone,

verse

Longobardo,

analogo, analogous sfortunato, unfortunate

1' invasore, the the

Germany

restio, restive

il

V animo,

arms

la Germania,

scellerato, wicked

kingdom il veleno, the poison il sogge,tto, the subject the

fall

the

br"ve, brief, short

the

il regno,

la caduta, le armi,

fact

il fatto, the il

damage, loss,

the violence

quickly only

prima, at first indi, afterward, from

there

(or come) out cade*re, to fall (irr.p. part, caduto, pret. caddi, etc.) tggliere (torre),to take, take uscire,

away,

to

go

to carry

distruggere,to

off

or

away

destroy (irr. p.

part, distrutto) ammansirsi,

to

grow

mild

226

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

to

fermarsi,

stop

to

passare,

lodare,

pass

"rano

Longobardi,

i

gente pagan

a

Guidati

superiore dell' di Lombard! verso

rispose il

"

dal loro f

la

eroce

to

guide

fondare,

to

found

XXII.

npnno?

caro

usciti1 dalla

bugn vf cchio,

Alboino,

re

Adolfo.

domandg

"

"

si fermarono

che

fatto

ha

Firenze.

che Ma

in

parte

gran

breve

fu

cadde

dello

il regno si narra,

da

nella il

conservato

subito

|prano

"

Pannonia.

prima

Italia, per questo e indi, passati gli Appennini, a;

Toscana,

Presere

tell

praise

to

guidare,

EXERCISE Chi

narrate,

intitolare,to entitle,call

keep

to

conservare,

to

narrare,

approach

avvicinarsi, to

self

one's

arrichirsi,to enrich

parte nome

si avvicinarono in

loro

potere.

scellerato

Alboino; famigliare, lo

veleno, datogli, contenta! dopo soli cinque anni di signoria. Ne sono la feroce salvaticol tempo s' ammansi esclam.9 V Adalgisa. Ma lodati per pieta,valore re e dei Longobardi ed ebbero chezza granle cadde armi dei La loro dominazione d' animo. dezza per Franchi, molta vivacita altri pQpoli barbari domandc? con Scusi, n9nno, i Franchi Adolfino avevano so non Carlomagno, per re il fa mo un esclam9 V Adalgisa, divenendo figliodel re Pipino? E, nQnno Manzoni intitolata la bella tragfdia di Alessandro P9' rossa dei Longobardi, non Si. hi parla della caduta A dele " vero? Oh i bei versi! Oh la bella tragfdia,n9nno! poich^

il

come

tglsedi vita

un

suo

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

1

As

a

collective

gente

EXERCISE

may

take

a

"

plural modifier.

XXIII.

was talking to his grandsons about the (i) The good old man attentive. (2) They were listening,they were1 Longobards. of the wicked (3) A large part of Italy had fallen into the power drawn beautiful to near Tuscany, (4) They had Longobards. dominion, being2 founded (5) But their unlawful upon Tuscany. (6) The Franks, a race come destroyed by violence. violence, was from from into Italy. times France forth in ancient Germany, came heathen no were longer a people. (8) They had (7) The Franks and a a king. very wise4 king called Charlemagne, a great3 man of restive wild his ferocity subjects. (10) The (9) He tamed the of Italy, but called the liberators liberation Franks were invasion and in analogous cases, only a new in this case means,

228

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

fronto

tra

vero?

Ha

discprso

grandissimi upmini, tra sentito 1' an^ddoto del Sant'

su

miei, era un grandissimo

santo,

gran

Ma

santo.

Ecco

?

Antonio

frate il

San

e

sommi

discprso.

Pietro, cari

Sant' Antonio

ORAL

poeti,e difficile, npn faceva predicatore che

!

.

wh

.

"

San

.

wh

.

II.

instincts.

generous

(3) (4)

Emmanuel

And

he

(2)

indeed

was

.

.

fiuuiiiu!!

was

great man,

a

is often

He

a "

called

honorable

more

certi santi?

XXV.

EXERCISE Victor

.

EXERCISE.

(i) Chi " 1' autore della Divina Comm"dia? (2) Ha scritto il Racine delle comm"die? un fampso autore tedesco. (3) Nomini (4) Chi I piu grande, il Goethe o il Racine? (5) l" facile il confrpnto tra upmini grandissimi? (6) Era facile pel frate predicatoreil confrpnto tra (7) Raccpnti 1' anfddoto del suo discprso.

(1)

un

Paolo, fratelli fratelli miei, era un .

.

"

than

good the

a

man,

man

honorable

certain

of

king." kings.

other

concerning the origin of his welland d' Azeglio,a poet and a politician, known name. (5) Massimo of Spartan a man character, had a profound affection for the able monarch. one (6) He remarked day to the king: "Honoryoung in the world." (7) It would kings have not been numerous be beautiful to begin the series, would it not? (S) Victor Emmanuel than was (9) He monarchs, but wiser than most. younger many faith to the he meant. said more than never (10) He had sworn more was Statute, and his word precious to him than gold, more dear than power. (12) The (11) I shall keep my word," he said. is the

Here

related

anecdote

"

word

of

word

was.

a

smaller

(13)

man

than

The

wisest

Victor men

Emmanuel

is

precious

as

as

his

feel that.

XXVI.

EXERCISE

(For this and the following exercises no special vocabulary is given. The pupil is expected to use the general vocabulary found and the table of irregularverbs, pp of the book at the end 198 and sq.) 245 Roma, Caro

2

marzo

ptto giprni l^ttera 1' ho ricevuta potuto nsppnderti presto perche mi spno fatto male alia La

"cco

1900.

Carlo,

cpme.

tua

cara

II babbo

ha

un

cosi

bel

temperino,

mentre

fa. mano.

che

Npn

hp Ed

il mio

EXERCISES.

"

un

finalmente

1' ha

detto

ho

parecchie V9lte: Pap" i miei lapis. E temperino, voglio aguzzare

il tuo

mio, prestami

Gli

orrore.

vero

un

orrore,

229

dato

mi

tagliatosubito 1' indice Ma II nostro adesso sta della destra.1 quasi bene. viaggio mi ha fatto tanto ai miei piacere. Anche genitori. La citta di Roma mi piace moltissimo, coi suoi vecchi palazzi,colle sue grandi vie e me

in

e

mano

"

spno

"

bel sole sopra

suo

line

e

al

me,

Santita

Leone

carrozza

in

Campidoglio XIII

potuto vederlo. Altavilla vostra.

|

da

Sua

letto.

Buona

il

condotti,

le sorel-

fu

che

detto

Sua

passeggiata in precisamente la sua naturalmente abbiamo non sue guardie ma II signor andati dai tuoi amici gliAltavilla.

re

Abbiamo

per

Ci ha

noi.

Anche

gentile. parlato di te e tanto

Ho

cugini?

Maesta

Ci

al Vaticano.

e

bupno

moglie "

i tuoi

visto

molto

Abbiamo

simpatici. stanno

Siamo

stato

-Sua

"

ci ha

faceva

alle

mezzo

zio Andrea

Lo

tutto.

visto

tante

visto

belle

cose

che

^

figlimi

famiglia.

tua

abbiamo

ma

mia

casa

i loro

dei libri per loro.

comprato

Umberto,

della

detto

"

col

Non la

ne

casa

spno

Come

abbiamo camera

sua

stance

sono

notte! II tuo

affmo.2

amico, Enrico.

1

2

destra.

=mano

the ordinary Italian abbreviation. affettionatissimo,

For

XXVII.

EXERCISE

little sister with him? is your brother? (1) Where (2) Is my (3) I have lost my little sister. (4) Have book, my pen, you my his ing lookand my finger. (6) I am pencils? (5) My friend has cut for my mother. (7) Your parents are not here, they are with is here, but I hats ? their friends. are our (8) Where (9) Mine do not see (11) No, it is his. (10) Is not this your hat? yours. and his wife. His Excellency the Governor seen (12) I have (13) I of your like her face. (14) Is this one (15) Yes, the two dogs? hand. book a (16) Give me (17) Have dogs are mine. you your under arm? (19) Thy (18) Yes, but it is yours, not mine. your here. friends (feminine) are XXVIII.

EXERCISE II libro ancora

altro che

un

che

po\

cerchi "

Non

servira,solamente devo

avere

per

non

c'

". "

Non

ne

sono

sicuro, lo cercher^

No, nessun puoi1 adoperarne qualche altro? quello li. Bisogna ben2 trovarlo, | quello "

preparare

la mia

lezione.

Chi

1' ha

avuto

ITALIAN

230 1'ultimo? a

cui lo

GRAMMAR.

quello che me imprestastii"ri1'altro? Sara3

1' avra3

fatto4 visita questa mattina.

ha

perduto. Chi " quell'amico " il figliodella signora la quale ci

Avra3

"

mai

dimenticato

di

r^nderlo?

"

possibile, glielodomanderp, e se " davvero lui che 1' ha, sempre Chi non npn glieloimpresterp piu per un p"zzo. pe,nsa a r^ndere dovrebbe5 non non pigliarin pr^stito. Ma guarda dalla finestra, " Ma lui che vifne adesso? Me si,e col mio libro sotto il braccio. se il libro perduto fosse mio. Buon n? rallegroper te come giorno, Enrico, "ccoti il libro che mi hai imprestato. Te ne ringrazio e ti di perdonarmi la mia dimenticanza. Avr"i6 dovuto8 riporprfgo visita di mio cugino, il che m' ha tartelo gia i"ri. Ma una hg avuto ieri. in casa fatto restare tutto Non Quale cugino "ra? lp conosci ch' di da noi P anno tu. $ fratfllo quello "ra scorso, quello che da fui Ma cui il cane morso. aveva con tutto cip "ra un bel cane, E di chi parlando quello,vero? cani, di " quello che ho visto nel vostro Mio giardino? 5 mi"" n9n I v?r0 cn? I bello? padre me "

"

"

"

"

"

"

dato.7

1' ha Vieni

con

le

Tutte e

me

lo

che

cose

mi

vedremo, quel

da7

belle.

sono

cane!

Chi

vuol

Ha

gusto

vederlo

lui!

venga8

noi.

con

1

the 2

3

"Can

not"

you

"

second

irregularpotere. must really." of probability Future (2). Made", from fare. "I ought to have."

4

B 8

present of

"I

"

229

singular indicative

person

"it

"

"Let

him

come."

See

venire

EXERCISE

(1) Who

is

have

must

8

"Ought

7

From

not

dare.

been

he

to

borrow.

See

who."

Cf.

"

tables.

in tables.

XXIX.

(2) It is I, Henry, and nobody else;1 did you think it was? who (3) I thought it was 2 my cousin whom been I have expecting. (4) I am glad to see you; I wanted3 to1 That5 boy who is in our class now. speak to you about that new (5) thin? one5 who is so pale and (6) Yes, that is the one. (7) We fortunate than ought6 to4 do something for him, we who are more he. speaking about him to my mother, and she (8) My father was his mother. said she would (9) He who does not think go to7 see does not deserve to8 be happy himself, of others of the misfortunes it who was was as our (10) Who copy-book says. asking you yesterdayabout that other poor boy, the one with9 the ragged coat? knocking?

EXERCISES.

(n)

said

John noticed

has 1

="

3 7

coat, but

that

4

Voleva.

2

Use 6

Omit. 8

A.

had

nobody

other."

nobody

mia

siamo

mamma,

Rosina,

che

spero

nella

ragazzetta sette

mente

molto

classe

terza

"

anni.

un giovinotto,2

e

anche

uomo!

qui

molto

Oh

"

belle

tante

di

e

Naldo

li.

sei

1

Uomo+-ino "You

3

Why

==

have

do

is

call

your

a

un

bambinticcio

v^glia d' imparare, Ah d' omino!1 "ria che capisco! Oh la giacchetta e i calzoncini. fatto un Lei si | dunque sta?

chiasspne

"

ha

ma

dai del lei3?

mi

Perch^

mammetta!

"

a

young

lei,not

me

man

tu?

a' calzoncini. e

ma

vero, Naldinol

"

Non sono

Vieni

(lit."have See

yourself").

made

91.

XXXI.

EXERCISE

(1) Here (2) Leave

piu

omino.

become

you

Tu

prossima-

avra

un

alia tua giacchetta e Ma, carino, | per far onore del papa, i calzoncioni cosi lunghi come sono abbastanza lunghi per le tue gambette. Bravo me colla sorellina e con per vedere gliuccelletti.

2

cara

Sulla le

anc9ra

e

Si,

cosine!

studio, perfino

guardi pietruzza Ricciardetto e adesso, che

vero

".

campagna?

che

piccino E adesso! poverino. Eccolo lp il primo giorno che indossa Come riverito,signor Rinaldo! "

alia

arrivati

d' osservazione

piccole erbicelle,perfino

school

XXX.

impareremo la

"of

"Translate

Di.

prpprio

meritevole

"

tutto

terra

e

the

of it.

spoken

ever

in

boy

subjunctive imperfect. fi Dovremmo. Quel tale.

EXERCISE Oh

(12) Every

it.

about

something

231

let pretty-little-stream; big-ugly-books!1 (3) The

us

walk

trees

on

are

the

bank.

getting-green.2

yesterday it to-day! (5) was nasty-weather! (6) Are you pretty-well4to-day? (7) I am (9) You are also rather(S) You are plump. quite well,5thanks! father. will be a big-man, like your (11) Here is tall. (10) You (13) He pretty-little-dog.(12) He loves his little-master. your at the dear-little-flowers! is afraid of the country-boy.8 (14) Look is your little-dog? (16) He is running away,7 the (15) But where little-rascal! poor(17) He is afraid of the peasant-boy's big-stick, bad road! a (19) Full of ugly-stones! little-thing! (18) What very-fast.8 (21) Call him, deariel (20) The dog is running away (4)

How3

beautiful

the

weather

is

And

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

2J2

(22) (24)

will

He Let

hear. I0

rest

us

the

on

now

actio.

2

4

Bfne with

-ino.

5

6

Contadino

with

9

Omit

1

Use

"woman",

a

9

little-old- woman

The

(23)

(25)

short- grass

Translate

I

a-

am

are

3

Che.

one. 8

7Scappare. using only the appropriate word suffix.

diminutive

little tired.

greenish".

'

with

B"ne

bringing him.

is

Prestissimo.

from

formed

Vfcchio. 10

Reflexive. VOCABULARY. Pres

Infinitive.

dire,to

say,

uscire,1to

volere, to wish 1

piaciuto

parvi parrQ piacqui

uscito

uscii

voluto

volli

paruto

out

go

with

Compounds

"

All forms

required

or

parso

fssere.

XXXII.

EXERCISE Note.

dissi

detto

seem

Future.

Preterite

Part.

Past

dicemdo

speak, tell

parere,1to appear, piacere,1to please

Part.

are

to be

constructed

from

those

given

The given in 179. present participleand future when not given are regular. (3) They have gone (1) He was saying. (2) It1 pleases me. out. to me. (6) Will you (4) It had seemed (5) They wished.2 out ? (8) They said. (9) (7) Wishing and having wished. go (n) They might go out (10) They would They had said. say. (imperfect subjunctive) (12) They appeared.2 (13) They would out? to me. they go (15) Would (14) It appears appear. wished3 it. (18) They (17) Did you say2 so? (16) Pleasing me. said I have so.3 (21) (20) It has pleased me. (19) He will go out. Would it to you? (23) Did they wish it? (24) (22) Does it seem (imperfect subjunctive). please you? (25) It might please you She has out. to say it. (27) (26) They wished gone

by

the

rules

.

Omit.

Express

in two

Signora Carniola, direttrice

centemente

p9vero e

aveva

questo bambino fatto

fatto:

di 9U0 in

m9do

aveva

anni di

='*I

have

said

it.'

XXXIII.

EXERCISE La

3

ways.

con

di

visto i

scu9la, mi

una

in

piedi

una

che

procurargliene

delle uscivano

un

paio

raccontava sue

classi

dalle dal

reun

scarpe,

Patronato

EXERCISES.

scarpe,

rosso

trice,

commossa

II

soldi.

bambino

II

scolastico.

di

gioia, ringraziava

sul

i tacchi

batt^ndo

il

giorno dopo

bambino

pavimento,

quelli buoni

di

vie,na

ringraziare la

a

di biscotti. "Ma si

il

bambino,

questo

e

la

gentilepensiejo

del

quale

dice

donna

ppvera

tutto

mano.

rive-

tante

con

di scarpe,

biscotti la

"

madre

direttrice, pacchetto

non

saperne

conffssa

rosso

due

cont^nto, in

pacchettino

un

paio

del

la

b-scotti?":

il

interroga

del

ringraziare

che

con

tutto

pacchettino quattro qualche giorno Dopo

!

queste la diret-

che

nel

direttrice

vuole

scherm^ndosi, la nulla:

i canarini

per

Direzione

in

le manda

Signora direttrice,la mia madre re,nze." La signora apre e trpva "

ricevere

riconosc^nza, gli regalp

va e

a

effusione

tanta

con

ingfnua

sua

Direzipne

in

chiamato

della

233

che

li

comprati lui con i due soldi della direttrice. Gli "ra parsa la riconosce-nza: non di dimostrar la sua un forma fiore, piiiadatta i due n| un' immagine, che avrejbbe pure potuto acquistare con i biscottini, che ess^ndo la cosa piu desiderata per lui,gli soldi,ma E dovesse questa gentilezza "sserlo anche per la direttrice. pareva della madre, perche gli sembrava voluto fare a nome egli 1' aveva aveva

"

piu importante di lui. Cosi persona iniziativa. e al piacere della sua

partisseda una rinunciato per l"iall' onore ch'

m"glio aveva

essa

EXERCISE

ORAL V

(1

Chi raccontava

(2 (3

Che

eta

Era

cont"nto

(4

Come

d'

le

avere

Cosa

(8)

Ch'

"ra

Chi

aveva

(11

Con

che

nel

was

vifne

Quando

Perche

la madre

regalato denari ha

li

scelto

I will tell you

recently by in

school

one

with

in

va

Direzione?

pacchettino? e

perche?

i biscotti

the

of the her1

an

feet

signora direttrice? ?

dei biscotti ?

XXXIV.

anecdote,

directress

classes

alia

comprati

aveva

EXERCISE

me

nupve?

b"lle scarpe

dice?

(9 (10

(1)

riconosc^nte?

il bambino?

aveva

ringiazipla direttrice? essa? Che cpsa gliregal"? il giorno dopo quando Cpsa ti^ne in mano

(5 (6 (7

(12

(quanti anni)

bambino

del ppvero

an^ddoto

a

coming

of

poor

a

if you

like.

(3)

school.

little

through

girl of her

(2)

It is

She

said

six years

shoes.

(4)

a

fact told

that

who The

came

there to

teacher

ITALIAN

234

GRAMMAR.

to (5) The child came school a few joy, clicking the heels of her1 new flowers the shoes on carrying in her hand some Catherine of Sienna. little picture of Saint and a (7) She went and made her a present of them.2 into the directress' room (8) This show her to gratitude. (9) The appeared to her the best way

managed

picture be

was

also

so

get her a pair of days after red with floor. (6) She was

to

beautiful

to

the

the

them

too?

flowers.

1

How

2

Regalare

her

to

(11)

is this to

I

like

flowers

in

this

Exercises

takes

a

direct

De

Amicis'

that

it must

really more

were

beautiful

more

much;

very

object. Cf.

do

you

like

and

XXXVII,

Vlnfermigredi

Tata.

Exercise

XXXIII.

XXXV.

The

XXXVI,

flowers

be translated?

pupil will explain extract, referring to the

"

her

to

kindly thought

EXERCISE

Note.

the

But

the

picture,and

it seemed

and

(10)

directress.

the

than

than

beautiful

very

ones.

new

the

of the

use

prepositions found above.

paragraphs XXXVIII

are

an

This

and

adaptation of

{Cugre.)

vestito da un giorno piovoso di marzo, ragazzo involto e un infangato, con campagnuolo, tutto inzuppato d' acqua dell' al portinaio di panni sotto il braccio,si presentava Ospedale dei di suo padre, presentando una Pellegrinidi Napoli, e domandava d' viso ovale bruno bel un un lfttera. Aveva p alii do, gli occhi vedere i semiaperte, che lasciavan pensierosi,e due grosse labbra Veniva da un denti bianchissimi. villaggiodei dintprni di Napoli. lavoro addietro Suo padre, partito di casa 1' anno a cercar per andare in Italia e sbarcato in Francia, era tomato pochi di prima a Napoli fatto in tempo improvvisamente, aveva appena dove, ammalatosi il suo arrivo dirle e a scrivere un rigo alia famiglia per annunziarle di quella notizia, che all' ospedale. Sua entrava moglie desolata inferma bimba di casa e una non perche aveva potendo moversi mandato un a Napoli il figluolo maggiore, con piccino, aveva fatto aveva suo padre. II ragazzo qualche soldo, ad assistere alia occhiata dieci II portinaio, data un' miglia di cammino. il ragazzo infermiere e gli disse che condusse1 l^ttera,chiamp un mattina

La

dal "

II

il

d'

padre. Che padre? ragazzo,

nome.

"

un

domando

tremante2

1' infermiere.

per

il timore

d'

una

trista

notizia,disse

236

ITALIAN

of his mother

desolation

GRAMMAR.

the

at

arrival

of the

letter.

(17) And

he

mother

dressed

in19

thought of death,15he saw his father dead, his black, the family in misery. I 4

8

2

opened." Translate through ="

' '

What

9

the

13

Cf.

15

Cf. 216.

(3).

222

14

Use

Translate 16Cf.

10

stare

st"tte molto

spalla,ed

una

domandp subito. Si, " mio padre,

"

mente.

"

ragazzo, senza "

risppse

"

la

supra,

Omit.

' '

8

Reflexive.

the

Use

vpi.

participle.

present "to

much."

="how

="recognize."

with

sink

one's self ".

198 (4). XXXVII.

t"mpo cosi. Quando ei si riscpsse: era una

le

padre?

arrived.

reflexive verb

with

EXERCISE E

" =

7

face swollen."

breathe."

="to

5

be used?

12

3

entering in."

"

air.

would

pronoun

"Hehad

=

II

="

^

"

tuo

una

mpnaca.

Che il

verra

pra

Che

"

disse

padre?"

venuto.

son

leggifragli toccp

mano

la

cos'

mfdico.

cps' ha1 supra,

ha? E

"

s'

mio

dolce-

Coraggio" allontanp,

dir altro.

Dppo

m"zz'

da

accompagnato

vide

pra

un

Cominciaron

vano.

al

arrivdrono

letto

questo il ragazzo

si

in

entrare

fpndo

assistfnte;la supra la visita, fermandosi vicino.

levp

Prima

ch'

al e

a

il

il

mfdico, infermiere seguiFinalmente letto. pgni camerpne

un

m"dico

li

si staccasse

da

in

pie, di,e quando gli s* avvicinp, si mise a Fatti animo, piangere. ^ il figliuplodel malato, disse la supra. disse il medico. II c' " ancpra 1$ grave, ma figliuplo, speranza. E domandar allpra avr"bbe voluto altro; ma non osp. ragazzo "

comincip la Npn da

sua

potfndo

bere.

vita d' infermiere. far altro

II malato

di ricondscerlo.

cop^rte al malato, gli dava dava npn qualche vplta; ma segno

accomodava

lp guardava

Senonch^

il

le

sguardo si arrestava piii s"mpre E cosi passp il primo giprno. II giprno dppo di lui. a lungo sppra che glipcchi del malato rivelassero un principiodi cosci"nza. parve Alia voce carezzevole del ragazzo che un' espressipne pareva di gratitu dine nelle pupille,e gli brillasse un momento vaga dir qualche cpsa. una se volesse vplta mpsse un ppco le labbra come che Dppo pgni breve assopimento, riapr"ndo gli pcchi, sembrava il suo cercasse piccolo infermiere. Vfrso sera, avvicinandogli il il bicchi^realle labbra, ragazzo credftte di veder sulle labbra gpnfie E un allpra comincip a riconfortarsi, a leggierissimo sorriso. E la d' con confusamente, ^ssere sperare. inteso,almeno speranza E esortava farsi animo. a gli parlava, gli parlava a lungo, e lp suo

EXERCISES.

che, anche

gli pareva

c"rto piacere la

un

di

sovente

bench" dubitasse

non

237

il malato

comprendendo,

npn

parlava, perchfc

capito, pure

esser

ascoltasse

con

voce.

sua

1

Cf. 84.

XXXVIII.

EXERCISE

(1) And so passed the second1 day, and the third,and the fourth. (2) The hours, the days passed, and the boy was always there with his father, palpitating at his every sigh, tossed without ceasing fifth The and pectedly, unexbetween day, (3) discouragement. hope the

sick-man his

shook

head,

as

if2 to3 say

it

that

when2

doctor

(4) The

worse.

grew

finished.4

was

rogated inter-

(5)

The

him. (6) In spite of2 the2 thing consoled it seemed to him5 that the sick-man fact2 that he was growing worse looked was6 (7) He slowly regaining a little intelligence. his medicine to take fixedly at2 the boy, he wished always more of the lips as if he movement a only from him, and he often made the boy continued to watch to say wished something. (S) And the entered a man him. (9) Suddenly about four in7 the afternoon followed (10) On seeing him the boy by one of the sisters. room,

boy

wept

and

yet

one

"

9

Father turned 8 and also ! sharp cry, the man gave a cry (11) "But how is this,"exclaimed "Bfppo! My little Beppo! taken to the the father,looking at the sick-man, " they have you how of another!" bed (12) "Oh, how glad I am! glad I am!" the boy. stammered (14) " And (13) And he could say no more. still (15) We can well, come, let us go home. son, I am now, my reach home this evening." (16) The boy turned8 to look at the at2 moment at that opened his eyes and looked sick-man, who " is10 him. I cannot. (18) There (17) No, papa," said he, wait that old man.2 (19) I have been11 with him about five days. (20)1 (21) He always looks at me, he looks at2 me thought he was you. and then I give him who (22) I do not know something 2 to12 drink. he is,but he wants he would die alone; let me stay here, dear me, heart. a (23) "Stay," said the father, "stay; you have papa!" of anxiety. mother at once to relieve (24) I shall go home your for your needs. (25) Here is money Good-by, my brave son." gave

a

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

1

4 5 8

10

Cf. 252 and Use feminine Use

form.

$.

Cf.

verb. 242.

9

"

3

Omit.

This

disjunctive form.

Reflexive C

2

129.

and

Why? Place

"he

Cf. 225.

similar 6

also 12

Cf. 215

cases

Cf. 81 "

at

are

(d).

end

Cf. 213

(a). sort

a 7

of

Cf. 198

of sentence.

(d).

neuter.

(3).

238

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

XXXIX.

EXERCISE

hanno lezione d' italiano? Quattro Quante vplte la settimana il il abbiamo lezione venerdi. il e il Npn V9lte, lunedi, martedi, giovedi il mercoledi, ne il sabato, e la Dominica " f"sta. Quanti abbiamo Domani 1' altro " del mese? l"oggi il quindici. Qggi " venerdi. Mercoledi Dominica. prpssimo sara il venti luglio," 1' anniverdel po"ta Petrarca. Ha le "$peredel Petrarca, sario della nascita ho volume. ne J^ il secondo. qui un signorina? Sissignpre,1 alia pagina dug"nto trentas"tte. sonetto predile,tto l"cco il mio Mi dica qualche cosa della sua vita. L"ggo spesso il Petrarca. sulla punta delle dita ma Volentiejri, capira che npn ppsso aver della vita di mess"r Francesco. tutti i particolaripiiiminuti Egli Allora in Ar"zzo. Man! non ejra fiorentino? Arfzzo " nacque cosi vicino Boccdccio a a Fir"nze! Neppur Giovanni " nato chi oser"bbe npn chiamar fiorentine le sue Fir"nze, ma nov"lle ? Continui. Petrarca immortali Bravo! que nacEbb"ne, Francesco il venti luglio del milletrecento quattro. ad Arezzo Suo padre, di Dante del partitoghibellino, amico e anch' esso " ra stato bandito dove esercitava ufficio pubblico. Ripada Fire, un mod^sto nze, i del ratosi a Pisa,affidp primi studj figliosuo, allora in eta di sftte anni, ad un vfcchio grammatico di quella citta. Due anni dppo, av"ndo la mprte dell' imperatpre Enrico sfttimo tpltapgni speranza la sua condusse ai Ghibellini,il padre del Petrarca famiglia ad trasferito la cprte pontifiAvignpne, dove Clem"nte quinto aveva il Petrarca, che Nel cia. ventitrfc aveva milletrecentoventisftte, bellissima anni, s' invaghi d' una gipvane avignonese, chiamata Se ella fosse stata Laura. avrejbbe libera, cfrto il Petrarca npn ad esitato un m omen to a farla sua mpglie, ma "ra sppsa Ugo V colo di Spde. secondo di usanza e sf Nulladimeno, quel specialdi quel paese, comincip a scrivere per l"i poesie che subito mente tutta la vita del Petrarca, lp rSsero illustre. Due amori dominano di Laura V ampre e mprto il diciquello della patria. Fu trovato otto luglio del milletrecentosettantaquattronella sua bibliot^ca Aveva la t"sta piegata sppra un libro ap"rto, che "ra ad Arqua. di Virgilio. V Eneide "

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

1

Frequently

used

for si

EXERCISE

(1) The fourteenth (2) Dante was

century born

was

signpre.

XL. the

in Florence

golden in the

age month

of Italian of

ture. litera-

May, 1265,

EXERCISES.

and

died

who

was

in

Paris

(5)

So

when

child and

and

1313

Boccaccio

and

and

died

last. in

eight

three

ought to of Boccaccio,

yean

old

and

before

days

the and

the

almost

four-hundredth

every

The

Boccaccio of

were

was

of

seventeen

intimate died

friends. one

year

(9) Every Dante, of Petrarch,

child

Italian

1375.

Italian

of

birth

born

was

December,

(S) Petrarch

Boccaccio.

anniversary

great trio,and

Petrarch

Boccaccio

of the

dates

21st

and

for Boccaccio.

model

know

(4) Giovanni

Certaldo

(3) Petrarch,

1321.

of the

the second

was

(6) Petrarch a

was

months

(10) The

Dante,

was

died.

Dante

(7) Petrarch five

than

the third

was

13th of September,

the

on

younger

Boccaccio in

Ravenna

at

239

the

does

birth

of

five-hundredth

know

them.

Dante

was

will

be (11) anniversary 1865. Bernardi Dante lectures on celebrated in 1965. (12) Professor on and nine Let and1 from to ten. us (13) Saturdays Wednesdays go I should like to but him hear to-morrow. (14) unfortunately go, Let I cannot. this us I have a so (1 5) afternoon, then, to lesson, go of the Uffizi Palace. in the court the statue of Dante see (16) Thank hour shall I expect you? pleasure! At what you, I will go with to four. (18) Well, then, (17) At half-pastthree or twenty minutes 2 good-byl

celebrated

in

1

Translate

"

2

to ".

Arrivederla.

XLI.

EXERCISE

una passeggiata. Che ne dite, Com'" bfl tempo 9ggi! Facciamo Andremo in campagna, li tutto il giorno. miei ? e staremo figliupli Andiamo! Siete pronti? io a Sta bfne, vado Si, si, mamma! quel mantellino pr^ndere il cappfllo. Dammi1 per piacere. E Si va un in cammino. adesso mettiamoci2 po'a vedere ci9 che vie,n3 nel campo alia strada ? vicino coltivato come Queste sono rape: la carne di b9ve 0 col riso,rifscono5 con C9tte4 insieme son bu9ne! di molto date e saporite; qui da noi se ne fa un gran consumo, loro una in tanto alle vacche, procurano tanto grande abbondanza il latte per il caff" della mattina. Ci danno di latte. Ma fa caldo mamma? Ecco una bella qu^rcia. Andiamo a riposarci nevvero, Stemmo li s9tto. Come si sta bene qui! qui, sotto questa qufrcia n' fa. ne V9lta, |, Carlino? Si, me gia una ric9rdo, "ra un anno bel giu9co con Feci qui un Giovannino. in collfgioadesso Vanno lui e Andrea, non stanno phi con n9i. Me ne andrg in coll^gio anch' io,mamma ?" Si,pensava di fartici entrare anche quest' anno, stavi bene al ma di pensarvi, non momento poich$ n9n 1' I19 fatto. Stiamo cosi insieme, mamma sempre mia, far" tutto per "

"

"

"

"

"

ITALIAN

240

imparare b"ne, anch' io, mamma?

GRAMMAR.

il parroco

e

dara

mi

le

lezione.

cos!

far

Posso

"

fateci tutt' e due, non possibile andar via! Ebbe,ne, ne parleremo un' altra volta,vi si"te riposati, ancora un facciamo p9 di passeggiata. il

Faremo

"

1

Cf

4

99

.

From

2 See mtetere, (b). c(u)9cere,99.

61.

3

From

venire,

5

From

riuscire,130.

132.

XLII.

EXERCISE beautiful weather

yesterday. (2) Did you take1 a and I. walk ? (4) We (3) Yes, we took a walk together,Andrew ber went1 into the country and stayed there all day. (5) Do you rememto Fifsoletogether ? that day, two years ago, when you and I went and Charles and I. You (6) Yes, we all remember that,I am sure, it always. we are and shall remember (7) Now going to school ing (8) Our parents were thinking of entertogether, all three of us. (1) It

two

us

The

(9) to

rector

time

also

walk

a

stayed

a 1

in

take

to

a

all that

school

walk

walk

very

we

2

"

go

at home.

B

="

yet

often

into the country under the trees and

rested

rested

were

is under

the

with

Da.

2

and had

little

a

one4

has

?

me

6

troubled?

so

you house.1

I cannot

(6) Yes,

me;

Future.

I

reallycould 3

Cf. 82.

Use

future.

to have

="

had."

XLIII.

are

friend's

sick

3

(4)

bear

the

I have

but

not

:i

have

4"it."

(3) Because

I must

finish

to

gone 5

there

go

thought

"

go

after

trees

few minutes. a (8) I ought (7) I can2 do I could do so4 because not yesterday, but my 5 and had I him the whole to amuse slightly-ill well. We in ten will wait. can (10) Very go I am Now not? ready.6 (12) I am (11) Yes.

1

on4

walked

we

it in

can

enough (11) We proud of sons? long les-

went

little."

a

(2) Why

other, although

with

be

may

they give you

possible."

=

(1) Sit down. going to my

you

Do

well

was

then.

!

Omit.

or

he

parents

our

well

not

was

long lessons last year, but we day. (14) It does one good to

EXERCISE

am

could

(12)

pleasant it

(17) How

he

that

so

every

when

then

Preterite.

4

did

day. (15) We all day. (16) We

games,

farther.5 had

2

until

home

at

every

there

beautiful

6

lessons

Charles

but

ago,

we go3 home. glad when (13) Yes, they gave us

and

take

half

he

But

best

our

a

him

gave

(10)

will all do

had

and

years

away.

go

us

very

was

of it.

have3

to

time some-

(5) Can

letter

my

I

first.

written

little brother afternoon,

was

(q)

minutes, can so glad that

alone.

Cf. 166.

"

Use

it

" ceo.

we

you

I

EXERCISES.

241

EXERCISE il cammello

Anche

qui in Europa

sa

quelliche come

a

di certi

tore a

curiosita.

nb

Perp

da'

non

sabbipsi,che

raggi

le lpro merci

ne

da

filo d'

un

all'

paese

un

que' piani desolati;guai

lpro perp

a

si suole

pensarvi

pffrono al ppvero

non

erba, ne

asilo

un

i mercanti

Ma

altro,debbon non

se

che

abbiamo

non

piu utili agli abitanti bfstie per queste ppvere

fatte

del sole.

cocenti

Noi

si

te-npn

tan

or

p

serragli,e

animali

sono

im

e.

ne'

Paiono

d' acqua,

sorso

diffnderlo

portare

fatti vedere

deserti

un

molto

important

"

i camelli.

che

paesi

animale

un

come'

ci vengon

vasti

quei

"

XLIV.

viaggiache

che

valga

d^bbono

traversarli

pure

i cammelli!

avessero

ne questi sopportar la sete molti giorni e non dpgliono i cavalli. di dorrfbbero per es^mpio viaggio Dopo un giorno

Ppssono come

faticosissimo

P"jrtanocon dosso.

giacciono movimento

un

Si pup

la notte

tutta

che

chimarli, e

dovremmo

sapere

Esauriti

finalmente

che

con

anche cadono

elemento

che

una

vplta

sabbia

piace a molti ragipne, le

persone

navi

del

sabbia

quella naufragate che crudeli, battute, era

per

dolersene.

senza

le

fanno

queste navi su

migliano a quelle altre navi pericolpsie sulle piagge

sulla

lpro solo

alle

sedute

deserto.

dove

si vedono

un

Ma

vplte naufragio.

cocente

rasso-

sugli scpgli coperte

mezzo

sul

cammino

dall'

sptto i

piedi. EXERCISE

(1) We1 (4) (5) the camel

Europeans (2) is.

do

not

know

XLV. (1) how

(3)

important

an2

animal2

of the horse the most wont to think are as (2) We useful animal. camels see (3) We only in menageries; neverthelesss we curiosities. ought not to think of them as mere (4) Many travelers would be3 lost in the great sandy deserts where no poor could horse it not that these beasts made for seem live,were pocr countries. such of a dry, sandy (5) A merchant, an inhabitant land, told me that his camel did not suffer from thirst during many those over days of most wearisome travel,and that it bore his wares desolate motion of the plains without complaining. (6) The camel also very was agreeable to him, as to many people. (7) By day he traveled seated on his camel's back, and by night he lay on the sand which could defend trees no by its side. (S) There were him from the scorching rays of the sun, and his4 head ached times somefrom the heat, (y) But it mattered nothing to the camel;

ITALIAN

242

seemed

it

is

is

happens

shipwreck. and

sand

were

(14)

water.

am3

(15)

If

camel

I

as

(17)

I

am

hear

about

my not

6

Noialtri. Use

badare.

to

I

and

at

see

the

they the

cross

shall

generally

we

2

Omit. 6

="to."

last

be

not

them

desert silent

(19)

shall

We

and

a

concerning2

its it

virtues.

please

Use 7

i

rimanere.

Preterite.

8

Repeat

Use

sapere.

you more

do.8

3

so.

faithful

know

to

now

called

choose

ought

the

by

be

Did

are

those

as

desert,

reason

I

by

last

conquered

(18)

now.

sand

the

hot

reefs at

"

of

with

the

and

the

fall,

make

upon cruel

desert

is,

ships

can

animals?

these than

to

concerning2

silent

about them

1

and

ship,

that

times some-

ships

on

the

to

the

it

yet

fallen

seen

belong "

sea

know

obliged

ever

am

I

wrecks

element

wished7

have

content.

(16)

to

I

ships

the

to

the

had

desert that

And

interesting

which

some

The

know

not

(n)

and

like

proper

belong

ships

other

I

their

by

seen

there

(10)

do

safely,

curious

These

(13)

conquered

have

lying

seashore.

the

I

(12)

who

it

cross

can

heat.

the

Europeans

these

that

notice5

not

in6

which

ship

a

did

fear

inspire

to

wont

camel

he

though

as

GRAMMAR.

glL

ABBREVIATIONS.

verbs

Irregular Where

m.,

follow

the

by

second

asterisk.

an

of

two

nouns

both

are

of

are

active

the

gender.

same

Where or

/.,

preceded

are

neuter

A

dash

va., as

vn.,

follow

the

of

second

two

verbs

both

indicated.

indicates

the

repetition

of

the

subject-

word.

244

VOCABULARY.

ITALIAN-ENGLISH

allpra, adv., then a,

a' =ai,

cf. art. il,40,

abbassare,

9cchi, to

to

cast

down

gli

"

the

adv. and

aborrire,

accomodare, to

to

va.,

in

put

amore,

date, accommo-

order,

to

to

accom-

range ar-

va.,

acqua,

obtain,

acquistare, va., to

to

gain

addietro, adv., behind adesso, adv.,

adv., still,yet

adoperare,

va.,

use,

to

make

of

use

*andare,

affanno,

grief adv., with

affannosamente,

courage,

take

courage

annunziare,

culty diffi-

anulare, ape,

affetuoso,

mind,

adj.,affectionate

va.,

in.,

[culty

adv., scarcely,with

*aprire, va.,

end

va.,

to

sharpen

/.,wing

allentare,

va., to

to

dirfi-

learn

open

arditezza, /.,boldness aria, /.,air, look, mien

that

aguzzare,

ala,

to, to the

uneasy old

ring-finger

affidare, va.,

affinche, adv., in order

announce

adj.,ancient,

*appr"ndere,

entrust

to

adj.,anxious,

affezione, /.,affection to

anniversary

m.,

/.,bee

appena,

heart;

year

m.,

antico,

amphitheatre

m.,

to

-,

go

anecdote

m.,

m., "

ansioso, m.,

to

vn.,

animo,

anno, to

to

vn.,

analogo, adj.,analogous anche, adv., also

anniversario,

now

tame;

love, affection

m.,

fare

adatto, adj.,suitable

to

va.,

anfiteatro,

/.,water

fall ill

to

vn.,

an^ddoto,

pany

like

mild

ancora,

accompagnare,

to

friend

m.,

become leave

love,

va., to

are,

ammansire,

va., to take

accomiatare,

else

ammalare,

abhor

to

va.,

am

amico,

inhabitant

m.,

adj.,other, different, any

thing

enough,

n.,

altro,

eyes

sufficiently abbondanza, /.,abundance abitante,

least

Alpe, /. pi.,the Alps

43

lower;

va.,

abbastanza,

adv., at

almeno,

prep., at, to

va.,

allontanarsi,

arrestarsi, v. ref.,to stay, arrichirsi,

to

va.,

go

to ref.,

grow

rest

rich

arrivare,r;z.,to reach, to arrive

loosen to

v.

to

away

arrivo,

;;;., arrival 245

at

ITALIAN

246 ascoltare,

breve, adj.,brief,short brillare,vn., to shine

listen

to

va.,

GRAMMAR.

asylum, refuge va., to assign assegnare, /.,absence assenza, asilo, m.,

assicurare,

va.,

assistente,

in.,

to

bruno, adj.,brown, bue,

di

carne

beef

"

,

buono, adj.,good, kind

assure

who

one

in., ox;

dark

assists,

buttare, va.,

to

throw, fling

*cadere, vn.,

to

fall

attendant

an

*assistere, va.,

to

assist

assoluto, adj.,absolute

assopimento,

drowsiness,

m.,

caff",in., coffee

coma

attaccare, va., to attach,

unite

*avere,

have;

to

va.,

sonno,

"

sleepy

Avignon re].,to approach

n.,

v.

/.,room,

camerone,

m.

room,

bambino,

baby,

m.,

cammino,

notice

to

aug.

ward

cammello, B

badare, vn.,

inkstand

m.,

hot

calzoni,in. pi.,trowsers cambiare, va., to change camera,

Avignone, pr. avvicinarsi,

calamaio,

caldo, adj.,warm,

autore, in., author avanti, adv., before

to be

caduta, /.,fall

chamber of camera,

big

(ofa hospital)

in., camel in., road

f.,country campagnuolo, m. and adj.,rustic campagna,

child

banca, /.,bench ban dire, va., to banish

Campid9glio, m.,the Rome)

barbaro, adj.,barbarous battere, va.,

to

beat, strike

Capitol (at

in., field

campo,

bfllo,adj.,beautiful benchfc,adv.,although be,ne,adv.,well *bere (bevere),va., to drink

capire,va., to understand capp"llo,m., hat

bfstia,/.,beast

carattere,

bianco, adj.,white

carezza,

bibliotjca,/.,library bicchi"re,m., tumbler,

carezzevole, adj.,caressing Carlo, pr. n., Charles

glass

in., infant

canarino,

in.,

cane,

dog

in.,

canary-bird

in., character

/.,caress

bocca, /.,mouth

/.,meat adj.,dear caro, carrozza, /.,carriage carta, /.,paper casa, /.,house

braccio,

cavallo, m., horse

bimbo,

biscotto, m.,

bisognare, vn., must,

m.,

carne,

biscuit to be

sary neces-

arm

ter adj., brave, skillful; inj.,expressive cf approval

bravo,

cercare,

va., to

search, seek

certo, adj.,certain

ITALIAN-ENGLISH and

che, rcl.

he

which,

that, how

interrog.pron., who,

and

keep

to

va.,

consumo,

us

ciascuno, adj. and

pron.,

vise counsel, ad-

to

m.,

each, continuare,

one

five

num.,

that;

C19, pron.,

continue,

to

va.,

", that

"

is to

contrariare,

to

va.,

vex

/.,conversation

conversazione,

circa, prep., about, concerning

coperta, /.,cover

citta,/.,city

*coprire, va.,

/.,class clemente, adj.,clement, mild

coraggio,m., courage /.,crown corona,

classe,

pr. n., Clement

Clemente,

corso,

m.,

corte,

C9cere (cu9cere),va., to cook m., college,school collfgio,

col9nia,/.,colony

thread

course,

,

/., conscience,

coscienza,

sciousness con-

colonist

coltivare, va.,

to

cultivate

cosi,adv., so, thus,

colui,dem. pron., he, he who adv., as, as if,like,how come,

credere,

cominciare,

cui, rel.pron.

va.,

to

commence,

cousin

va.,

D

da, prep., by, with, hend, compre-

understand

at

the

conduct, take,

guide

give davvero, adv., indeed, truly denaro,

confess, avow,

owe

confronto, m.t comparison confuso, adj.,confused

confusamente, adv.,confusedly

to,

among,

of

house

*dare, va.,

prep., with

confessare,va., to

whom,

curiosita, /.,curiosity,rarity

to move,

va., to

of

whom,

to ,

whose

(commu9vere),

agitate va., to buy comprare, *compr"ndere, va., to

such

believe

to

va.,

cugino, m.,

begin comm^dia, /.,comedy

*condurre,

cover.

affair

C9II0,m., neck

*comm9vere

to

/. court, court-yard corto, adj.,short C9sa, /.,thing, matter, object,

*cocente, adj.,burning, hot

m.,

go

on

say

con,

the

consumption, use isfied contento, adj.,content, glad,sat-

ci, adv., here, there

col9no,

(by

adj.,noisy

chiassone,

cinque,

conservare,

consigliare,va.,

ci, pron.,

know

va., to

senses)

who

each

247

ter]'., *condscere, interrog. pron., in-

who, chi, rcl.

VOCABULARY.

to

in

truth,

"n., money

tooth

dente, in., desfrto, m.,

desert

desiderare,va., desolato,

adj.

to

and

desire,long for pp.

of

lare, desolate, afflicted

deso-

248

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

destra,/.,right hand

*dovere,

va.,

must,

ought

di, prep., of di, m.,

day

dubitare, vn.,

eighteen

diciotto,num., dieci,num.,

due,

*diffndere, va., to

duke

num.,

two

defend, protect

difficile, adj.,difficult

dugfnto, num., two hundred durante, adj. and prep., during

dimenticanza., /.,forgetfulness dimenticare, va., to forget^^ dimorare,

live,dwell

to

vn.,

necessary,

doubt, fear

to

m.,

duca,

ten

be

to

E e,

conj.,and

dimostrare, va., show, prove dintprno, m., environs

eccezione, /.,exception

dipendfnza,/.,dependence

e,ceo,

to

*dire,va.,

to

ebbene, inter j.,very

tell,relate

say,

is,behold

rector'sEgiziano, adj.and di-

office

elemento,

right

emigrate emisfero, m., hemisphere Enrico, pr. n., Henry

discourse, sermon

to

*divenire, vn.,

to

become

entrare,

*dividere,

to

divide

frba, /.,herb, grass

dolce,adj.,sweet,

soft

erre,

vn.,

/.,the

to

*esaurire, va.,

dolcezza, /.,sweetness,

esclamare,

suffer;

to

mildness "

dolersi, of

ref.,to lament, complain domando, /.,demand, question domandare, "

di, to

domani, "

va.t to

ask

demand,

dominare,

/. Sunday dominate,

esercitare,

mand com-

/.,domination

dove, adv., where

,

to

low exercise, fol-

business, filloffice

esitare, vn.,

hesitate

to

/. expression espressione, ,

pers. pron., she

*"ssere,vn.,

to

be

being

esso, pers. pron., he

wards adv., after,after-

estr^mo,

m.,

extreme,

extremity

/.,age. Etrusco, adj. and w., Etruscan Eurppa, /.pr. n., Europe eta,

dqsso, di., back

for

"

estremita, /.,extremity

dgnna, /.,woman dopo, prep, and

va.,

some

e"ssere,m., dominazione,

exclaim

instance

essa,

,

va., to

va., to

exhaust

esortare, va., to exhort

adv., to-morrow;

1' altro,day after to-morrow

Domenica,

to

"r"

esfmpio, m., example; per

ask;

for, ask after

enter

letter

dolcemente, adv., softly,gently *dolere, vn.,

Egyptian

m.,

element

w.,

emigrare, vn.,

dito, m., finger

va.,

is,

building

direzione, /., management,

discorso,m.,

interj here

edificazione, /.. edification,

direttrice, /.,directress

diritto,m.,

and

,

there

director

direttore,m.,

adv.

well

ENGLISH

ITALIAN

VOCABULARY

249

francese,adj.and

pr. n., French

famiglia,/.,family

Francia, /. pr.

France

famigliare,";"., familiar, intimate

franco,adj.and frate,m.,

friend

fanciullo,

m.,

*fare, va.,

to

to

put

;

do, make; male

"

entrare,

"

t ;

,

passeggiata,to take

walk;

three

fa,

mesi

to

vento,

"

blow;

months

ago;

pp. of fare,

plete, com-

favorite

m.,

to

stop; fermarsi

da,

adv., until,as far

a,

from

Thursday giovedi,m giocare (giuocare), va., .

fiore, tit., flower

giupco, m., n.

and

entine adj.,Flor-

fpndo,

m.,

river

m.,

depth, bottom,

to

play

sport

swear

grandezza, /., greatness,

ness large-

heart,

end

adj.,heavy, grazia, /. grace grave,

/.,form, manner, adj.,strong f"?rte,

way

fra, prep., within, among,

to

forma,

game,

giurare,va.,

to

grammatico, m., grammarian grande, adj.,great, big, wide

Firenze, pr. n., Florence fiume,

young

man,

young

f.,

woman

finish

pr.

lie down

to

ginpcchio,m., knee /.,joy, mirth gigia, giorno,m., day

youth,

/.,window *fingere,va., to feign

finestra,

Fiorentino.

Ghi-

pr. n.,

gipvane (giovine),adj.,young and giovane (giovine), w.

finalmente, adv., finally

to

and

giardino,m., garden

finale, adj.,final

finire, va.,

throw

bellinc

*giacere,vn.,

filo,vi., thread, blade

"

to

,

m., son, figlio, /.,daughter, child figlia, little son m., son, figliuolo,

fin, fino, fino

/. courtesy, kindness gentilezza, Germania, /.,pr. n., Germany

giacchetta,/. jacket

child

;

genitpre,m., parent gfnte, /.,nation, people, race

gia,adv., already

stop, pause

festa, /.,holiday, festival

as

gamba, /.,!ci '6

ghibellino,adj.

va., to

,

outside

fuQri,prep., without,

gettare, va.,

fede, /.,faith

ref

brother

fratello, in.,

,

finished

fermare,

a

nice

fact

fatto, adj and favorito,

(in

gentile,adj., gentle, courteous,

hard in.,

brother

monk,

tre

ing, faticoso, adj.,laborious, fatigufatto,

Frank

n.,

a

become

farsi,ref.,to

pr.

religiousorder)

injure hur

to ,

una

"

child, little boy

;/.,

,

serious ;

thanks

Gr"cia,/.pr.

n., Greece

pi. grazie,

ITALIAN

25"

grosso,

adj.,big, full

guai, inter j.,woe!

interessante, adj.,interesting

beware!

interrogare,va.,

look

at

guardare, va., guardia,/.,guard guidare,va., to guide guizzare, vn., to glide,slide satisfaction,

taste,

gusto, m.,

*interrompere,va., intitolare,va.,

to

invaghire,va.

and

love

to

interrupt

entitle

ref.,to fall in

with

invasore, m., invader involto,

pleasure

interrogate,

to

examine

ask,

guancia, /.,cheek to

GRAMMAR.

bundle, packet

m.,

inzuppare, va.,

soak

to

io, pers. pron., I eri,adv., yesterday;

1' altro,

"

day before yesterday 1,def.art., cf.40, 43 llustre,adj.,illustrious,famous mmagine, /.,picture,image mmortale, adj.,immortal learn

va., to

mparare,

mperatore,

emperor

m.,

mportante, adj.,important mprestare,

lend

to

va.,

adv., mprovvisamente, suddenly n, prep.,

pectedly, unex-

in, into

nchiostro,

m.,

ate, adj., inconsider-

to

soil with

lei

del

"

-,

to

("you")

letto,m., mud

attendant

nurse,

m.,

nfermo, adj.,infirm, ill

ngfnuo, adj.,ingenuous nglese,adj.and pr. n., English innimico, m. and adj.,enemy, [imical niziativa, /.,initiative va.,

lavagna, /.,blackboard *l^ggere,va., to read leggifro,adj.,light use

in

the

(you);

pronoun

addressing one

to

to

bed

lettura,/.,reading levare, va.,

to rise, lift;v. ref.,

to

arise; "., rising lezione,/. lesson ,

li,adv.,there liberare,va.,

to

liberate,set free

libero,adj.,free libro,m., book

teach

nsetto, m., insect nsifme, adv. and prep.,

*int"ndere, va., intend, mean

Leo

n.,

/.,letter lfttera,

ndice, m., index- finger

nsegnare,

latte,m., milk

Leone, pr.

meet

to

ndi, adv.,afterwards

nfermifre,

m.,

leone, m., lion

va.,

nfangare, va.,

lip lamentarsi, v. ref.,to lament lapis,m., pencil lasciare, va., to leave, let

dare

foolish ncontrare,

labbro,

lei, pers. pron., her, she

ink

nconsiderato,

adj.,irregular irregolare, Italia,/. pr. n., Italy

Lidia, /.pr.

together

understand,

Lydia lingua,/.,tongue, language lo,def.art. and pers. pron., him, it,the

n.,

ITALIAN

252

naufragio,m., shipwreck /.,ship nave, pers. pron., us, to us, some, of it,for it; adv., thence

con].,neither, nor adv., neither, nemmeno, ne,

nor-

even

adv.,neither,nor-either adj. and indef. pron., nessuno, nobody no, none, contr. of non nevvero, " vero nifnte, m., nothing nippte,m., nephew nQ, adv.,no, not noi, pers. pron., we, us nominare, va., to name che, only adv.,no, not; npnno, m., grandfather npn,

"

ours

our,

notice

notizia,/.,news, nptte, /.,night

novella, /.,story, tale and

adv.,nothing nulladimeno, adv.,nevertheless ad].,new nuovo, nulla, in.

O oh! inter]., occhiata, /.,glance

o,

pcchio, m.,

eye

occidentale, adj., occidental, western

offer

to

dim.

ospedale,m., hospital osservazione, /.,observation eight ptto, num., pvest,

west

m.,

package; dim., pacchetto pace, /.,peace padre, w., father pacco,

country

paese, m.,

pagina, /.,page paio, m., pair palazzo,m., palace pallido,adj.,pale in., cloth; pi.,clothes panno, papa,

papa,

in.,

father

parfcchi,adj. pi.,several *parere,vn., to seem, appear parlare,vn., to speak, talk parpla,/.,word parte, /..part adj.,particular particulare, partire, vn., to go away, from, proceed from

come

party

vn.,

to

pass,

go turn

,

of upmo,

young

patronato,

m.,

patronage;

"

cco-

lastico,protection, assistance

little man

onorabile, adj.,honorable

pavimento, m., pavement,

in., honor

(Jpera,/.,work, piece literaryproduction operaio,m., workman

dare

to

vn.,

passeggiata,/. walk, drive, passeggio,m., walk

ogni, adj.,every

onore,

horror

m.,

passare,

9ggi, adv.,to-day

man,

orrore,

partito,m.,

*ofrrire,va.,

omino,

,

osare,

neppure,

npstro, poss.,

/.,hour; adv., now ordinario,adj.,ordinary, usual ordiniariamente, adv., ordinarily origine,/. origin pro, m., gold ora,

ne,

either,not

GRAMMAR.

paved

floor of

work,

pellegrino,m., penna, /.,pen pensare,

pilgrim, stranger

va., to think

ITALIAN-ENGLISH

VOCABULARY

253

pensiero, ;//., thought

poeta,

adj.,thoughtful,pensive pensieroso,

poi,adv., then

ref.,to repent pentirsi,.?'. per, prep., for, by, through, to, in order

to

perche, adv., why, because *perdere, va., perdonare,

lose

to

poiche,adv.,since, because politico,m., politician police,m., thumb polso,in., pulse p9polo, ;;/., people, nation, race portare,

pardon,

to

va.,

/;/., poet

give for-

pQvero,

,

to be able ; m.

adj., poor;

pr. n., Petrarch

m.,

bit, short

*piacere,vn. per

to "

,

ure; please; m. pleasplease,kindly strand

piaggia,/.,shore, *piangere (piagnere)vn. to weep piano, m. and adj.,plain mar/.,small square, piazzetta, ket-piace [one picchiare,va., to knock little small; m., piccino,adj., little adj., piccolo, piede,m., foot piegare,va., to bend, bow pieta,/.,piety,pity pietra,/.,stone pietruzza,/.,dim. of pietra ,

,

pigliare,va.,

to

take;

"

in pr$s-

tito, to borrow

pregare,

va.,

to

*prfndere, va., va.,

to

preparare,

presentare,

not

i

piii, ple peo-

adv., little,few,

much

poesia,

beg

pray, to

take prepare to

va.,

present;

/.,poetry, poem

v.

ref.,presentarsi,to appear prfstito, Di., borrowing adv., quickly presto, prezioso,adj.,precious prima, adv., before, at first primo, adj., first

principio,m., procurare,

beginning

va., to

procure,

help

give adj.,ready, pronto, prompt f., proniinzia, pronunciation pr9prio, adj., proper, peculiar; to,

cause

to

proseguire, va., prossimamente,

to

pursue

adv ,

soon,

shortly pr9ssimo, adj.,near,

adj. and

poverino,

adv., really

piovoso,adj.,rainy piu, adv. and m., more; majority, the most, most poco,

power

time ,

,

,

precisamente,adv., exactly; preciso, adj.,precise predicatore,;"., preacher vorite prediletto,adj., preferred, fa-

periodo,m., period perQ, conj.,therefore, but persona, /.,person pezzo,

,

dear

dim., poor,

Petrarca,

"

best

vn. *pote"re,

gerous pericoloso,adj., perilous,dan-

carry

adj.,possible;il mio possibile, my

perfino,adv., even

to

va.,

next

punta, /.,point, end

pupilla,/.,pupil of pure,

conj.,yet,

the

eye

still also

GRAMMAR.

ITALIAN

254

Q qualche, adj., some,

few;

any,

quale, adj. and

pron.,

who,

adj., how all;

many,

how

much,

day of

what

mese,

n.,

del

the

month

riconfortarsi,

*riconoscere,

*rincrescere,

ragazzo,

m.,

to

boy

tremble, shake, one's joice, re-

/.,turnip rassomigliare,vn., to resemble re, m., king va., to bring, give recare, rapa,

adv., recently

a regalare,va., to present, make present of regno, m., kingdom rfgola,/.,rule *r"ndere, va., to render, give

to

to

stay

return

to

senses.

rice

riso, m.,

rispettpso,adj.,respectful

*rispondere,vn., to answer ritratto,m., picture,portrait *riuscire, to

out

succeed,

to

vn.,

turn

be, become

rivelare, va.,

to

reveal

rivere,nza, /.,reverence,

respect,

salute

riverire,

va.,

to

revere,

salute

pr. "., Rome

Roma, rosso,

adj.,red

back, make restio,adj.frestive

take

resume,

,

recall

restare, vn., to remain,

fly for

riportare,va., to bring back riposarsi,v. ref.,to rest *risc9tere (riscuptere) va.,

tell,relate

raggio,m., ray, beam ragione,/.,reason rallegrare,vn. and ref.,to be glad ber, v. rammentarsi, ref.,to remem-

recentemente,

resort,

to

va., ripigliare, again

adj.,fifth

va.,

renounce,

shelter

fifteen

R

raccontare,

sorry

to

to

to

thank

to

va.,

give up riparare, vn.,

qufrcia,/.,oak qui,adv.,here

di,

"

be

to

vn.,

ringraziare,va., rinunziare,

num.

laugh;

to

four quattro,num., quello,adj.and dem. pron., that, one

recognize

to

va.,

vn.,

laugh at rigo,m., line

quinto,

take

ricordarsi, v. ref.,to remember

adj.,fourth quarto, num. quasi,adv., almost

quindici,num.,

ref., to

v.

riconoscenza, /.,gratitude

*ridere,

is it?

that

receive

to

va.,

Richard

riconoscfnte, adj.,grateful

abbiamo

"

Ricciardo, pr.

re-open

courage

which, what quando, adv., when quanto,

to

ricevere,

volta, sometimes

"

*riaprire,va.,

sabato,

m.,

Saturday

sabbia, /.,sand

honor,

ITALIAN-ENGLISH

VOCABULARY.

sabbioso, ad j.,, sandy

sentire, va.,

saggio,adj.,wise

senza,

saltare, vn., salutare,

jump

to

to

va.,

morning

255 feci hca:

to

prep., without

/.,evening s^rie,/..scries sera.

good-

greet, say

serraglio,m.,

to

ness salvatichezza, /.,wildness, rude-

enclosure,

menag

eric

servire, va.,

to

serve

sete, /..thirst

santita, /.,holiness

saporito, adj.,savory

sftte,

savio, adj.,wise, sage sbaciuccare, va., to kiss

/.,week s^ttimo, adj.,seventh sfortunato, adj.,unfortunate

sbarcare,

edly repeat-

disembark

to

va.,

*scegliere(scerre) ,

si pron.,

choose,

va., to

select

scellerato, adj.,wicked schermire,

ward

to

vn.,

off;

schermirsi, rej.to defend

one's

,

self

sci9cco, adj.,stupid scolare, m., scholar,

pupil

longing scolastico, adj., scholastic, beto the scorso,

adj. and

past,

Mrs.

signore, ;;?., gentleman,

sir,Mr.

signoria,/.,rule, government simpatico, adj., sympathetic, singhiozzare,vn., singolare, adj. and sinistro,adj.,left solamente,

scuola, /.,school, schoolroom

sole, m.,

conj.,if;

s"colo, m.,

"

non

century,

*sedere,

che, except

to

sit,to

seat

to

one's

to

seem,

sleep;

m..

aver

to

"

sleepy va.,

sopra, prep.,

to

support,

on,

upon,

sorflla,/.,sister appear

ually contin-

be

,

bear

semiaperto, adj.,half-open

adv., always,

accustomed,

sonnet

sopportare,

vn.,

be

adj.and adv., alone, only

sonno,

sfdia,/.,seat segno, m., sign *seguire,va., to follow

s"mpre,

penny sun

sonetto, m.,

self

sembrare,

soldier

wont

solo.

age

num.

vn.,

m.,

singular

adv.,only

m..

*sol|re,vn.,

excuse

adj.,second secpndo, adv.,according to secondo,

m.,

pp. of scorrere,

soldo,

se,

sob

to

soggetto. m., subject soldato,

to

certain

schools

last

va.,

people, they

signora, /.,lady, madam,

scrittore,m., writer

scusare,

self,one,

si,adv., yes sicuro, adj.,sure,

congenial

rock, reef

sepglio,Di.,

seven

num.,

settimana.

sorriso sorso,

smile

m.,

gulp, drink

m.,

sptto, prep sovente,

under ,

adv.,often

over

fer, suf-

256

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

Spagna, /. pr. n., Spain ish spagnuolo, adj.and pr. n., Spanspalla,/.,shoulder specialmente,adv., especially /.,hope speranza, sperare, va., to hope spesa, /.,cost, expense

testa,

and

m.

/.,head

Tevere, pr.

"., Tiber

timore,

fear, apprehension

m.,

toccare,

touch

to

va.,

*t9gliere (torre),va.,

explain to detach, leave staccarsi, v. ref., stanco, adj. tired, fatigued *stare,vn.,to stand, to be stile,m., style to bind, va. *stringere(strignere) draw together studiare, va., to study studio, w., study at subito, adv., suddenly, soon, to

,

,

tornare,

take,

to

vn.,

return,

come

back

/.pr. n., Tuscany toscano, adj. and pr. n., Tuscan tossire,vn., to cough traccia, /.,trace trag^dia,/.,tragedy /.,tranquillity tranquillita, tranquillo,adj.,tranquil,quiet Toscana,

trasferire, va., all at

sublime

to

away

tratto, m.,

once

sublime, adj.

contention.

scolding

take

,

adj.,third

num.

tiratina, /.,debate,

spesso, adv., often

spiegare, va.,

t?rzo,

transfer

to

time;

turn,

ad

un

"

,

once

,

suo,

pass., his, her,

hers

traversare,

/.,sister, superiore, adj.,superior, upper svoltata, /., turn, corner (of street) suora,

tremare, a

such

tastare,

va.,

tristo,adj.,sad, bad m.,

triumvir find

to

va.,

tuo, pass., thy, thine so

Torino, pr. tutto,

a

to

thirty

trenta, num.,

trovare,

many,

tremble

to

vn.,

triumviro,

tagliare, va., to cut tanto, adj.and adv.,so much,

n., Turin

adj.,all

touch, feel

father, daddy word)

tata, m.,

U

tine (infanuccfllo,m.,

bird

tivola, /.,table

ufficio,m.,

te, pers. pron., thee, thou

ultimo, adj.,last

tedesco, adj.and

umano,

tsmperino,

m.,

pr.

n.,

German

penknife

t?mpo, in., time, weather *tenere, va., to have, hold

/.,earth terreno, in., ground, land

t"rra,

cross

three

tre, num.,

nun

va., to

office,charge

adj.,human

Umberto,

pr. n., Humbert

unghia, /.,nail uno,

ind.

art.

one

uomo,

m.,

man

and

num.,

a,

an,

ITALIAN-ENGLISH

/.,

usanza.

*uscire.

out,

go

out

come

viaggio. take

to

V

*valere,

/., /

,

prep.,

next

near,

violence

visit ,

have

suffice,

the

viso,

adj., /.,

vista,

vast

face

;;z.,

vispo,

worth

adj.,

vasto.

and

adj.

visita,

to

be

power,

"

trip

a

violenza,

vague

vn.,

un

,

useful

adj.,

fare

journey

;;/.,

vicino,

vago.

traveler

ui ,

to

adj.,

utile,

257

viaggiatore,

custom

use,

vu.,

VOCABULARY

lively

merry,

sight;

a

prima

at "

,

Vaticano,

pr.

vfcchio,

adj.,

*vedere,

va.,

veleno,

*

venti,

adj.,

vestire,

to

va.,

adv.,

real

at

more,

away

viaggiare,

vn.t

to

pass.,

road much

more,

m.t

vgstro,

travel,

journey

zia.

/.,

zio,

m.t

willingly, time;

alle

sometimes

times,

volume,

dress

way,

/., turn,

volta,

desire

adv.,

volenti^ri,

be)

towards

/., street,

via,

(to

voice

/., will,

vgglia,

come

true,

prep.,

verso,

/.,

voce,

twenty

num.,

vero,

via,

to

/., vivacity

vivacita,

see

Friday

vn.,

sight

/.. life

vita,

poison

m.,

venire,

(first)

Vatican

ancient

old, to

m.,

venerdi,

the

n.,

aunt

uncle

volume

your,

yours

gladly v9lte,

ENGLISH-ITALIAN

VOCABULARY.

A

abhor,

va.,

be

able, to

approach, avvicinarsi,v. ref. braccio, in. arm,

aborrire "

,

(= weapons) arrival, arrivo, m.

potere

vn.,

about, prep., circa di absence,

/.

assemza,

absolute, adj.

arrive, arrivare,

assoluto

as,

,

ache, dolere, afraid, to

"

,

temere,

va.,

aver

after, prep., dopo afternoon, dopopranzo, in. afterwards, adv., indi, piu tardi an

hour

un'

"

ora

fa

how

do) in.

divertire, trattenere,

va.

ancient, adj. antico

altro

ref.

vn.

va.;

come

you

to

ten

"

di"ci anni;

aver

(=

how

do

you

sta

,

bear, portare, sopportare, va. beast, b"stia,/. beat to give blows), battere; ( =

,

altro,

un

because, conj.,perch^ become, *farsi,v. ref. bed, l"tto,in. bee,

/.

are

fame,

aver

=

and, conj.,e anecdote, an"ddoto, m. anniversary, anniversario, m.

apply, applicar,

hungry,

to conquer) vincere, va. ( beautiful, bello,adj.

,

n.,

old,

years

prep., da

*parere,

in.

sete, caldo, freddo;

voce

amphitheater, anfiteatro,

appear,

B

thirsty,hot, cold,

Alps, pr. n., le Alpe also, conj.,anche always, adv., s"mpre

anxiety, pena,

m.

"

alone, adj.,solo aloud, adv., ad alta

another, adj. and

author, autore,

back, dosso, m. bank, sponda, riva, /. to be, *" ssere, vn.;

all,adj.,tutto almost, adv., quasi

amuse,

assicurare, va.

assure,

baby, bambino,

,

air,aria, /.

among,

adv., siccome

aunt, zia,/.

paura

aofo,

vn.

*ascendere, *salire,va. ask, domandare, va.

vn.

be

armi, /.pi.

,

ascend,

accompagnare

va.,

accompany,

le

arms

ape,

/.

begin, cominciare, si a, v. ref.

*metter-

va.;

applicarsi, being, gssere, ;;;. belong, *appartenere,vn. 258

26o

ITALIAN

demand,

/.;to

domanda,

mandare,

GRAMMAR.

do-

"

excellence, eccellenza, /

,

exception, eccezione, /.

va.

departure, partfnza, /. dependence, dipendenza, /.

exclaim, esclamare,

deserve, meritare,

explain, spiegare,va. eye, 9cchio, m.

excuse,

va.

desolate, adj.,deserto

scusare,

va.

va.

destroy, *distruggere,va. die, *morire, vn. difficult, adj.,difficile difficolta,/./ with difficulty,

affannosamente,

"

"

face, faccia,/.; viso, m

*

fact,fatto,m.

adv.

director, direttore,m.

faith,fede, /.

directress,direttrice,/.

faithful,adj.,fedele fall,*cadere, vn.; caduta, /. familiar, adj. and n., familiare

do, *fare, va. doctor, mfdico,

dog,

cane,

m.

family, famiglia,/. far,adj. and adv.,lontano; adv., lunge fast, adv., prfsto, sollecitamente father, padre, m.

in.

door, p"?rta,/.

dry, adj.,arido duke, duca,

in.

during, prep., durante, dwell, dimorare,

per

feel,sentire,tastare,

vn.

each, pron., ciascuno edifice,edificazione, /.

Egyptian, adj. and

pr.

n.,

egi-

ziano

either, conj.;

nor

"

,

neppure,

nemmeno

empire, imp"ro, end, fondo,

flight(ofstairs) branco, floor,pavimento, m. ,

nemico, inimico, enough, adv., abbastanza enrich, arrichire,va. enemy,

m.

Florence, Firenze, pr. Florentine, adj. and

Etruscan, adj.and pr.

n., etrusco

every,

ognuno,

ciascuno

pr.

n.,

pron.,

follow, *seguire,seguitare, va. foolish,adj.,inconsiderato

n.

foot, piede, m. for,prep., per;

adv., mai and

n.

flower, fj.ore, m.

Europe, Eur9pa, /. pr. evening, sera, /. adj.

m.

fiorentino

vn.

entitle,intitolare,va.

ever,

feign,*fingere,vn. few, adj.and n., qualche; p9chi, m., pQche, /. find,trovare, va. finger,dito,m. finish,finire,va. first,adj.,primo; adv., prima five,cinque, num.

fixedly,adv., fissamente

m.

in.

enter, entrare,

va.

ogni,

conj.,pdich^ formerly, adv., altre vQlte,/.pi. fortunate,adj.,fortunato

ENGLISH-ITALIAN

found, fon dare, fourth,

H

va.

adj.,quarto

half, adj.,mezzo

free, liberare, va. French, adj.and pr. friend, amico,

261

VOCABULARY.

hand, francese

n.,

m.

happen, *accadere, happy, adj.,felice hat, cappfllo,m. have,

G

/.

mano,

*avere,

head, capo,

gain,acquistare,va. giu9co,m. game, gate, pprta. /. at, guardare, va. gaze, to generally,adv.,generalmente gentleman, signore, w. German, adj.and pr. n., tedesco Germany, Germania, /. pr. n. girl,ragazza, /. give,*dare, va. glad, adj.,contento gladly,adv., volentieri "

go, *andare, vn.; to darsene, ref.;

to "

"

gold, Qro, golden, adj.,d'Qro,m. good, adj., bu"?no, dabbene (placed after noun) ; day, bugn giorno; by, addio; to "

"

governor,

to, far bene

heart, cu9re, heat, calore,

m.

heel, tacco,

m.

hemisphere, emisfero, Henry, Enrico, pr. n. here, adv., qui, qua; his, pass.,

va.

m. m.

is, ecco

"

suo

history,st9ria, /. home, casa, /. honorable, adj., onorabile,

ono-

revole

hot, adj.,caldo house, casa, /.; at the

/.

of, da,

"

prep.

how, adv., come, quanto however, adv., bench^, pen) human, adj.,umano I

m.

grazia,/. father, grand, adj., grande; son, nipote,m. m.; n9nno, grass, erba, /. gratitude,riconoscenza, /. great, adj., grande; greater, maggiore; very great, sommo greatness, grandezza, /. Greece, Grfcia, /.pr. n. green, adj.,verde grace,

"

ground, terreno, m. guide,guidare,va.

sentire,

a

governatore,

"

m.

hear, *udire,

away, hope, sperare, va.; speranza, out,*uscire, horse, cavallo, m.

m.

"

va.

an-

vn.

do

vn.

if,conj.,se;

as

"

,

ill,adj.,malato;

come

dim

se

somewhat .,

ill,sickly,malatuccio

indeed, adv. and index

inter j.,davvero

indice, m. (finger),

inhabitant,

abitante,

ink-well, calamdio,

m.

w.

insect, insftto,m.

inspire,inspirare,va. instinct, istinto,

m.

interesting, adj.,interessante interrogate,interrogare, va.

262

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

like,adv., come

intimate, adj.,intimo invader,

invasore,

like

m.

(

love),

to

=

amare,

va.;

piacere,

irregular,adj.,irregolare Italy,Italia,/. pr. n.

vn.

lion,leone,

m.

lip,labbro, m. J John, Giovanni, pr. journey, viaggio,m. jump, saltare,vn.

literature,letteratura,/.

little, adj.,piccolo,piccino; adv. and adj. poco lively,adj.,vispo long, adj.,lungo look, at, guardare, va.; to

n.

,

K

"

"

va. keep, conservare, kindly, adj.,buono king, re, m. kingdom, regno, m. kiss, baciare; repeatedly,

for, cercare,

loosen, allentare, va.

lordship,signoria,/. lose, *p|rdere,va.

"

sbacciuccare,

va.

knock, picchiare,va. know, by the senses, "

re;

va.

love,

amore,

m.

love,

amare,

va.

va.

Lydia, Lidia, /. pr.

recognize, *riconoscere; mind, *sapere by

n.

=

M

adj., matto

mad, make, lack,

.

lower, abbassare, *conosce-

the

"

.

vn.

mancare,

*fare, va. m.

upmo,

man,

lady, signpra,/.

manage,

fare in modo

land, terreno,

manner,

modo,

m.

language, lingua,/. last, adj., ultimo, scorso;

m.

adj. and n., molti, m.; tanti, e molte, /.; so many, master, maestro, padrone, m. impormatter, cgsa, /.; to many,

at

"

"

,

adv., finalmente

laugh, *ridere, vn. lay, *porre,va. learn, imparare, va. leave, lasciare, va.;

di

"

,

tare,

maggio,

may, to

take

"

,

accomiatarsi, ref. lecture, fare un discorso,parlare,

vn.

m.

mi

pers. pron., me,

me,

*intfndere,

mean,

medicine,

va.

medicina,

/., medici-

nale, in.

vn.

left,adj.,sinistro

meet,

leg, gamba, /. lesson, lezione,/.

menagerie, serraglio,m. merchant,

letter,l"ttera,/.

mere,

adj.,puro,

mild,

to

lie, "

down,

life,vita,/.

*giacere, vn.

incontrare,

ref.

va.

mercante,

grow

m.

semplice ammansirsi.

"

,

v.

ENGLISH-ITALIAN

north, nprd,

military,adj.,militare mind,

animo,

minute,

minuto,

notice,

misfortune, disgrazia,/. denaro,

month,

mese,

m.

va., badare

osservare,

infermiere,

nurse,

m.

111.

O

111.

m. (people),i piii, mother, madre, /.

object,cpsa, /. oblige,obbligare, va.

pi

most

motion,

movimento.

observe,

/.

ocean,

movimento,

movement,

old, adj., v^cchio; to be difci anni years ", aver

m.

"

,

quan-

,

(=

to

be

obliged),*dovere,

vn.

myself, pers. pron.,

stesso

me

me,

nominare,

va.;

npme,

m

va.

narrare,

naturally, adv., naturalmente necessity,bisogno, m. neck, C9II0,m. ,

"

bisogno,"/.

mai,

in faccia

a

to, affinche

"

ordinarily,adv.,ordinariamente origin,origine,/. other, adj. and pron., altro ought (expressing duty), *doveie,

need, necessitl, /.

adv., non

-aprire,va.

"

order, in

,

never,

to

opposite, prep., or, con].,0, pd

(finger-nail)unghia, /.

narrate,

uno -a; indef.art. and num., ad uno one una vplta by one, solamente adv., only, adj. and aperto ; pp., open,

one,

,

N

name,

prep., su, sppra

on,

how

tanto

"

over,

vn.

prep., per

mai

nevertheless, adv., nondimeno

adj.,nu9vo night, nptte, /. adv.,np, non; no, nobody, nessuno,

new,

nessun

altro

pron.,

ten

"

much, adj.,molto; so

m.

often, adv.,spesso

Mr., signor(e) Mrs., signora to;

mare,

of, prep., di

*mpversi, v. ref.

move,

va.

osservare,

occidental, adj.,occidentale

m.

mountain, montagna, mouth, bpeca, /.

none,

(sl),

adv., pra. adesso

now,

adv., piu

more,

nail

;;/.

frate, m.

monk,

must

America,

vn.

m.

monarca,

money,

quaderno,

nothing, niente,

m.

misery, mis^ria, /. monarch,

book,

note

mio

North

in.;

del Nprd

America

;;/.

mine, poss., il

263

VOCABULARY.

nessuno

adj.,nessuno m.;

"

painfully,adv.,affannosamente pair, paio, 111. pale, adj. pallido palpitate,palpitare,vn. carta, /. paper, ,

else,

parent, genitpre,m.

264

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

part, parte, /. pass,

R

vn.

passare,

/. pen, penna, /. pencil,lapis,m., matita, /. people, pppolo,m., gente, /. period,periodo,m. picture, pittura,/.,ritratto, immagine, f. piety,pieta,/. plain,pianura,/. play, giocare (giuocare),va. fare bene pleasant,to be please,*piacere,vn. pleasing,adj.,piacevole pace,

peace,

"r"

(letterof the alphabet),erre,

race,

g"nte, /.

ragged, adj.,stracclato raise, levare, m.,

"

,

range,

va.

v. ref. allungarsi,

rascal, briccone, furfante,

raggio,m. read, *lfggere,va. reading, lettura, /. ready, adj. pronto really,adv., davvero ragione,/. reason, ray,

,

pleasure,piacere,m. plump, adj.,grassotto

recall,ricordarsi,v. ref. recently,adv., recentemente

poet, pofta, m. poison, veleno, m.

recognize,*riconoscere, rector, parroco,

politician,politico, poor, adj.,pQvero m.

potere,

praise,lodare,

relate, raccontare,

va.

preacher,predicatore,

precious,adj.,prezioso to regalo, dono, m.; present, fare un make regalo,un a "

,

dono

present, presentare, va. va. *stringere, profound, adj.,profondo pronunciation,pronuncia, /. proper, adj.,pr9prio proud, adj.,superbo, contento province, provincia,/.

press,

pulse, polso,m.

pupil,scolare,m. Q regina,/. queen, quickly,adv., stibito quiet adj. tranquillo ,

m.

va. regain,riacquistare,

in.

m.

,

va.

red, adj.,rosso m. reef, sc(?glio,

ritratto,m. portrait, power,

m.

va.

relieve,levar (uno) di pena remain, *stare, restare, vn. remark,

osservare,

remember,

va.

ricordarsi, vn.

va. repeat, ripftere,

reply,*rispondere,vn. republic,repubblica,/. adj.,rispettoso respectful, v. ref. rest, riposarsi, restive,adj.,restio va. ripigliare, resume, right,diritto,m. right,adj.,destro; adv., a destra dito anulare, anulare, ring-finger, m.

rise,levarsi, v. ref.

river,fiume,

m.

road, strada, via, /. rcsy,

adj.,rgseo

ENGLISH-ITALIAN

fila,f.

row,

/.;("=dominion)

r"gola,

rule,

*cprrere;

singular,singolare,w. sink, *imm^rgersi, v. rcf. sister, sorella; =nun,

signona. /. run

scappare,

away,

"

sit

S

same,

adj.,stesso

sand,

sabbia, /.

/.

sleep,spnno, "u. aver sleepy,to be spnno slowly,adv.,lentemente small, adj.,piccolo that, affinch^ so, adv., cosi;

safely,adv., sicuramente salute, salutare,

"

,

va.

"

sob, singhiozzare, vn. soldier,soldato, m.

sandy, adj.,sabbipso Saturday, sabato, m. *dire, va.

some,

pron., alcuni

school, scupla, /.

something, qualche

scolding,tiratina, /. scorching,adj.,cocente

sometime,

seat, s" dia, /. second, adj.,secondo

*vedere,

seek,

sorry,

va.

*parere, sembrare,

seem,

September, settembre,

vn.

the

head, crollare il capo

*rincrescere,vn.

"

,

Spanish, adj. pr. n., gnuplo speak, parlare,vn. spite,in malgrado /. sponge, spugna, =park, piazza, /. square, stair, scala, f. balbettare,vn.

stammer,

she, pron.,

ess,a

stare, guardar fisso

ship,nave,

/.

staring,adj., fisso statue, statua, f.

make

gare,

shoe,

naufra-

"

,

statute,

vn.

/. spalla,/.

show,

mostrare,

sick,adj.and

res

stick, bastpne, stone,

in.

tare,

vn.

m.

pietra,/. stop, fermarsi, v. ref.

va.

m.,

statuto,

stay, *stare,

Scarpa,

shoulder,

malato

sasso,

/;/.,

ruscello, in.

side, lato, m.

stream,

sigh,sospiro, m. sight,vista, /.

street, strada,

/.

street-corner,

svo^tata,

silent, to be Simon,

"

,

*tacere,

pr. n., Simone

since, conj.,poiche

spa-

"

sharp, adj.,acuto

shipwreck, to

giprno

,

m.

series, sfrie, /. shake

be

to

and

va.

cercare,

/.

sometimes, adv., qualche vplta adv., subito soon,

seashore, spiaggia, /.

see,

cpsa,

other, un

or

"

p V altro

m.

mare,

sea,

v.

/. ref.

sej

slate, lavagna,

sad, adj.,triste

supra,

(down), accomodarsi,

six, num.,

vn.

say,

265

VOCABULARY.

vn.

/.

strong, adj.,fprte

study, studiare, va.t studio, m. stupid, adj.,scipeco

266

ITALIAN

GRAMMAR.

throw,

style,stile, m. subject,soggetto,m. sublime, adj.,sublime such, adj. and adv., tanto

thumb,

del

sole

m.

time, tempo, m., vglta, f. tired, adj.,stanco to-morrow, adv., domani too, adv., anche

superior,adj.,superiore giurare,vn. swear, swell, gonfiare,vn. swollen, adj.,gpnfio

toss, agitare,va.

towards, prep., verso trace, traccia,/.

table, tavola, /. take, *pr"ndere, *t9gliere,va.; to walk, fare una a pas"

tragedy, trag^dia,/. tranquillity, tranquillita,/. travel, viaggiare,vn., viaggio,m. traveller,viaggiatore,m. tree, albero, m.

trio,trio,m.

seggiata teach, insegnare, teacher, maestro,

va.

m.,

lagrima, /.;

tears, scoppiare

maestra, burst

to

in

/.

into

lagrime

tell,raccontare, narrare, than, adv., di, che

and

dem.

quello,quel tale;

triumvir, tritimviro,m. trouble, *affliggere, affannare,va. true, adj.,vero

truly,adv., davvero Turin, pr.

va.

n., Torino

*v9lgere,va. Tuscan, adj. and pr.

turn,

va. thank, ringraziare, thanks, grazie, /.pi.

that, pr.

si

Tiber, Tevere,

"

va.

m. pgllice,

thus, adv., co

suffer,*soffrire,va., patire,vn. rise,il levare sole,m.; sun,

tear,

gettare, buttare,

two,

num.,

n.,

toscano

due

adj., quel, "

U

is,cio"

that, rel.,che

understand, capire,va.

their,poss., loro then, adv., allora, ppi; conj.,

unexpectedly, improvvisamente unfortunate, adj., sfortunato;

dunque

ly,adv.,sfortunatamente

"

there, adv., la, li;

"

is,

"

are,

unite, unire,

va.

", vi sono thin, adj.,magro

until, prep., fino

thing, cosa, /.

usually,adv.,ordinariamente

vi

think,

pensare,

us,

vn.;

credere,

va.

V

third, adj.,terzo

thirst,sete, /.

verse,

this,dem., questo

very,

thought, pensi^ro,m.

vex,

three, num.,

Victor

tre

through, prep., per

a

pron. pers., noi

verso,

m.

adv., molto; contrariare,

Emanuel,

Emmanuele

adj.,stesso va.

pr.

n.,

Vittprio

INDEX. Heavy-faced figures refer to paragraphs.

(4); by di, 212

2ii

da,

pi.,p. 38,11.1 ; feminines in, 50, 56; pi. of o nouns, 63, 64; sign of masc. feminine sing.,42, 50; use of

a, masculine

noun

36 (a), p.

n.

123,

bupno

sere

abstract

accent,

31,

of,in irr. vbs.

role

accentuation, which

n.

acute

ad

of

conj.

176;

249

addpsso,

n.

p.

pounded com-

ai in

n.

be

to

translated,

2.

n.,

forms

109,

Rem.

Rem.

2;

adv.

from,

118; 131,

of, 1

in p.

;

109;

used

as

1 1

157,

n.

3.;

irr.,

place of, 58, 129, 130, preceded by a, 132;

gree de122,

and

238,

237,

n.

1,

239;

and

superlative,p. of, 163,

1.

dates, p. 168, magno, n.

n.

1.

(2),

44

ex.

1.

(1), Rem.

51

altri added

to

altrimenti,

237

ambiguity

of

noi, voi, 92

(b).

(6). possessiveavoided,

138.

analytical

and

synthetic

parison, com-

120.

aspron.,ioc,

-lie, formation

121,

modification

3;

Alessandro

of,

adjective,44 (6) ; agreement

of

243;

affirmation

absolute n.

Alpe,

33.

36 (a). not

124,

of,

use

Oi

-frrimo adj., (a); adj. sometimes, 128;

form

p.

of

-issimo

.

92,

pron.,

240;

comparison,

244;

(c) and

accent,

108;

1

to

112,

forms

verbal

from

n.

17, words 1

242,

manner,

ing fall-

2.

for a,

p.

p.

added, p.

with

76,

,

30;

suffix of

4;

35;

of irr. verb,

stem

on

(b),

of 34,

239,

ner, man-

negation, 245, 246; of time, 247; comparison of, 248, 249; positionof, 250 ; formation of,

333,

32,

241,

and

"s-

(1), 51

44

(1); 50 (3).n-

place, 125,

by

238,

237,

64, Rem.

a, p.

nouns,

15S, n. 1. adverbs, classes of,236; of

3.

ability,idea of, rendered

adv., 238(a),

as

p.

a, ad,

of, 5;

value

prep., 211;

used

213;

(3); by

an

dare

used

to

express

sive progres-

action, 81 (1/)(1);

duty. andarsene,

81

(1), (2).

107.

269

to

press ex-

INDEX.

270 -ando, pres. part, in,

part, in, in;

-ante, pres. for -ando n.

1

112.

in pres.

-ante

part., p.

49,

comes ; -ante, -ente, part, in, bep. 146,

noun,

antimeridiano,

n.

1.

{ante

a.m.

diem), meri-

256 (b). in,

apposition,nouns

(2).

49

arci-, 164.

def., omitted

in exclamation, with

omitted

cejnto,

cal (c); in numeri-

mille, etc., 251

3. 44,

n.

augmentative suffixes,167. auxiliary verbs, 74; tables 57-

PP-

58;

of" 76, 77;

use

76, 77, synopsis,

77

78, 79, 80; modal

(a)and (b), dovere,

aux.,

potere, volere, fare, sapere,

82, 83; lasciare as

avere,

74;

vb., 235 in

83; modal

auxiliary

214;

auxs.,

as,

as,

(a).

description,44 (7);

lish (a), 80; translating Eng"to be", in idioms, 84; avere da, 84 (6); irr. of, 180 79

(3); past part, with, p. 84,

n.

1

; to denote

of

113 age,

(6), 258.

255

Carlo

magno,

n-

of

(2),Ex.

44

(c) and

1.

c"nto, without

(/). (4), 251

art., 49

(0vbs.

in, 70 (1).

of, 16.

vbs. n.

vowels

67, 68, p. 51,

of

n.

2;

reg. p. 52,

1.

che, rel., 145,

146;

146 (a) ; as noun, in inter., 154;

(fr),p.94, to

127;

neuter,

as

p. 104,

1

che

1;

p.

non,

question 170,

n.

2.

148; chi-chi, 148

(a); inter.,153. -chiare vbs., 69 (3). and place of, 242, ci, adv. use 243-ciare

251

(e),

vbs., 69 (2).

ci9,140.

4-

bravo,interj.,asadj.,p. 170,

n.

4.

e

and

accent,

use

of, 34.

of ch in learned

1,

;

comparison,

n.

introduce

chi, rel.,145,

n.

words,

19(c); exception, p. 11. close e, 5, 8; representing Latin

rendering of,

P- I09.

days

(c).

for cento, 251

cl instead

b, value of, 12. back vowels, 6.

254.

ployed em-

ending in, 69 (1).

circumflex B

"both",

speaking

implying doubt,

compounding with, 78,

verbs

251;

-care,

126

oned reck-

15, 171

116

characteristic

of,

suffix. 124.

numerals,

vbs.

ch, value

2.

cc,

in

month.

-cere,

audacie, p.

(a),16;

(2); masculines in, 59; feminines in, 60. capitals,use of, 37.

c"n

2 assimilation,p. 25, Rem. (c). -astro,with adj. of color, p. 112,

n.

(a). -ca, adj. in,

n.

titles,257.

14. 15

before

c

def.,

(a); in-

superlative,122

157;

Rem.;

cardinal

article,repetition of, 46; with

of,

c, value

8; rules for, 9.

close 0, 5, 8; representing Latin 6 and u, 8; rules for, io, n.

INDEX.

masculines

-co,

in, 62;

116, p. 44, n. collectives, 254.

of, 119, of

3.

degrees equality, 121;

j

.

120;

and

by

123,

of

che, 126;

125;

(2),p.

119;

,

of

superiority,122, di

correspondence bet and English, 38.

comparison

124;

cotesto,

of, 139

use

3.

of, 1 42.

use

crossingof two

constructions, p.

riority, infe-

95, n. 1. of inflected cui, 145, 147, p. 105,

of adv., 248,

vbs., 127;

n.

102,

r

Italian

wren

costui, contemptuous

of ad

comparison

adj. in,

27

n.

n.

p. 106,

2;

1.

249.

compound

[180(4). irregularityof,

77vbs.

compound compounds, syllabicationof, 29 (0,Ex. 53, 66.

nouns,

with

compounded

da

=

(b);

116,

175, p.

63,

n.

from

n.

6;

inf.,

of, 230,

use

for

anterior

(b). conjunctions, simple,

simple

tense, 230

217;

ondary, sec-

followed

218;

subj.,219, conjunctive

by

233.

220,

place of, 99,

pron.,

of, 96, 98,

pp.

76, 77;

table

99;

and

replacing poss., change of (b), 101; ment agree-

art.

(8), 137 form of, 99 44

(2);

of

past part, with, 113 (b),114; p. 85, n. 2. classification of, 1 consonants, (6); tables of, pp. 2, 3; value of, 12

seq.

cided contraction, 36; of inf.,174; de-

by

ear,

past part., p.

pi.fut., p.

50,

p.

of, 213;

n.

of

week, gender of 51 (1). defective vbs., 181, p. 54, n. 3. ,

definite article,forms

or

139;

pron.,

(1), (2), 141,

140;

142,

forms

of,

remarks

143,

with

139 on,

pounded com-

144;

art., 43;

art.

with, 45 (3). di, before preceded pcrs. pron. by prep., 183; prep, followed

by, 185, 186. 187 (a);

2;

of

3d

after

vbs.,

of articles

after

adj.,212

prepositions,43.

Madama,

used Madamigella, p. 31, 2; distributively, 44 (1); in in expressions of dates, 255; time, 256; replacing poss., 44 (8), 137 (1), (2); with che, 146 (a) and n. 1. dei takes gli,p. 27, n. 3. demonstratives either adj. are

n.

2;

use

n.

of

n.

of, 40;

with

45;

1;

ofunonot

by, 187; 215 (6).

(e).

n.

3;

da, 84

avere

="to",

118

30,

49,

indicated, p. 28, with

prep,

of, 44,

3.

conditional

(3);

followed

dare, irr. of, 178 (6),180 (1),(2).

pronouns,

formed

13.

"as",49

days

conditional

of,

dabbene,

92.

p.

d, value

use

compound con

D

of vb., 75, 76,

tenses

omitted,

212;

47,

212

use

of,

(1) (a);

ception (2), p. 32, Ex(b); ="on", 45 (7);

48,

212

212

(3); of partitive, (4) ; of comparison,

INDEX.

272 126 in

95, Rem.,

(a), p. adv.

(5); (7).

212

expression, diacritic signs,35. -dico, adj. in, 124 (a).

212

diminutives,

refl.vbs., 78, 103,

with,

duration

45

(2), Rem. suffixes,166.

diphthongs,

83, Rem.

28.

(1), (3).

180

1

ble disjunctivepers. pron, 85; taof, 86; use of, 85, 87, 88,

90,

91,

92,

where

used

objects,98 (5).

two

doubling of pron.,

99

initial

cons,

(b) and

n.

of vowel, 99

dropping

irr.

114;

of,

in

conj.

(a);

fore be-

suffixes,171.

time,

259;

time

of

in

day,

1;

(a),114; (p. 60); vbs. compounding used

vbs.

with, 78, 79, 80;

stead in-

of, 81.

junctive esso, essa, dis-

95;

93,

forms

of

aux.

past part, with, use of, 77, Rem.

113

dire,irr.of, 178(6),

89,

of

expressions of

diminutive

as

ing 173, 178 (b),179, 180; denot-

used

art.

-"rrimo,adj. in, 124. fssere, conj. of, 74;

of both

used

persons 2; used

and

things, p. 67, n. redundantly with meco, etc., 92 (a). euphony in placing adj.,131 ; in suffixes,171 (b). -evole, adj. in, 124 (a).

dapppco, 118 (e). E

f, value e, value

of, 5,

9;

c

and

for ph in words

12;

of Greek

before,

g

of,

origin,p. 26,

Rem.

(a)" (b); gender of nouns 3(b). of a ending in, 51; pi. (fern.) fare, conj.pron. with, 99 (p.77), Rem. nouns in, 56; sign of fem. pi., (d); irr. of, 180 (1),(2), J5

42,

of

50;

ed for e,

pi.,63, 64.

masc.

36 (a).

Italian, p. 66, elision,36, p. 73, n.

Ella,Lei elleno

n.

anche,

neppure,

" =

you",

seldom

in

suffixes

-ente, for end} 1;

with

in pres.

da, and

a,

in, 184

n.

fractions,252 (b). front vowels, 6.

modern

of,

nouns

(a).

124

(d). from

future, formed

91.

used

endearment,

n.

fino used

fu, 118

Italian, p. 66, n. 5. emotion, subjunctive of, 232

49,

p.

2.

of,54;

ending, 30 (2) (a).

-fico,adj. in, and

3 ; of

in

masc.

denoting

of time, 259.

feminine, formation

5.

n.

nemmeno,

142,

of, 82, 83;

use

duration

ei=egli,p. 66, n. 3. egli,ella used of both persons and things,p. 67, n. 2. used in modern eglino seldom

che,

(3);

116,

n.

6;

inf.,175,

p.

of, 229.

use

(2).

168.

part., p. in, in. pres. part,

g,

value

of,

doubled, suffix, 124,

14,

15, 171

15

Rem.;

(a).

(b), 16; before

INDKX.

-ga,

7J

infinitive,conj. pron.

adj.in, 116 (2).

with,

(pp. 76, 77); tive negapendent, n. imperative,p. 51, 4; depreceded by a, 211 out (2),(3); by di, 212 (1); with-

II

of,p. 26,

h, omission in

and

-care

Rem.

-gare

("i) ;

2

vbs.,

69;

of, 16, 21, 27, 59. hundreds, higher numbers value

counted

by,

251

99,

for

Rem.

prep., not

art.

(d).

214;

used

44

(9);

with,

rendered

as

noun,

English, (e);232

by subj., (1); rendering Eng. past part., 221

I 223.

i,c before,15 (a); for y in words of Greek origin,p. 26, Rem.

insieme

used

with

con

with

and

(a).

a, 184

261. interjections, (6); gender of nouns interrogatives, forms of, 152; ending in, 51; used in exclamations, 157. pi. of nouns ending in, 57; interrogativevb., 72. prefixed before impure s, p. -ire vbs., taking either termination, n. 4; sign of masculine 123, do plural,42, 50; to indicate pro71 (6), 71 (c); that nunciation, not take -isco forms, 71(a). 61, 69 (2), 70; value of, 5, 22. -io,plural of nouns in, 55, Rem. -iare vbs., 69 (4). 2, p. 44, n. 1 ; of adj. in, 117. il for lo,p. 72, n. 1. of, 173; irregular verbs, stem forms from, p. 102, n. 3. models struction of, 177 (a), (6); conille, il quale,145; distinguished from of, 179. -isco endings, 71. cui, 147 (a). -issimo, adj. in, 124. impari, 118 (a). iste, forms pron., p. 102, n. 3. imperative, force of future, 229 it," translation (3); irr.,180 (3); use of, 231. of, 94 and n. imperfect tense, 73; imperf. ind. 3

(a); g before, 15

'

for conditional,

230 (a). vbs., 181; conj. with, 99, Rem. (a) (p.

impersonal pron.

76).

j, semi-consonant, 6,

n.

n.

1.

1;

value

in, p. 32, Ex. (a); denoting end of motion, (2) and n.; 204 with

credere, p. 142, inchoatives, Latin, p. indefinite

syntax

n.

50,

article, forms

table

of,

p. 2,

23,

pronunciation of

6.

n.

of,

44,

K

k, not occurringin Italian

1.

p.

p.

bets; alpha,

3

(a).

41;

of, 49.

indefinites,158, 159, 160, 162; as, phrases used subjunctive with, p. 1 10,

of, 12.

161,

1, value

160:

lasciare,

n.

2.

Rem.

conj. pron. (e)(p. 77).

with,

99,

INDEX.

274 Latin

gender,

retain

nouns

week, def.

p.

(6);

38,11.1. letters of

alphabet, 3.

ne

li for il in dates, p. 27,

168,

n.

n.

2,

p.

of months,

for ci,p. 72,

n.

44

(12). of, 45 (2).

relatives,names

near

n.

junctional, con-

218.

n9 for non,

(11)

44

2.

neuters-, Latin, p. 38, n. ng, value of, 17.

1.

lo,neuter, p. 73, 5. adverbial, 248;' locutions,

with,

art.

1.

246 (a).

"nobody," rendering of 161. non, place of, 246 (b); without negative value, 127, 246 (c). ,

loro,

n.

p. 72,

(a);

with, 135

art.

conj.,

4.

non

M

e

vero,

nosco,

p. 70,

69, n.

p.

n.

3.

2.

"nothing," rendering of 161. nouns preceded by a, 211 (5); by di, 212 (a); in apposition preceded by di, 212 (6). ,

"3f,12.

value

m,

madama,

p. 31,

n.

2.

madamig^lla, p. 31; n. 2. (1). pi. of, p. 45, Rem. mago, and in comparison, 125 manco n.

1.

(1). (2), (a),55, Rem. Ex. (c) Vergine, 44 (2), 50

mano,

Maria

and

n.

Lat.,

meco,

feminine

nouns

ending, p.

developments of,

two

mfglio,p.

n.

n.

1

; as

adj. noun,

nouns

of, 251

(6). (10),251-261.

numerals,

44

numerical

idioms, 260. O

suffix,237.

o,

5, 8;

and

au,

open

Latin

o

art., 49 (4),251 (c).

molto, 128.

monosyllables,by contraction, 3;

of, 5, 8; diphthongized forms, 69 (5),70 (3); in dropped questo and cotesto, 141 ; for a in imperf.,p. 50, n.

o, value

4;

1.

adv.

mille without

n.

60, 61, 62,

56, 57, 58, 63, 64, 65;

in verbal

1.

91,

as

p. 6,

55,

59,

in

92.

-mente

42,

(2) (6).

50

65, n.

p. 162,

39,

2.

masculine

me,

number,

1 1

;

representing 8;

sign

in of

syllables, monoline mascu-

singular,42, 50. jective, objective forms used for sub-

pi. of, 57.

95.

253. multiplicatives,

od for 0,

36 (a).

ogni, 118 (a), 162. onde, 145,

N

107, n,

of, 12, 17. of cities,of continents, of

value

names

countries, of lakes, of rivers, of seas,

44

(5); of

days of

n.

149;

derivation

1.

-one,

167, 172 (a).

-one,

-oni

open

0.

order

of, p.

as

adv.

suffix, 239.

5, 8.

of two

conj. pron..

100.

276

INDEX.

provincia,p.

n.

44,

2.

pseudonimo,takes lo, p. purity n.

n.

27,

vowels,

of Italian

p.

3. 4,

impure, 36 (6).p. adj. before, 115 (b).

s, 19;

1.

santo, forms

of, 12,

q, value

sc, value

p. 8,

n.

2, 162.

n.

qualcgsa,gender of, 50 (2) (b). quale, 155. quanto,

seco,

quello,inflection of, 141 qaesti

'

=

'the

mer", for-

questo, use

",

",

of,

use

;

former latter

Rem.;

with,

114;

5-1 51;

in

92

(a),

249

to

form

used

sovra-,

164.

always

pressed ex-

express

81

(a).

with,

104.

of

n.

1,

(1), (2); used

progressive action,

per, 81

(a),p.

reg.

141,11.

1.

of

vbs., 68;

irr.

178, p. 116, n. 2; stressed stem, 176, 178 (d).

stra-, 164.

strong vbs., p. 116, 182

su,

(6); followed

(b). subj. imperf.

lative, super-

of

n.

1.

by

per,

command,

187 231

(a), 232.

subj. pres. n.

for

imperative, p.

51,

5.

subj.,use

(c). instead

235.

vbs., 173,

past part,

to form

to

stem,

with

Italian, 150*

repetitionof adv. rimanere

164.

stare

possessive with, I37 (2); synopsis of, 102, 106. relative, indefinite, subj. after, (4) (a). 232 relative clause, rendered by inf., subj. in, 232 (4). 224; relatives, 14

234,

for siano, p. 57,

sopra-,

past

(a), 98. vbs., compound 114;

167,

105

reflexive

78, 103,

of tenses,

spia, 50 (1),Exc. stare, irr. of, 180 103,

"ssere,

collective, p.

a

constructions

143.

part, with, 114. recluta, 50 (1), Exc. redundant construction, 95

not

sequence

143.

R

reciprocal yds.,

99,

3.

si,

143.

with,

(e)(p. 77).

sestina

sieno

of, 142,

n.

sentinella, 50 (1), Exc.

143.

"the

and

92

n.

=

21.

se, 93-

Rem.

quasimente, 237 (b). quegli,139 (1),0); -"the

142;

of, 20,

sentire, conj.. pron.

128, 156.

121,

178 (6),180 (3).

-sciare,vbs., 69 (2).

3.

qualche,118 (b),p. 89,

1;

of, 115.

irr. of,

sapere,

Q

n.

27,

subordinate

of, 232,

233.

clause, subj. in,

232

(1). of

passive, 81 (c).

"ssere

suffixes, 163,

meaning

165-172;

in, 170;

with

loss

of

adv.,

INDEX.

163,

n.

p. in,

(a) and

249

1,

277

(b).

V

superlative,subj. after, for su, 36 (a). sur

ofimperf.dropped, p.

12;

v,

n.

(3).

44

surnames,

(3).

232

5.

conj. pron.

vedere,

syllabication, 29. forms, synthetic

123,

Rem.

124.

used

form

of,

t, value

instead

99,

of "ssere

to

passive,81 (6).

verbal

222.

221,

noun,

verbs, reg. conjugation of, 67; table of, p. 49; of second conj.,

13.

128.

tanto,

with,

(e) (p. 77).

venire

T

50,

p. 54, vi, adv.

teco, 92.

n.

and

1

2.

place and

of,

use

242,

is", rendering of, 83,

there

243-

Rem.

2.

titles,44 "

vocative,

(2), 135 (b). of

", rendering

to

(1), 214,

215.

tocco, fori'

256 (a),

una,

voiced

consonants,

voiced

s,

voiceless

troppo, 128.

forms

two

Rem.

26,

p.

(4).

25, Rem.

vowel, n.

su

accented,

vowel,

p.

10,

(3).

2.

end

nouns

followed n.

by

(1),p. 39, n. 5. before, 36 (a), p.

p.

123,

1

;

ble, ta-

2.

a

W

nantal, conso-

1;

in,

5.

p. 5;

1.

vowels, classification of,

U

u,

n.

Italian

vowel,

word,

same

p.

s, 19.

p. 69,

vosco,

of, 91.

1.

19.

volere, irr. of, 180

truncation, 36. use

p.

voiceless consonants,

triphthongs, 28.

tu,

(a),45 (1).

of, 91.

voi, use

(2), 212

211 ,

(2),Exc.

44

18; Eng. replaced by o,

p.

Rem.

25,

2

(6);

nouns

ending in, 50 (3). udire, conj. pron. with, 99, Rem. 0) (p- 77)tional, uncertainty expressed by condi(2). from, p.

w,

uno,

-a, 251

(a);

by

ventuno,

251

(a).

noun

occurring 2;

in

Italian

phabet, al-

pronunciation of,

3(a). weak vbs., p. 116, n. 1. rendering of, 151, "what",

154

(a).

230

unde, form

not

107,

n.

r.

X

modified

trentuno,

etc.,

x,

not

occurring 2;

in

Italian

phabet, al-

pronunciation of,

278

INDEX.

Eng.

(a);

3

Rem.

25,

c

s

or

replaces,

"you",

p.

(a).

(2)

rendering

of,

p.

n.

50,

2,

91.

Y z .

not

y,

2;

3

in

occurring

Italian

pronunciation

phabet, al-

of,

z,

zz,

fore"

(o).

i 1

\

value

P-

of, 27,

n.

26; 3.

il

or

lo

be-